Hp Hewlett Packard Veer 4G Atandt User Guide

Hewlett-Packard-Veer-4G-Atandt-User-Guide-786229 hewlett-packard-veer-4g-atandt-user-guide-786229

Veer 4G (AT&T) - User Guide Veer_UG_ATT_en Free User Guide for HP Mobile Phone, Manual

2015-08-14

: Hp Hewlett-Packard-Veer-4G-Atandt-User-Guide-786229 hewlett-packard-veer-4g-atandt-user-guide-786229 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 278

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

User Guide

Intellectual property notices
© 2009–2011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein
is subject to change without notice. Microsoft, Exchange ActiveSync, and Outlook are
trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Facebook is a registered trademark of
Facebook, Inc. Google, Gmail, Google Maps, and YouTube are trademarks of Google, Inc.
LinkedIn and the LinkedIn logo are registered trademarks of LinkedIn Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Yahoo! and Yahoo! Mail are registered trademarks of Yahoo! Inc.
Amazon, Amazon MP3, and the Amazon MP3 logo are trademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its
affiliates. Quickoffice is a registered trademark of Quickoffice, Inc. PDF View is provided by
Documents To Go®, a product of DataViz, Inc. (dataviz.com). All other brand and product
names are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. All screen images simulated.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Hewlett-Packard, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss
resulting from the use of this guide. Hewlett-Packard, Inc. and its suppliers assume no
responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this
software. Hewlett-Packard, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or
loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to
make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.
Patent pending. This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
Email, mobile number, and related information required for setup and activation. Actual speeds
may vary. Required data services sold separately; unlimited plan recommended and may be
required. Not all web content may be available.
Open Source License information
You can view the Open Source License terms on your smartphone. Tap the center of the
gesture area and then tap the Launcher icon. Swipe left until the PDF View icon appears. Tap
PDF View and then tap Open Source Information.pdf.
You can also view the file on your computer. Connect your smartphone to your computer with
the USB cable. On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. On your computer, locate and
double-click the removable drive named for your smartphone. To locate the drive, do the
following for your operating system:

•
•
•
•
•

Windows Vista/Windows 7: Open Computer.
Windows XP: Open My Computer.
Mac: Open Finder.
Linux (Ubuntu): The drive is displayed on the desktop.
Other Linux distribution: The location of the drive may vary by system.

After you open the drive, double-click the file Open Source Information.pdf.

Recycling and disposal
This symbol indicates that HP products should be recycled and not be disposed of in
unsorted municipal waste. HP products should be sent to a facility that properly
recycles electrical and electronic equipment. For information on environmental
programs visit hp.com/environment or recyclewirelessphones.com/.
As part of HP’s corporate commitment to be a good steward of the environment, we strive to
use environmentally friendly materials, reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in
electronics recycling.
v. 1.0

Contents
Chapter 1

Welcome
8
9
10

Chapter 2

Your HP Veer 4G
What’s in the box?
Where can I learn more?

Get to know your smartphone
Set up your smartphone
Charge the battery
Turn your smartphone on/off
Use gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Update the HP webOS operating system

Just Type
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
36

Just Type overview
Get in touch with a contact
Search the web
Find information in an application on your
smartphone
Create a new item such as a message or memo
Open an application
Repeat a recent search
Customize Just Type

Work with applications
40
41
42
43
48
48
48
50
52
54
55

Basics
14
18
19
21
23
28

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Open applications
Go up one level in an app (back gesture)
Use the menus
Enter and save information
Close applications
Delete applications
Manage applications in Card view
Manage applications in the Launcher
Manage online accounts
View and work with notifications
Create and work with favorites

Copy files and sync your personal data
58
59
61
61
62
63

Copy files between your smartphone and your
computer
Overview: Get your personal data onto your
smartphone
Transfer data from an old phone
Export data from a desktop organizer on your
computer
Get data from an online account in the cloud
Sync your desktop organizer and your smartphone

Contents

Chapter 6

Phone
66
70
71
71
74
75
75
77
77
79
83

Chapter 7

Contents

Contacts
Calendar
Tasks
Memos
Clock
Calculator
Facebook

Photos, videos, and music
138
138
143
146
147
150

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Camera
Photos
Videos
YouTube
Music
Amazon MP3

Quickoffice® mobile office software
PDF View

HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
190
191
191
193
193
194
194
195
195

Chapter 13

Wi-Fi
Palm mobile hotspot
VPN
Web
Location Services
Google Maps
AT&T Navigator
YPmobile
Bluetooth® wireless technology

Documents
182
185

Contacts, Calendar, and other personal
information
110
121
128
132
133
135
135

Chapter 9

Email
Messaging: All messages in one application
Messaging: Text and multimedia messaging
Messaging: Instant messaging

Web and wireless connections
154
158
161
163
169
170
171
176
178

Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
86
98
101
104

Chapter 8

Make calls
Receive calls
Use voicemail
What can I do during a call?
What’s my number?
View your call history
Work with favorites
Save a phone number to Contacts
Use a phone headset
Customize smartphone settings
Use SIM Toolkit

Chapter 10

Browse applications in HP webOS App Catalog
Download a free application
Buy an application
Reinstall a deleted application
Set up a billing account
Update or delete a billing account
Manage applications with Software Manager
Update a downloaded application from a
notification
Manually check for application updates

Preferences
198
202
203
206
208
209
211

Backup
Date & Time
Device Info
Exhibition
Regional Settings
Screen & Lock
Sounds & Ringtones

Chapter 14

Troubleshooting
216
218
222
223
225
226
227
229
230
231
233
234
235
238
238
239
239
242
243
244
244
244

6Ts: Ways to get your HP Veer 4G working again
Palm profile
Battery
Screen and performance
Phone
Hands-free devices
Synchronization
Data connections
Email
Messaging
Wi-Fi
Web
Calendar and Contacts
Camera
Photos, Videos, and Music
Amazon MP3
HP webOS App Catalog
Transferring information to and from your computer
Backing up and restoring data
Updates
Transferring information from another HP webOS
phone
Making room on your smartphone

Glossary of Terms
Online accounts available for HP webOS
smartphones
Specifications
Regulatory and safety information
Index

Contents

Welcome
Congratulations on the purchase of your HP Veer 4G.

In this chapter
8
9
10

Your HP Veer 4G
What’s in the box?
Where can I learn more?

Chapter 1 : Welcome

Your HP Veer 4G

NOTE When referring to the company that makes your Veer, this document uses
both the terms HP and Palm. HP and Palm are the same company; the use of both
terms reflects company terminology.

In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the following:
• An advanced wireless smartphone running the HP webOS platform
• A full suite of organizer applications: Contacts, Calendar, Memos, and
Tasks
• High-speed data transfer with 4G, 3G, and GPRS/EDGE support
• Wi-Fi capability
• A 5-megapixel digital camera
• GPS functionality
• Integrated text, multimedia, and instant messaging (IM)
• Applications to view and manage Microsoft Office and Adobe PDF files
• HP webOS App Catalog, from which you can download applications
designed for your smartphone; select from an ever-expanding list of
applications
Your Veer puts HP webOS—a multitasking, gesture-based operating
system—inside a small, beautiful device with a keyboard that you can slide
out whenever you need it. Here are a few highlights of your new
smartphone.
Gestures: On your Veer, you make calls, move around, and manage your
applications and info by making simple gestures either on the touchscreen
or in the gesture area directly beneath the screen. For more information, see
Use gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch. Carry the Quickstart Guide
(included in the box with your Veer) around with you for reference. Soon
you’ll know the most important gestures by heart.

Chapter 1 : Welcome

Multitasking: You can have many applications open at once and easily
move among them. Go to the Launcher to open apps. See the lineup of your
open apps in Card view. Tap an app to bring it into the foreground and work
with it. For more information, see Open applications. You can also send
email or surf the web while on a call.
Just Type: Need to call Ed? Just slide out the keyboard and type ed. If he’s
listed in your Contacts, you can get his numbers from the search results. Tap
a number and you’ve made the call. Just Type works just as fast when you
need to search the web, find info in an application on your smartphone, start
an action such as creating an email message or memo, or update your
status on social networking sites such as Facebook or Twitter. For more
information, see Just Type.
The HP Synergy feature: The HP Synergy feature works in the background
to gather your information from the various online sources where you keep
it and then display that information in a single view on your smartphone.
You can access your info quickly without having to remember where you
stored it.
For example, suppose you have a Google account for personal email,
contacts, and calendar events, and an Exchange account for your corporate
email, contacts, and events. The Email, Contacts, and Calendar applications
on your Veer all provide a view in which you can see information from both
of those accounts in one place—but even though the information is brought
into one view, the sources of that information are kept separate. For more
information, read about linked contacts, layered calendars, and the single
inbox for your email in Contacts, Calendar, and Email.

NOTE See for the current list of online accounts that you can set up on your
smartphone and for information about the behavior of these accounts.

Thanks also to the Synergy feature, in the Messaging application, all your
conversations with the same person are grouped together in one chat-style
view. If you start an IM chat with Ed, for example, you can continue the
same conversation when Ed signs out of IM by sending him a text
message—and you can see it all in the same view. For more information, see
Messaging: All messages in one application.

Sync: Your Veer gives you synchronization without a cable. You can sync
with online services so that you can store and sync your info in online
accounts. For more information, see Get data from an online account in the
cloud.

Hardware

Your Palm profile: When you set up your smartphone, you create a Palm
profile by entering a valid email address. Your profile gives you an account in
which to create and store contacts and calendar events. It also gives you
access to services like automatic updates and automatic, frequent backups
of any of your info that is stored only on your smartphone and isn’t
synchronized with an online account (see What information is backed up?).

WARNING Please refer to Regulatory and safety information for information that
helps you safely use your smartphone. Failure to read and follow the important
safety information in this guide may result in property damage, serious bodily
injury, or death.

What’s in the box?

•
•
•
•
•

HP Veer 4G
USB cable (charging and data transfer cable with magnetic connector)
AC charger
Standard lithium-ion battery (installed and nonremovable)
3.5mm headset adapter

All of the following items are included in the smartphone box.
DID YOU KNOW? The USB cable included with your smartphone (the one with

the magnetic connector on one end) is used both to charge your smartphone
battery (see Charge the battery) and to connect your smartphone to your
computer as a removable USB drive (see Copy files between your smartphone and
your computer). To simplify charging, you can purchase an HP Touchstone
charging dock (sold separately). You also need to purchase a compatible USB cable
if one is not included in the charging dock package—the charging cable for your
Veer is not compatible with a Touchstone charging dock.

Print material
• Quickstart Guide
• Limited Warranty
• General User Guide: Important Safety and Legal Information

Chapter 1 : Welcome

Where can I learn more?

• To view Help topics for a single application: Open the application,
open the application menu, and tap Help.

• On-device Help: Read short how-tos and watch animations on your new
smartphone.
• To view all Help: Open Help
.

• Online start-up help: Visit palm.com/gettingstarted to view videos on
basic topics such as managing info, transferring data, and maximizing
battery life.
• Tools available from online support: Visit palm.com/support to access the
200+ page User Guide detailing every facet of your smartphone. On the
support site you can also edit your Palm profile, watch how-to animations,
and access a tool to help you export data from your desktop to your new
smartphone (the Data Transfer Assistant).

Chapter 1 : Welcome

• Peer-to-peer support: Visit forums.palm.com to share your experiences
and get help and advice from fellow customers.
• Self-paced learning guides: Visit learning.palm.com to take a free online
tutorial about your new smartphone. Available in English only.
• Customer service from AT&T: For questions about your mobile account or
features, contact AT&T customer care.

Chapter 1 : Welcome

Basics
You’re about to discover the many things about your
HP Veer 4G that will help you better manage your life
and have fun, too. Read this chapter to learn about
your smartphone and take the few easy steps to set it
up and get it running. Then learn about the gestures
that make moving around on your smartphone easy.
Later, after you’re familiar with your smartphone,
you’ll want to personalize the settings and add
applications to make it uniquely yours.

In this chapter
14
18
19
21
23
28

Get to know your smartphone
Set up your smartphone
Charge the battery
Turn your smartphone on/off
Use gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Update the HP webOS operating system

Chapter 2 : Basics

Get to know your smartphone

Front view

Slide out the keyboard
• Hold the smartphone as shown below and gently push up.

TIP When you are on a call or using data services to check email, browse the web,
and so on, you may experience better sound or connection quality if you keep the
keyboard slid out.
1 Earpiece: When you hold your smartphone up to your ear when on a call, the screen
darkens. See Why the screen goes dark.
2 Touchscreen: Tap and make other gestures directly on the screen. See Touchscreen.
3 Volume
4 Gesture area: Make the back gesture and begin other gestures here. See Use gestures: tap,
swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
5 Keyboard: See Use the keyboard.
6 Charger/connector: Connect the magnetic end of the USB cable to charge your
smartphone battery (see Charge the battery) or copy files (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer). Connect the magnetic end of the 3.5mm headset adapter
provided to connect a 3.5mm headset (see Use a wired headset).
7 Microphone

Chapter 2 : Basics

NOTE The volume you set for each individual audio component is saved
automatically, whether the audio component is the earpiece of your smartphone,
a wired headset, a wireless headset that uses Bluetooth® wireless technology,
music heard through the speaker, music heard through a headset, and so on.
When you return to using an audio component, the audio plays at the volume you
left it the last time you used that component.

Keyboard

1 Option: Press to enter numbers, punctuation, and symbols that appear above the letters on
the keys (see Enter alternate keyboard characters), or to move the cursor (see Text selection
gestures).
2 Shift: See Enter uppercase letters and Text selection gestures.
3 Space
4 Backspace
5 Enter: Press to enter a line return (for example, in a memo or in an email message you are
composing) or to accept information you entered in a field. See Enter information in a field.

Touchscreen
TIP Be careful not to scratch, crush, or apply too much pressure on the

touchscreen. Do not store your smartphone in a place where other items might
damage it. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or aerosols to clean the
smartphone or its accessories.

Card view

1 Just Type field: Displays text you type to look for, create, or use information on your
smartphone, without needing to go to a specific app. See Just Type.
2 Wallpaper: The background image in Card view. You can customize your wallpaper. See
Change your wallpaper.
3 Quick Launch: Bar containing up to four icons for the apps you use most, plus an icon to
open the Launcher. You can customize the apps that appear in Quick Launch. See Open an
application in Quick Launch and Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch.

6 Sym: Press to enter symbols and accented characters that don't appear on the keys. See
Enter characters from the symbols table.

Chapter 2 : Basics

The Launcher

Icons in the title bar
Table 1. Title bar icons and descriptions
Item

Description
The battery is being charged.
The battery is fully charged.
The battery is low. See Charge the battery.
Airplane mode is turned on. This means that the phone,
Bluetooth® wireless technology feature, and the Wi-Fi and
VPN features are off (incoming calls go to voicemail). See
Turn wireless services off (airplane mode).

1 Application name: Displays the name of the currently open application. Drag down over
the app name to open the application menu.
2 Launcher: See Open an application in the Launcher.
3 Connection icons: Show the status of wireless service connections and battery strength
(see Icons in the title bar). Drag down over the icons to open the connection menu.
4 Page indicator: Shows that there are Launcher pages to the right of the currently displayed
page. Tap to move to the next page. You can also swipe right or left on the screen to move
among Launcher pages.
5 Page name: Tap and hold to change the name (see Rename a Launcher page).
6 Notification icons: Show missed calls, new voicemail and email messages, and more. Tap
the bottom of the screen to view notification details. See View and work with notifications.

Wi-Fi is turned on. The number of filled-in bars denotes
signal strength. See Wi-Fi.
The smartphone is searching for a Wi-Fi network.
The phone is on. The number of filled-in bars denotes signal
strength. See Turn wireless services on.
Your smartphone is connected to a GPRS data network. See
I don’t know if I have a data connection.
Your smartphone is connected to an EDGE data network.
See I don’t know if I have a data connection.
Your smartphone is connected to a 3G data network. See I
don’t know if I have a data connection.
Your smartphone is connected to a 4G data network. See I
don’t know if I have a data connection.
Your phone is on and connected to the AT&T network.
Your phone is searching for the AT&T network.
The AT&T network is not available.
Your smartphone cannot detect or read your SIM card. You
can call your national emergency number only. See Set up
your smartphone.
Bluetooth® wireless technology is turned on. See Bluetooth®
wireless technology.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Table 1. Title bar icons and descriptions
Item

Description

The back cover is compatible with the HP Touchstone charging dock (sold
separately).

A Bluetooth connection is in progress.
A Bluetooth connection has been made.
Your smartphone is performing a search on the characters
you entered. If you are in Card view or the Launcher, your
smartphone conducts a global search on your smartphone
(see Just Type). If you are in an application such as Contacts
or Memos, your smartphone searches for items within the
app that match the search term you entered.
Your smartphone is in roaming coverage. See Set roaming
and data usage preferences.
TTY is turned on. See Turn TTY/TDD on/off.

Back view
The back cover of your Veer cannot be removed. Attempting to remove the
back cover voids your smartphone’s warranty.

1 Camera lens
2 Speaker

Top view

1 Power: Press to wake up or turn off the screen. Press and hold to turn wireless services on
and off or turn your device completely on and off.
2 Ringer switch: Slide to turn the ringer and notification sounds on or off. (Red means off.)
The ringer switch does not affect music or video playback sounds.
3 Lanyard loop
4 SIM card slot: See Insert the SIM card and set up your smartphone.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Set up your smartphone

Insert the SIM card. Note the position of the notch.

Insert the SIM card and set up your smartphone
Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card contains information on your
wireless account. To make calls or use your smartphone’s email or web
features, you need to insert a SIM card.
If you don’t have a SIM card, contact AT&T.
To take advantage of the high-speed data connection available on your
smartphone, you may need to have a 4G or 3G SIM card. Check with AT&T
for information.
1

Use your fingernail to open the SIM card slot cover.

* Notch

Close the SIM card slot cover.

Press and hold the power button
on the upper-right corner of
your smartphone until you see a logo on the screen (approximately five
seconds). Your smartphone needs a few seconds to start up.
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on after you press and hold power, you

need to connect your smartphone to the AC charger to charge it.

Follow the onscreen instructions to complete setup.

To create a Palm profile, enter a working email address, create a
password for your profile, and select and answer a security question.

IMPORTANT Be sure to write down the email address and password that you
use to create your profile; you will need them later.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Your Palm profile gives you the following benefits:
NOTE If you already have a Palm profile, you can use the same email address and
password to sign in to your new smartphone. This will sign you out of the Palm
profile on the other device, restore your backed-up data to your new smartphone,
and reinstall any apps you purchased from HP webOS App Catalog on your new
smartphone. Alternately, if you want to keep using the Palm profile on a different
device, you can create a new profile for your new smartphone and start fresh. You
need to use another email address to do this. Only one smartphone can be
associated with a Palm profile at a time.

Your smartphone is ready to use. To learn how to make your first call, see
Make calls.

Verify your profile
After you finish setup, look for an email on your computer at the address you
used for your Palm profile. If you don’t see the confirmation email in your
Inbox, check your spam mail folder in your desktop email program. Click the
link in the email to do the following:
• Verify your Palm profile.
• Follow a link to go to palm.com/gettingstarted, where you can watch
short how-to videos, learn about transferring your information to your
smartphone, and more.

What is a Palm profile?

• Automatic system and software updates are sent to your smartphone.
• A Palm profile account is automatically created for you on your
smartphone. In this account you can store Contacts and Calendar info
that you don’t store in online accounts like Google or Exchange.
NOTE You cannot access Palm profile data on the profile website. You can access
the data on your smartphone only.

• Info stored in your Palm profile account, as well as info you have in
applications on your smartphone (like Memos and Tasks), is automatically
backed up to the webOS servers.
• If your smartphone is lost or stolen, open the web browser on your
computer, sign in to your Palm profile on palm.com/palmprofile, and do a
remote erase of the info on the smartphone.

NOTE If you want to erase data on your smartphone while you are still in
possession of the smartphone—for example, before you give it to someone else—
don’t do a remote erase. Instead, do a partial or full erase of the smartphone itself
(see Erase data and reset your smartphone).

For detailed information about your Palm profile, see Backup.
Although you create a Palm profile by entering a valid email address, setting
up a Palm profile is different from setting up email on your smartphone. To
set up email, see Set up email. To change your Palm profile information after
you have set it up, see Update your Palm profile settings.

Charge the battery
When the battery is very low, the battery
icon in the upper-right corner
of the screen changes to red. When the battery is fully charged, the icon
appears full and changes to green .

Chapter 2 : Basics

WARNING Use only chargers that are approved by HP with your smartphone.
Failure to use a charger approved by HP may increase the risk that your
smartphone will overheat, catch fire, or explode, resulting in property damage,
serious bodily injury, or death. Use of unapproved third-party power supply
accessories may damage the device and void the Limited Warranty for the
product.

Although the battery may come with a sufficient charge to complete the
setup process, we recommend that after setup you charge your smartphone
until the battery icon in the upper-right corner of the screen is full to
ensure that the battery is fully charged.

WARNING Never remove the back cover of your Veer. The battery is built in to
your smartphone and is not removable.

See Maximizing battery life for tips on making your battery’s power last
longer.

Attach the magnetic end of the USB cable to the charger/connector.
The silver circle on the cable faces the front of the smartphone.

Connect the other end of the USB cable to the AC charger.

Plug the AC charger into a working outlet.

Chapter 2 : Basics

TIP You can also charge your smartphone battery by connecting your

smartphone to your computer using the USB cable. Charging this way takes much
longer than using the AC charger. Do not, however, connect a Touchstone
charging dock (sold separately) to your computer.

Maximizing battery life
The battery of your smartphone cannot be removed.
Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can maximize
the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:
• Charge your smartphone whenever you can. Charge it overnight.
• Set your screen to turn off automatically after a shorter period of inactivity
(see Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically).
• Keep your battery away from direct sunlight and other sources of heat.
Temperatures over 113 degrees Fahrenheit (45 degrees Celsius) can
permanently reduce the capacity and life span of any lithium-ion battery.
• As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage,
your smartphone continues to search for a signal, which consumes power.
Turn off the phone if you are outside a coverage area (see Turn wireless
services off (airplane mode)). If you live or work in an area of poor
coverage, you might consider purchasing a signal booster (sold
separately) from AT&T. These typically connect to your broadband
Internet connection, if available.
• If you set up an email account in the Email application, set the interval to
automatically download email to every two hours or less frequently (see
Enter advanced account settings).
• Lower the screen brightness (see Change screen brightness).
• Use a Wi-Fi connection to download system updates and applications
from App Catalog (see Update the HP webOS operating system and HP
webOS App Catalog and Software Manager). Downloads occur faster
over Wi-Fi than over an AT&T data connection, and thus use less battery
power.
• Keep in mind that frequent use of instant messaging (IM) can reduce
battery life. Sign out of your IM account when you are not using it (see
Sign out of an IM account).

• Shut down the smartphone completely when you won’t be using it for an
extended period of time (see Shut down your smartphone).
TIP If you think that the battery needs to be replaced, see I need to replace the
battery for instructions.

Turn the screen on/off
Turn the screen on and leave the wireless services turned off when you want
to use only the organizer features, for example, when you’re on a plane and
you must turn off all wireless services, but you want to look at your calendar.
To turn the screen on, do one of the following:

Turn your smartphone on/off

• Press power

. Drag

up to unlock the screen.

The screen on your Veer can be turned on and off separately from its
wireless services (which are the Phone
app, Wi-Fi
app, Bluetooth®
app, and VPN
app). This means you can wake up the screen to use
just the organizer features of your device (Calendar, Contacts, Tasks,
Memos, and so on) without turning on the phone and other wireless
features. Also, when the screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready
for you to receive phone calls or messages.
* Power

Why the screen goes dark
If you hold the smartphone up to your ear while on a call, the screen goes
dark. This is normal behavior. It prevents your accidentally tapping an item
on the screen and saves battery power. When you take the smartphone
away from your ear, the screen automatically turns back on, ready for use. If
the screen doesn’t turn on fast enough for you, tap the screen to wake it up.
The same behavior occurs anytime you’re on a call and the smartphone
screen is placed near another surface. The screen turns on automatically (if
the smartphone is still on) when you move the smartphone away from the
other surface.
When the smartphone is on and idle, the screen first dims and then turns off.
This also is normal behavior, caused by the auto shut-off interval. You can
adjust this auto shut-off interval to be as long as three minutes (see Set the
interval for turning the screen off automatically). At first, the screen dims as
a power-saving measure. Just tap the screen to brighten it. Then, if your
smartphone remains inactive for the full interval you set, the screen turns
itself off. Press power
to turn the screen back on.

• Slide out the keyboard.
TIP You can also unlock the screen by dragging up from the gesture area across

the onscreen lock icon.

To turn the screen off, press power

NOTE Pressing power to turn the screen off also works when your smartphone is
placed on a Touchstone charging dock (sold separately).

Turn wireless services off (airplane mode)
Airplane mode turns off your smartphone’s wireless services (which are the
app, and VPN
app). Use
Phone
app, Wi-Fi
app, Bluetooth®
airplane mode when you are on a plane or anywhere else you need to turn

Chapter 2 : Basics

off all wireless services. You can’t browse the web, but you can still use apps
like Calendar, Contacts, Photos, Music, Quickoffice® mobile office software,
and PDF View.
Do one of the following:
• Tap the upper-right corner of any screen to open the connection menu.
Tap Turn on Airplane Mode.
• Press and hold power
and tap Airplane Mode.
When your smartphone is in airplane mode, the airplane mode
icon
appears at the top of every screen, and Airplane Mode appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen in the Launcher, Card view, and Phone. The
phone is not connected to any mobile network.

TIP When your smartphone is in airplane mode, you can turn the Wi-Fi,

Bluetooth, and VPN features on individually (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off, Turn the
Bluetooth feature on/off, and VPN). To turn the phone back on so you can make
and receive calls, you must turn airplane mode off. Note that to make a VPN
connection while your smartphone is in airplane mode, you must first connect to a
Wi-Fi network.

Turn wireless services on
When you turn on your smartphone, it automatically connects to your
mobile network so that you can make and receive phone calls and use other
wireless services (if supported by the local network).
If airplane mode is turned on, you need to turn it off before you can connect
to your mobile network. Tap the upper-right corner of any screen to open
the connection menu. Tap Turn off Airplane Mode.
When your smartphone locates a signal, AT&T appears in the upper-left of
the screen in the Launcher, Card view, and Phone, and the signal-strength
icon appears at the top of the screen.

* These indicate that wireless services are off (airplane mode).

* These indicate that wireless services are on.

Chapter 2 : Basics

When you are inside a coverage area, the bars of the signal-strength
icon are filled in according to the strength of the signal. If you’re outside a
coverage area, the bars in the signal-strength icon appear dimmed with
an X.

Shut down your smartphone
Usually, turning your smartphone off and/or putting it in airplane mode is
sufficient for normal periods when you have the smartphone with you but
you’re not using it. On rare occasions, however, you may want to put your
smartphone into deep sleep because you are not going to use it for an
extended period. At those times, shut down the screen and wireless services
completely by doing one of the following:

Use gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Gestures are an important, basic part of your smartphone. They’re easy to
learn, and they make working with the smartphone fast. You make most
gestures with one finger. For a few, you need two. Make gestures with the
tip of your finger. Do not use your fingernail. Don’t bear down.
You make gestures in two areas on your smartphone: the touchscreen and
the gesture area. The gesture area is the black area extending along the
bottom of the screen.

• Open Device Info
and tap Reset Options. Tap Shut Down, and tap
Shut Down again.
• Press and hold power
, and tap Power. Tap Shut Down.

* Gesture area

When you’re working in an application, the center of the gesture area
displays a lighted bar.

NOTE When you turn everything off, the smartphone’s alarms, ringer, and
notifications are also turned off.

• Tap the bar to minimize the app and display Card view (see Manage
applications in Card view).
• The lighted bar also appears when you tap the center of the gesture area
to maximize a card in Card view.
• When the screen is off, the lighted bar pulses when a notification arrives
and continues to pulse until you tap the notification or turn on the screen
(see Get notifications when the screen is locked or off).

To turn both the screen and wireless services back on, press and hold
power
until a logo appears onscreen.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Tap
Tap with the tip of the finger, not the fingernail. Tap fast and firmly, and then
immediately lift your fingertip off the screen. Don’t bear down on what
you’re tapping. Don’t wait for a response; the response comes after you lift
your finger. Don’t linger on the gesture; a tap takes a split second to do.
Tap the center of the gesture area to do the following:

• When you’re working in an application, tap the center of the gesture area
to see Card view. Card view shows you all the applications that are
currently open, displayed as a series of cards (small windows).
• When you’re in Card view, tap the center of the gesture area to maximize
the app in the center of the view.

Swipe
A swipe is most often a horizontal gesture, from right to left or left to right.
Do it fast, do it lightly. In a swipe, your fingertip just skims the surface of the
touchscreen or gesture area.
One kind of swipe you’ll use a lot: back. Make the back gesture from right to
left anywhere in the gesture area. Back takes you up one level from a
detailed view to a more general view of the application you’re working in.
For example, when you finish reading an email message, make the back
gesture to close the message and return to your list of messages. Or when
you finish writing a memo, make the back gesture to close and save the
memo and return to the display of all your memos. When you make the
back gesture in an application and that’s the only screen of that app that’s
open, you minimize the app and go back to Card view.

Chapter 2 : Basics

In Web, the back gesture performs the same function as the back button on
the browser, allowing you to move back through previously viewed pages.
The forward gesture, available in Web only, is a swipe from left to right
anywhere in the gesture area. The forward gesture allows you to move
forward through previously viewed web pages.

Drag
Drag is the gesture you make for a slow scroll up and down, such as in a list,
in a document, or on a web page. Slide your fingertip slowly along the
surface—no need to bear down.
Drag an item: Tap and hold the item, drag it. Wait till you get a visual cue
that the item is ready to be dragged, and then drag it. Lift your finger to drop
it. For example, an icon in the Launcher or a card in Card view is ready to be
dragged when it becomes enlarged and transparent.

Display Quick Launch: One kind of drag that you’ll use a lot brings up
Quick Launch when you’re in an application. This drag gesture begins in
the gesture area and ends on the touchscreen. As your fingertip slowly
crosses the border between the gesture area and the touchscreen, it seems
to drag Quick Launch into view. To open one of the apps in Quick Launch,
move your finger to its icon. When you see the app name appear, lift your
finger. The application opens.

Delete a list item: In some applications, such as Email, Messaging, Tasks,
Music, and Bluetooth, you can throw a list item off the side of the screen to
delete the item.
Throw the item off the side of the screen. If prompted, tap Delete to confirm
the deletion.

Flick
As its name tells you, this is a quick gesture, great for scrolling long lists,
documents, or pages. Do it fast, do it lightly; as with a swipe, your fingertip
just skims the surface. The faster you flick, the faster and farther you scroll
up or down a list.
Close an application: To close an application in Card view, flick the card up
toward the top of the touchscreen. This is called throwing the card off the
top of the screen.

If you can’t delete a list item by throwing it, open the item and look in the
application menu for a Delete menu item.
TIP To delete multiple list items, throw each one off the screen. If you get the

Delete confirmation prompt after throwing the first item, you don’t need to tap
it—just throw the second item, and the first deletion is confirmed automatically.
TIP In some apps, such as Email, you can set a preference whether to show a

confirmation screen when you delete a list item.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Display Card view or the Launcher: If an application is maximized, you
can flick up from the gesture area to the screen to minimize the app and
display Card view. This is the up gesture. If you make the up gesture when
Card view is displayed, you open the Launcher.

Zoom in or out a fixed amount (Web, Photos, Quickoffice® mobile office
software, PDF View): Double-tap the screen.

Pinch (zoom gestures)
Zoom in/pinch out to increase the size of items on the screen (Email, Web,
Photos, PDF View, and Google Maps): Place two fingers on the screen and
spread them slowly apart.

Scroll gestures
Scroll slow: Drag the screen in the desired direction.

Zoom out/pinch in to decrease the size of items on the screen (Email, Web,
Photos, PDF View, and Google Maps): Place two fingers on the screen and
bring them together.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Scroll fast: Flick the screen in the desired direction.

Insert the cursor in a text field: Tap the location.

Stop scrolling: Tap or drag the screen while scrolling.

Move the cursor: Tap the location to insert the cursor. Press and hold
Option . Place your finger anywhere onscreen and drag your finger in the
direction you want to move the cursor.

Text selection gestures
For information on working with text after you select it, see Cut, copy, and
paste information and Use the Copy All or Select All feature.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Select text when you can see a cursor: Tap the location to insert the
cursor. Press and hold Shift
. Place your finger anywhere onscreen and
drag your finger in the direction you want to select text. Tap the highlighted
text to deselect it.

Update the HP webOS operating system
Select a paragraph of text: When you cannot insert a cursor in the text—
for example, on a web page or in an email you received—the smallest
amount of text you can select is a whole paragraph. Press and hold
Shift
, and then tap a paragraph. Tap an adjacent paragraph to add it to
your selection (you can’t skip around). If you need to scroll down to select
the next paragraph, release Shift
, scroll, press Shift
, and tap the
paragraph. Tapping any part of the highlighted selection deselects it.

HP provides updates to your smartphone’s operating system. Update
notifications are sent to your smartphone automatically when a system
update is available (see Respond to a system software notification). When
you update your smartphone’s operating system, your personal information
and files are not affected. In addition to receiving update notifications, you
can manually check for operating system updates at any time (see Manually
check for system updates).
What’s more, both HP and many application developers make updates
available for applications you installed on your smartphone. You can check
in Software Manager at any time for application updates (see Update a
downloaded application from a notification and Manually check for
application updates).

Chapter 2 : Basics

Respond to a system software notification

Manually check for system updates

When you get a notification that a system update is available, do one of the
following:

Open System Updates

If a message appears stating that a system update is available, do the
following:

• Tap Install Now twice. When installation is complete and the
smartphone resets, tap Done. Installation times vary, depending on the
size of the update. You cannot use your smartphone while an update is
being installed, not even for emergency calls.
• Tap Install Later. The next time you charge your smartphone, you receive
another update notification. You can again choose whether to install the
update now or later. If you do not tap Install Later within 10 minutes of
receiving the notification, installation begins automatically.
Here is some additional information about system updates:
• Whenever possible, use a Wi-Fi connection to download system updates.
Downloads occur faster over Wi-Fi than over an AT&T data connection,
and use less battery power. If you see that a system update is available,
make sure you have your smartphone’s Wi-Fi feature turned on.
• If you have Wi-Fi turned on and the battery has enough charge, your
smartphone automatically downloads a system update if one is
available—you don’t have to do anything. If Wi-Fi is not turned on when
the update becomes available, the HP servers continue to check your
device for Wi-Fi availability.
• If you do not have Wi-Fi turned on anytime within a few days of the
system update notification, your smartphone automatically downloads
the update over the AT&T network the next time the battery has enough
charge and you have a data connection, as indicated by the , , , or
icon at the top of the screen.
• If the battery does not have enough charge, you must charge the battery
before you can download or install an update.
• To avoid roaming charges, updates are not downloaded if your
smartphone is in roaming coverage.
• If you do not install an update immediately after downloading it, you are
prompted to install the update the next time you charge your smartphone.
You can choose whether to install the update now or later. You have ten
minutes to decide; otherwise, the update installs automatically.

• Tap Download now.
• When prompted, tap Install Now.
• After installation has finished and the smartphone resets, tap Done.

Chapter 2 : Basics

Just Type
Just Type changes the way you create, look for, and
use information on your smartphone. Instead of
starting a task by opening an app, start in Card view
simply by typing your idea, message, or task. Then you
choose what you want to do with the text you typed:
use it to search the web, post it to your Facebook page,
send it as a message, save it as a memo. Just Type
opens the app you need to complete your task.

In this chapter
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
36

Chapter 3 : Just Type

Just Type overview
The Just Type feature lets you do almost anything you want on your
smartphone, without having to go to a specific app. When it crosses your
mind to look up, do, or make note of something, just type to put your
thought into action.

You can also start a search by copying text in another application, opening
the Launcher or Card view, and pasting the text. The text appears at the top
of the screen as the search term. To paste using the application menu (Edit
> Paste) in Card view, you first need to tap the Just type box. If you paste
by pressing and holding the gesture area and then pressing the V key, you do
not need to tap in the box.

Get in touch with a contact
1

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Begin typing the contact’s first and last initials (no space), first or last
name, or email address.

When the contact name appears, do one of the following. If only the
contact name is displayed, tap the name to display ways to get in
touch.

Just Type works from the two screens on your smartphone that you access
most often: Card view and the Launcher. By just typing on either of those
screens, you can begin doing any of the following:
• Call or send a message to a contact (see Get in touch with a contact)
• Search the web (see Search the web)
• Search for email messages, web bookmarks, videos, and more (see Find
information in an application on your smartphone)
• Map a location (see Find information in an application on your
smartphone)
• Create a new message, memo, or other item (see Create a new item such
as a message or memo)
• Update your Facebook or Twitter status (see Create a new item such as a
message or memo)
• Open an app (see Open an application)

Chapter 3 : Just Type

• Tap the name to open the person’s contact information.
• Tap a phone number to dial it, an email address to send a message,
and so on. Tap
to the right of a phone number to send a text
message.

• Tap Add Reminder to add a reminder message to the contact (see
Assign a reminder message to a contact).

• To view suggested search terms from your default search engine
based on the characters you entered: Tap Suggest to the right of
your default search engine name. Tap a suggestion to search on that
term. If the characters you entered return no contacts, applications,
or other items on your smartphone, suggestions are displayed
automatically. Tap one to search on it.

NOTE If you are using Exchange with a corporate server, you can search your
company's Global Address List (GAL) for a contact: Enter the contact name, and
then tap Global Address Lookup.

• To search the web using a different search engine: Under Launch &
Search, tap a search engine name. If the search engine is for a
specific website, such as Wikipedia, your smartphone searches that
site only.

Search the web

TIP You can also use Just Type to go directly to a website. In Card view or the

Launcher, type the website address, such as hp.com. When the address appears at
the top of the search results, tap Go to website.

You have several options for using Just Type to search the web.
1
2

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).
Begin typing the search term.

Find information in an application on your
smartphone
You can search for email messages, web bookmarks, and websites you’ve
visited (browsing history) on your smartphone. You can also search for
items in Google Maps or HP webOS App Catalog right from Just Type.
If your search term does not show results for a certain app, you may need to
turn on a preference to include that app in a Just Type search (see
Customize Just Type). You can use this preference to include more apps in
Just Type searches.

Do one of the following. You may need to scroll down to see web
search engines.

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Begin typing the information you want to find. Depending on which
app you want to search, this could be the subject of an email address, a

• To search the web using your default search engine: Tap the search
engine name. The search engine appears directly beneath any
matching contact entries.

Chapter 3 : Just Type

physical address you want to locate on a map, a bookmark name, the
name of an app you want to download, or some other term.

Create a new item such as a message or memo
You can use Just Type to create a new item such as an email message or
memo by entering all or part of the item’s text. These items are grouped in
the Quick Actions section of the search results.
For some Quick Actions, you need to turn on a preference to create that
type of item from your search results (see Customize Just Type).

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Type all or part of the item text, such as email message text or memo
text.

If needed, scroll down to see the Quick Actions field. Tap New [item
type]. The relevant application opens, displaying your text as part of a
new item. Here are some examples:

Depending on the app you want to search in, tap one of the following.
You may need to scroll down to see app search results.
Bookmarks & History: Your smartphone displays the number of
websites in your bookmarks list and browsing history list whose name
contains your search term. Tap Bookmarks & History to view a list of
the websites. Tap an entry to go to the website.
Email: Your smartphone displays the number of email messages
whose sender name or subject contains your search term. Tap Email
to display the list of matching messages. Tap a message to view it.
Google Maps: To view your search term on a map, under Launch &
Search, tap Google Maps.
App Catalog: To search App Catalog for apps that match your search
term, under Launch & Search, tap HP webOS App Catalog.

NOTE In addition to Just Type, applications such as Contacts, Email, Memos, and
PDF View also offer the ability to search within the app for entries or files. When
you’re in one of those apps, from the list view, type the file name; a few words from
a memo; or a contact name, initials, address, or number. See the individual
application sections for details. You can also enter a search term in the Help
application to search for help content related to the term.

Chapter 3 : Just Type

• To create a new email message: Tap New Email. A new message
opens with the text you entered as the message text.
• To create a new memo: Tap New Memo. A new memo opens
containing the text you entered.
4

To see more available quick actions, tap More.

Open an application
1

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Begin typing the app name or a related keyword. See Use application
keywords for a list.

When the app appears, tap it.

Use application keywords
If you don’t know the name of the app you are searching for, you can enter a
keyword associated with the app. This table shows the keywords you can
use to find an app on your smartphone.
Table 1. Application keywords
Application Name

Keywords

App Catalog

Store

Backup

Settings, Preferences

Bluetooth

Settings, Preferences, Wireless

Table 1. Application keywords
Application Name

Keywords

Calendar

Datebook, Meetings, Events

Clock

Alarm, Time, Watch

Contacts

Addresses, People

Date & Time

Clock, Settings, Preferences

Device Info

Settings, Preferences, Reset

Mail

Google Maps

Maps

Location Services

Settings, Preferences

Memos

Notes, Stickies, Notepad

Messaging

Text, SMS, MMS, IM, Instant Chat

Music

Songs, Tunes, Audio

PDF View

Acrobat

Phone

Dial

Photos

Pictures

Quickoffice

Word, Excel, PowerPoint

Regional Settings

Settings, Preferences

Screen & Lock

Wallpaper, Security, Desktop, Brightness,
Unlock, Gestures, Settings, Preferences

Software Manager

Store

Sounds & Ringtones

Audio, Music, Volume, Vibrate, Silent, Settings,
Preferences

System Updates

Settings, Preferences

Tasks

To Do, Todos, Checklist

Videos

Movies

Web

Browser, Blazer, Internet

YouTube

Videos, Movies

Chapter 3 : Just Type

Repeat a recent search
To search on a term you recently entered, you don’t need to enter the term
again.
1

In Card view, tap Just type.

Your recent searches are displayed. Tap a search term to repeat the
search.
TIP To clear your recent search history, tap Clear.

Customize Just Type
You can select the types of information that are included in a search. For
contacts, you can also turn Global Address Lookup on or off. You can choose
which web search options to display in the search results, and add new
search engines to the list. You can select the applications that you can
launch directly from search results.
1
2

In Card view or the Launcher, type a few letters to bring up the search
results screen.
Scroll to the bottom of the search results screen and tap Preferences.
TIP You can also access Just Type preferences by typing some text in Card view or
the Launcher, opening the application menu, and tapping Preferences.

Select any of the following options:
Default Search Engine: This is the search engine your smartphone
uses to search the web when you enter a search term. To change the
search engine, tap the currently displayed engine, and then tap the one
you want. The list contains two types of search engines: Engines that
search the entire web, such as Google, and engines that search within
a specific website only, such as Wikipedia.
Applications: If you include applications in your searches, any
matching items in those applications are included in your search
results. To add an application to your search results, tap Add
Application Searches, and then tap the application name.
Launch & Search: This list displays other web search engines and
applications available for Just Type searches. Search engines are
designated by Web—you can make any listed search engine the
default search engine. Applications included in your searches are
designated by App. To include other search engines or applications in
your searches, tap Add More Searches and tap the item you want.
Quick Actions: This displays the types of items you can create from
your search results, such as an email message or a memo. To add a
new item type, tap Add Quick Actions and tap the item.

Chapter 3 : Just Type

Find More: This option lets you search App Catalog for third-party
applications and services that you can use to perform any of the
following Just Type functions: web search, app search, or creation of a
new item (Quick Action). For example, you can use Find More to
download a new web search engine. To use this feature, tap Find
More, and then download an app from the list displayed in App
Catalog (see HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager).
TIP There’s another way to add a search engine to Just Type. If you open a web
page and an additional search engine is available, a notification appears alerting
you that you can add the search engine. If you add the search engine, it appears as
an option in Just Type.

(Optional) Within any of the sections in Just Type preferences (Launch
& Search, Quick Actions, and so on), you can change the order of the
items by tapping and dragging. This changes the order in which the
items appear in the Just Type search results.

Chapter 3 : Just Type

Work with applications
Whatever you need to do in an app, your HP Veer 4G
makes it easy. There are multiple ways to open apps,
so you can access the one you want quickly. You can
have more than one app open at a time and easily
switch among them in Card view.
Once you become familiar with using menus, Text
Assist, favorites, online accounts, and notifications,
you can manage your apps with ease.

In this chapter
40
41
42
43
48
48
48
50
52
54
55

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Open applications

TIP You can also open the Launcher by flicking up twice from the gesture area to

the screen. If you are in Card view, just flick up once to open the Launcher

You can have as many applications open at one time as you like, limited only
by the amount of memory available on your smartphone at the time.

To find the app you want, flick up or down to see all the icons on a
page. To see other pages, swipe right or left on the screen, or tap the
arrows in the upper-left and upper-right corner of the screen.

Open an application using Just Type
For detailed information on the Just Type feature, see Just Type.
1

Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Begin typing the name of the application or one of its keywords (see
Use application keywords).

When the application icon appears in the search results, tap it.

Open an application in the Launcher
The Launcher displays all your applications. The Launcher includes multiple
pages, which you can organize to group apps the way you want (see
Reorder Launcher icons and Reorder Launcher pages).

1 Page indicator shows that there are pages to the right of the current page. Tap the arrow
to move to the next page.
2 Page name. Tap and hold to change the name.

Tap the application icon.

If you’re in an app, tap the center of the gesture area to display Card
view.

To close the Launcher, do one of the following:

In Card view, tap

• Tap the center of the gesture area.
• Make the up gesture: Flick up from the gesture area to the screen.

Open an application in Quick Launch
Quick Launch is the bar of five icons that always appears at the bottom of
Card view. You can also make a simple gesture to access Quick Launch from
inside an app.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

You can customize Quick Launch to contain the icons for apps you use most
often. To open an application from Quick Launch, just tap the icon.

Move your finger to the application icon. When you see the app name
appear, lift your finger. The application opens.

Go up one level in an app (back gesture)
* Quick Launch

Quick Launch can display no more than five icons. By default it displays,
from left to right, Phone, Contacts, Email, Calendar, and the Launcher. You
can change the order of icons (except the Launcher icon) in Quick Launch
(see Reorder Quick Launch icons), or swap in whatever applications you like
(see Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch).

NOTE If you have a notification or the dashboard is open (see View and work
with notifications), you need to dismiss the open item to access Quick Launch.

The back gesture takes you up one level from a detailed level to a more
general view of the application you’re working in. For example, when you
finish reading an email message, make the back gesture to close the
message and return to your list of messages. Or when you finish writing a
memo, make the back gesture to close and save the memo and return to the
display of all your memos. When you make the back gesture in an
application and that’s the only screen of that app that’s open, you minimize
the app and go back to Card view.
To make the back gesture, swipe right to left anywhere in the gesture area.

When you’re in an app, make the following gesture to display Quick Launch
and open one of its applications.
1

Drag up slowly from the gesture area to the screen.

NOTE Don’t confuse this “drag up” with the up gesture, which is a quick flick up
from the gesture area to the screen.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Use the menus
Most applications have an application menu hidden in the upper-left corner,
which provides access to additional features. There is also a connection
menu hidden in the upper-right corner, which provides access to wireless
services.

• Tap the application name in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Some applications have additional menus. For example, in Photos, tap an
open picture and tap
to display a menu of tasks you can do with the
picture (see Photos).

Tap a menu item to open it. If a menu item displays a right-pointing
arrow , tap the item to display the submenu for that item—for
example, tap the Edit menu item to open a submenu containing Cut,
Copy, and Paste items. If you see a downward-pointing arrow
at
the bottom of the menu, scroll down to see additional menu items.

To get the most out of your smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize
yourself with the additional features available through the menus in various
applications.

Open the application menu
The application menu contains items for the application you are working in,
such as Cut and Copy, Preferences, Help, and other application-specific
menu items. Help is available on the application menu of every application.
1

In an app, do one of the following:
• Drag down from the upper-left corner of the smartphone (above the
screen) onto the screen.

1 Application menu
2 Tap to open the submenu
3 Scroll to see more items

To close the menu without selecting an item, repeat one of the options
in step 1.

If an application menu item is followed by this symbol
plus a letter, it
means a keyboard shortcut is available for that menu item. To use a
keyboard shortcut, press and hold the gesture area and press the letter key
of the shortcut. For examples of using keyboard shortcuts, see Cut, copy,
and paste information.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

DID YOU KNOW? Pressing and holding the gesture area is sometimes called a

Enter and save information

“meta-tap.”

Use the keyboard
Open the connection menu
The connection menu lets you manage wireless services—the phone,
Bluetooth® wireless technology, Wi-Fi, and VPN.
DID YOU KNOW? The connection menu also displays the current day and date
and the battery charge level.

Do one of the following:
• Drag down from the upper-right corner of the smartphone (above
the screen) onto the screen.
1 Option: Press to enter numbers, punctuation, and symbols that appear above the letters on
the keys (see Enter alternate keyboard characters), or to move the cursor (see Text selection
gestures).
2 Shift: See Enter uppercase letters and Text selection gestures.
3 Space
4 Backspace

• Tap the upper-right corner of the screen.

5 Enter: Press to enter a line return (for example, in a memo or in an email message you are
composing) or to accept information you entered in a field (see Enter information in a field).
6 Sym: See Enter characters from the symbols table.

Enter uppercase letters
2

Tap a menu item to turn that wireless feature on or to display a list of
menu items for that feature (see Turn wireless services off (airplane
mode)). If you see a downward-pointing arrow
at the bottom of
the menu, scroll down to see additional menu items.
To close the menu without selecting an item, repeat one of the options
in step 1.

By default, the first letter of each sentence or field is capitalized and the
remaining text you enter is lowercase. To enter other uppercase letters, do
one of the following:
• Press Shift
and press the letter key. The Shift symbol
appears. You
don’t need to hold down Shift while you press the letter key.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

• Turn on Caps Lock: Press Shift
appears.
• Turn off Caps Lock: Press Shift

twice. The Caps Lock symbol

TIP The symbols and accented characters are grouped according to their

similarity to the corresponding key. In some cases, the symbol is related to the
alternate character on the key, not the letter. For example, to type a € or other
currency symbol, press Sym + h. Why? Because the alternate character on the H
key is $.

Enter alternate keyboard characters
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys. To
enter these characters, do one of the following:
• Press Option
and press the key for the character. The alternate
character symbol
appears. You don’t need to hold down Option while
pressing the second key.
• Enter a series of alternate characters: Press Option
twice to turn on
Option Lock. The Option Lock symbol
appears.
• Turn off Option Lock: Press Option .

Enter passwords
You can see each character of a password only as you enter it, so be careful.
Be sure Caps Lock and Option Lock are off unless you need them. For
information on how to enter characters, see Enter uppercase letters and
Enter alternate keyboard characters.

Enter characters from the symbols table
You can enter symbols and accented characters that don’t appear on the
keys by using the symbols table. See Symbols and accented characters for a
list of the available symbols and accented characters.

Press Sym

to display the symbols table.

Narrow the list by pressing the key that corresponds to the character
you want. For example, to enter an é, press e.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Scroll to find the character you want.

Tap the character to insert it.

Symbols and accented characters
Table 1. Symbols and accented characters
Press Sym
press…

and

to select…

a or A

áàäâãåæÁÀÄÂÃÅÆª~\`•÷^[]{}<>
«»Øμ|

b or B

~\`•÷^[]{}<>«»Øμ|

c or C

©çÇ ¢

d or D

†‡

e or E

éèëêēÉÈËÊ€¹¼½

h or H

¢€£¥ƒ

i or I

íìïîÍÌÏÎ÷‰

j or J

k or K

:-) :-( ;-)

l or L

`‘’‚ "

m or M

μ :-) :-( ;-)

n or N

ñÑ¿

o or O

óòöôœõøÓÒÖÔŒÕØº“”„<>«»

p or P

¶~\`•÷^[]{}<>«»Øμ|

q or Q

\~|

Table 1. Symbols and accented characters
Press Sym
press…

and

to select…

r or R

®²

s or S

ßšŠ~\`•÷^[]{}<>«»Ø|

t or T

™³¾

u or U

úùüûÚÙÜÛ[]{}<>«»

v or V

w or W

÷^±

x or X

x¤

y or Y

ÿýŸÝ¥[]{}<>«»

žŽ•

, or _

~\`•÷^[]{}<>«»Øμ|

…~\`•÷^[]{}<>«»Øμ|

°•Ø

Enter information in a field
You can enter information in a field by typing or by pasting previously
copied information (see Cut, copy, and paste information). The Text Assist
feature works with all text fields (see Work with the Text Assist feature).
To accept the information you entered, do one of the following:
• Tap outside the field.
• Press Enter . If a screen contains multiple fields, pressing Enter accepts
the information you just entered and moves the cursor to the next field.
• When you are done entering information on the screen containing the
field, make the back gesture to accept the information and back out of the
screen (see Go up one level in an app (back gesture)).

Work with the Text Assist feature
Text Assist, the assisted text entry feature, works on any screen in which you
can enter text, including email, text/multimedia, and instant messages;
memos; contact and calendar entry screens; and more. Text Assist includes
auto-correction, auto-capitalization, and shortcuts.

NOTE If a Text Assist feature does not seem to be working, make sure that
feature is turned on (see Customize Text Assist settings).

• If Text Assist recognizes a common misspelling, it auto-corrects the word.
A sound is played and the word appears with a gray underline to indicate
it has been corrected. If the ringer switch is turned off, the smartphone
vibrates instead of playing a sound.
• If auto-correction doesn’t recognize a spelling, it highlights the word with
an orange underline. Tap the word to display a list of close matches, and
then tap the correct word. If the word is spelled correctly as you typed it,
tap the word, and then tap + to add the word to the auto-correction
dictionary. A notification appears to indicate that the word has been
added to the dictionary.
• Auto-correction inserts punctuation such as apostrophes in contractions.
So you can quickly type dont, and it appears correctly as don’t.
• The auto-capitalization feature automatically capitalizes the first word of a
sentence and other letters that would commonly be capitalized, such as
the letter i by itself.
• The shortcut feature recognizes and expands common shorthand
expressions, such as replacing u with you or r with are.
• To cancel an auto-correction, auto-capitalization, or shortcut expansion,
press Backspace
. To cancel auto-correction of a misspelled word, you
can also tap the word and tap the original spelling.
TIP Suppose the language on your smartphone is English and you need to write

an email in French. To prevent Text Assist from trying to correct everything you
enter, temporarily turn off auto-correction (see Customize Text Assist settings).

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Customize Text Assist settings

Tap Edit User Dictionary.

To edit the auto-correction dictionary, tap Learned Words and do any
of the following:

You can customize individual Text Assist features: auto-correction,
auto-capitalization, and shortcuts. To customize the user dictionary, see Add
your own words and shortcuts.
1

Open Text Assist

Do any of the following:

• To add a word: Tap

, enter the new word, and then tap Add.

• To change the spelling of a word: Tap the word, and then type the
correction to the word. Tap Done.
• To delete a word: Throw the word off the side of the screen. Tap
Delete to confirm.
• To turn auto-capitalization, shortcuts, or auto-correction on or off:
Tap Off or On for that entry.
• To change whether a tone plays, the smartphone vibrates, or neither
happens when an auto-correction takes place: Tap Alert, and then
tap System Sound, Vibrate, or Mute. The Alert option is available
only if auto-correction is turned on.

Add your own words and shortcuts
1

Open Text Assist

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

To edit the shortcuts list, tap Shortcuts and do any of the following:
• To add a shortcut: Tap
text, and then tap Add.

, enter the new shortcut and replacement

• To change a shortcut and/or its replacement text: Tap the shortcut
you want to change. Tap the Shortcut field or the Replace With
field, and then enter the new shortcut or replacement text. Tap
Done.
• To delete a shortcut: Throw the shortcut off the side of the screen.
Tap Delete to confirm.

Cut, copy, and paste information

Select items in a list

You can copy any selectable text, and you can cut any selectable text that
you entered, for example, in a memo or an email. This includes text you can
select by dragging the cursor and paragraphs you can select by tapping
them (see Text selection gestures).

Lists enable you to select from a range of options. Lists are different from
menus (see Use the menus), which give you access to additional features.

Select the text you want to cut or copy (see Text selection gestures).

Open the application menu and tap Edit > Cut or Copy.

Tap the currently displayed option to open the list. For example, when
creating a new event in Calendar, tap 15 minutes before to display the
list of reminder options.

Open the app and insert the cursor where you want to paste the text
(see Text selection gestures).

Open the application menu and tap Edit > Paste.

Tap the list item you want.

Lists are hidden until you tap the currently displayed option for that list.

You can also use keyboard shortcuts to cut, copy, and paste. After selecting
the text or inserting the cursor, press and hold the gesture area; the lighted
bar begins to pulse and glow more brightly. Then press X (cut), C (copy), V
(paste), or A (select all, in the apps that support this feature). A notification
appears indicating that the text has been successfully cut, copied, or
selected.

Use the Copy All or Select All feature
Some applications offer a Copy All menu option. For example, in Messaging,
you can start or open a conversation, open the application menu, and tap
Edit > Copy All. This saves the entire conversation as plain text, which you
can paste in a memo, email message, and so on.
Other apps offer a Select All menu option. For example, in Memos, you can
open a memo, open the application menu, and tap Edit > Select All. This
highlights the full memo text, which you can cut or copy.
Some apps, such as Contacts and Email, offer both the Copy All and Select
All features to perform different text selection tasks. See the app section in
this guide for details.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Save information

While pressing and holding Option

• On most screens, your information is saved automatically. Just make the
back gesture to close the screen (see Go up one level in an app (back
gesture)), and your info is saved at the same time.
• Your info is also saved if you minimize an app to a card in Card view and
throw the card off the top of the screen to close the app.
• On screens with a Done button, either tap Done or make the back
gesture to save your information.

Tap Delete.

Close applications
• In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), throw the card off
the top of the screen. To close a card stack, you must close each card
individually.

TIP You can also delete an application you installed by opening the Launcher,

opening the application menu, and tapping List Apps. On the list of applications,
tap and hold an app name or throw the app off the side of the screen, and then tap
Delete.

Manage applications in Card view
Card view displays open applications as small cards so that you can easily
scroll through them and drag them to change their order.
When you have no open applications, your smartphone displays Card view
automatically. You don’t have to do anything to open Card view. When no
cards are open, Card view shows only the Just Type field (see Just Type),
your wallpaper (see Change your wallpaper), and Quick Launch (see Open
an application in Quick Launch).

Delete applications
You can delete applications that you installed on your smartphone.
1

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Scroll to the page containing the app you want to delete.

1 Just Type field
2 Wallpaper
3 Quick Launch

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

, tap the app icon.

When an application fills the screen and you want to go to Card view, do
one of the following:

Tap a card to maximize the application.
TIP You can also maximize the center card in Card view by tapping the center of

• Tap the center of the gesture area.

the gesture area, or by flicking down from the screen to the gesture area.
TIP You can set a preference to move among open apps without first going to

Card view (see Turn advanced gestures on/off).

• Make the up gesture: Flick up from the gesture area to the screen.

Work with stacked cards
If you are working in an application and perform an action that opens a new
screen or launches a second application—for example, composing a new
email from your Inbox or dialing a phone number from Contacts (which
opens the Phone app)—your smartphone treats the app screens as a group.
If you minimize one of the screens, that screen and all screens associated
with it appear as a set of stacked cards in Card view.

Reorder/stack single cards
1

In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap and hold a
card.

After the card becomes transparent, do one of the following:
• To stack the card: Drag the card on top of another card. Release
when the cards are positioned to be stacked.
• To change the card order: Drag the card to another position.

You can also manually stack and unstack cards.

Move among cards and stacks
1

In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), swipe left or
right on the screen to see other open apps.

TIP To unstack cards, tap and hold a card in a stack, and drag it to a position

outside the stack.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Reorder a card within a stack

Reorder Quick Launch icons

In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap and hold the
card you want to move.

You can change the position of any Quick Launch icon except the Launcher
icon.

After the card becomes transparent, drag it across the other cards in
the stack to another position.

In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap and hold a
Quick Launch icon.

Wait for a visual cue, and then drag the icon to another location on the
Quick Launch bar.

Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch
Quick Launch is a convenient lineup of your favorite apps. When you swap
an app icon into Quick Launch, you don’t remove it from the Launcher; you
have access to the icon in two places.
1

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Scroll to the page containing the app icon you want to move into
Quick Launch.

Tap and hold the icon, and wait for the visual cue that the icon is ready
to be dragged. The Launcher pages become a series of cards. Quick
Launch appears at the bottom of the screen.

Drag the icon on top of the Quick Launch icon you want to replace.
The current Quick Launch icon disappears, and the new one takes its
place. The icon that disappeared from Quick Launch is still available in
the Launcher.

NOTE If Quick Launch contains fewer than five icons, you can drag the app icon
from the Launcher between two Quick Launch icons to drop it into the blank
space. If you simply want to remove an icon from Quick Launch without replacing
it, go to Card view, tap and hold a Quick Launch icon, and drag it off the bar. The
only one you can’t remove is the Launcher icon.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Manage applications in the Launcher
Reorder Launcher icons
1

In the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher), tap and
hold an icon, and wait for the visual cue that the icon is ready to be
dragged. The Launcher pages become a series of cards.

Drag the icon to a new location on any page.

Scroll to the page you want to move.

Tap and hold the page.

Drag the page to its new location, and release.

(Optional) Repeat steps 3–5 to move other Launcher pages.

Rename a Launcher page

TIP You can also add your closest contacts and favorite websites to the Launcher

(see Add a contact entry to the Launcher and Add a web page to the Launcher),
and then organize your Launcher icons and pages to create a page of contacts and
a page of websites.

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Scroll to the page you want to rename.

Tap and hold the current name.

When the current name is highlighted, enter a new name.

Tap outside the field or press Enter

to accept the new name.

Add a Launcher page
1

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Delete a Launcher page

Open the application menu and tap Add Launcher Page. The page
appears to the right of the page that was displayed when you opened
the menu.

Before you delete a Launcher page, you must move all the icons to another
page, as described here. You can’t delete a page displaying any icons.

Enter a new name for the page.

Tap outside the field or press Enter

to accept the new name.

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Scroll to the page you want to delete.

Move the icons that appear to another Launcher page (see Reorder
Launcher icons), or delete the icons for applications you installed (see
Delete applications).

Tap

Reorder Launcher pages
1

Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Open the application menu and tap Reorder Launcher Page. This
reduces the Launcher pages to a series of cards.

in the center of the empty page.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Manage online accounts

You can also set up your smartphone to post photos to online accounts such
as Facebook or Photobucket. See Set up an online pictures account on your
smartphone.

You can set up online accounts in the Accounts application, or in individual
applications on your smartphone. The online account must already be set
up on the web or server before you can add it to your smartphone.

See Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones for the current
list of default online accounts that synchronize your info and those that do a
one-way transfer of info either from the web to your smartphone, or from
your smartphone to the web.

KEY TERM Online account An online account is a web-based or server-based
location, such as Google, Yahoo!, or Exchange, where you keep contacts and/or
calendar information. These accounts often have an email component as well.
Such web-based or server-based accounts are sometimes talked about as being “in
the cloud.”

NOTE If you are setting up your smartphone for the first time and downloading a
large number of contacts or calendar events from an online account to your
smartphone, you may not see all your data on your smartphone right away. Some
online account providers such as Google set limits on the amount of data that a
user can import in a given time frame. Also, if you have many years’ worth of data
or thousands of entries in an online account, you may want to review the data and
reduce the number of entries before setting up the account on your smartphone.
Filling your smartphone memory with a large number of account entries can affect
performance.

The HP Synergy feature works in the background to get data from an online
account onto your smartphone. After you set up one of these accounts on your
smartphone, you can access the data from that online account. For some kinds of
accounts, you can also add and change data on your smartphone, which is then
synchronized to the online account in the cloud.

Whether you decide to set up your online accounts in the Accounts app or
from within an individual app, the process is the same. You can specify
which apps should get data from the online account. For example, you can
choose to set up your Google account so that your smartphone displays
your Google contacts, Google Talk instant messages, and Gmail messages,
but not your Google calendar events.

Use the Accounts application to set up an online account
1

Open Accounts

Tap Add Account.

• To set up an online account in the Accounts app: See Use the Accounts
application to set up an online account for details.
• To set up within an individual app: The first time you open Email,
Contacts, Calendar, or Messaging, you are given the option to enter
settings for one or more online accounts. See Set up email, Use Contacts
for the first time, Use Calendar for the first time, or Set up an instant
messaging (IM) account.
You can add more accounts at any time using the Accounts app or the
preferences in any of the applications mentioned above. See Set email
preferences, Customize Contacts, Customize Calendar, or Set up an instant
messaging (IM) account.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Do one of the following:

Use the Accounts application to edit or delete an online
account
If you change the username, email address, or password you use with an
online account, you need to enter the new information in the account
settings on your smartphone. You can do that from within one of the
applications associated with that account, or from the Accounts app.
1

Open Accounts

Tap the account name.

Do one of the following:

• To add one of the listed accounts: Tap the account name.
• To search for other accounts: Tap Find More. This displays a list of
available online accounts. Tap the account you want to download
and install it.
4

Enter your username and password, and tap Sign In.

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.

• To change the account display name: Under Account Name, tap
the current name to highlight it, and enter the new name.
• To change which applications are associated with the account: For
each app listed, tap On or Off.
• To edit the account information: Tap Change login settings, enter
the new username and password, and tap Sign In.
• To delete the account: Tap Remove account. Tap Remove Account
again to confirm.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

IMPORTANT If you delete an account from your smartphone using the
Accounts app, all data is removed from all apps on your smartphone associated
with the account. The account itself still exists online. For example, if you delete an
Exchange account using the Accounts app, all your Exchange data is removed
from Email, Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks. If you want to delete data only from
one app served by the account—for example, you want to delete the calendar
events but keep the contacts—simply turn that app off for that account.

View and work with notifications
Notifications show up at the bottom of the screen to notify you of new
voicemail and messages, upcoming appointments, missed calls, application
updates, and more. Some notifications also display app controls, such as
music playback controls, when you are not in the app itself.

Dashboard item: The dashboard provides an expanded view of all
notifications you can act on. For example, you can tap a voicemail
dashboard item to check your voicemail, or a calendar dashboard item to
open your calendar.

There are several kinds of notifications:
Banner alert: This is a notification that appears in a small strip at the
bottom of the screen. Some banner alerts appear as confirmation of an
action—for example, to confirm that text was selected or copied. Others
notify you of an item you can act on—for example, a missed call or an
incoming text message. For these alerts, if you do not tap the alert after a
few seconds, it becomes an icon in the lower-right portion of the screen. Tap
the bottom of the screen to display the alerts as dashboard items.

If the dashboard item has a number next to it, the number indicates how
many items are included in the notification—how many voicemail or email
messages you have, and so on.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Some dashboard items enable you to perform multiple actions. For example:
• On a calendar dashboard item, tap the calendar icon to open Calendar in
Day view with the event displayed, or tap the event name to open the
event details screen.
• For a missed call, tap the icon to open your call history, or tap the missed
call item to call back the number.
• If an item’s icon displays a number, tap the icon to open the associated
app to the list view (such as an Email inbox), or tap the item itself to open
that individual item (such as an email message).
To delete a dashboard item, throw it off the side of the screen.
Pop-up notification: This is a larger notification that you can act on right
away. Examples of pop-up notifications are incoming call notifications,
calendar appointment notifications, and alarms.

App controls: If you are listening to songs in Music and leave the app, the
music playback controls remain displayed at the bottom of the screen. This
lets you continue to manage music playback without having to go back into
the app.

Create and work with favorites
You can quickly reach your closest contacts by phone, email, or text/
multimedia message by designating them as favorites. Creating a favorite
from a contact lets you view and touch base with that contact in just a few
taps.
You can create and manage favorites in Contacts (see Create a favorite) and
in Phone (see Create a favorite).
You can view favorites in the following apps:
Phone: See all your favorites by tapping
on the dial pad. In your call
history list, calls to and from favorites are noted by a star. If you enter a
contact name to call a contact, matching favorites appear at the top of the
search results list and are noted by a star.

NOTE By default, if a banner alert or pop-up notification arrives when the screen
is off, the gesture area light pulses. You can turn this feature off (see Get
notifications when the screen is locked or off).

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Contacts: See all your favorites by tapping Favorites on the contacts list
screen. On your complete contacts list, favorites are noted by a star.

Just Type: When you enter a search term, matching favorites appear at the
top of the contacts search results and are noted by a star.
Email and Messaging: When you begin typing a contact name to address a
message, matching favorites appear grouped at the top of the search results
list and are noted by a star.

Chapter 4 : Work with applications

Copy files and sync your personal data
You didn’t buy your HP Veer 4G simply to make calls;
you bought it because it’s also a handheld computer
with lots of the features and functions of your desktop
computer. One important feature that your
smartphone shares with your computer is that it has
storage space for your files and for your personal data.
This chapter explains how to get these two kinds of
data—files and personal data—onto your smartphone.
Copying files to your smartphone is easy. Getting your
personal data onto your smartphone is also easy; you
just need to decide where you want that data to be
stored and how you want to access it.

In this chapter
58
59
61
61
62
63

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

Copy files between your smartphone and your
computer
Copy files and folders using USB Drive mode
You can copy any type of file from a computer to your smartphone, and
from your smartphone to your computer, by putting your smartphone in
USB Drive mode. In this mode, your smartphone appears as a removable
hard drive to your desktop computer.

Connect your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable.

On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your
smartphone appears as a removable drive.

On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard opens,
click Cancel to close the wizard.

Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows
Vista/Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), double-click the drive
representing your smartphone, and drag and drop files to your
smartphone. The drive displays folders that you can use to organize
the files you copy. You can also create your own folders.

After you copy a file to your smartphone, you can open the file if your
smartphone has an application that supports the file type. You can open
many file formats for photos, videos, and music; Microsoft Office files; and
PDF files. You can also copy ringtones that you download from your
computer’s web browser.

NOTE If you copy ringtones to your smartphone, be sure to place them in the
ringtones folder on your smartphone’s USB drive. Photos and videos taken on the
smartphone are in DCIM > 100Palm.

5
IMPORTANT All files that you store on the USB drive of your smartphone are
not backed up to your Palm profile, and they cannot sync to any of your online
accounts. So be sure to keep a copy of all such files somewhere besides your
smartphone just in case you lose your smartphone or you must do a full erase of
the info on your smartphone. For example, from time to time, you may want to
back up photos and videos you recorded on your smartphone by copying them to
a computer. Or, if Amazon MP3 is available, you may have purchased MP3 music
on your smartphone and wish to enjoy it on another playback device. Your photos
and videos taken using your smartphone are stored in the DCIM folder of your
smartphone’s USB drive. Downloaded music files are stored in the AmazonMP3
folder.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you copy files from your computer, make
sure you have enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the files.
Open Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.
When your smartphone is in USB Drive mode, incoming calls go to
voicemail; you can’t make calls or use any other application until you
complete step 5 below.

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

End the connection safely. If you do not eject safely, your smartphone
resets when you disconnect the USB cable:
• On a Windows computer, right-click the drive representing your
smartphone and click Eject.
• On a Mac computer, from your desktop, drag the drive representing
your smartphone to the Trash. Trash changes to Eject.

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB drive
screen is no longer displayed on your smartphone.

Delete files and folders using USB Drive mode
When your smartphone is in USB Drive mode, you can’t make or receive
calls or use other wireless features such as email or the web.
1

Connect your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable.

On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your
smartphone appears as a removable drive.

On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard opens,
click Cancel to close the wizard.

Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows
Vista/Windows 7), or Finder (Mac), double-click the drive
representing your smartphone, and delete the files or folders.

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and the smartphone
when the USB drive screen is no longer displayed on your smartphone.

Copy music, photos, and videos using third-party software
Besides using USB Drive mode to copy your photos, videos, and DRM-free
music between your computer and your smartphone, you can also use
solutions available from third-party software developers (sold separately)
that facilitate the transfer of media files to your smartphone. For more
information, open the browser on your computer and go to
palm.com/sync-solutions.
KEY TERM DRM-free: Describes a file that is not protected by Digital Rights
Management. DRM-free files can be copied as many times as you like and can be
played on your Veer.

Overview: Get your personal data onto your
smartphone
Your personal data consists of the following:
•
•
•
•

Your contact list (names, phone numbers, street and email addresses)
Your calendar events
Your tasks (to-do list)
Your memos/notes

On your computer, you typically store such personal data in organizer
software like Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop by ACCESS, or the Mac’s
iCal and Address Book software.
It’s also likely that you store some personal data in accounts that you created
on the web. These are called online accounts. Sometimes you’ll hear that
data stored in online accounts is stored “in the cloud.” That’s just another
way to say that your data is stored on a server that you access through the
Internet. For example, if you have a Google/Gmail or a Yahoo! account, you
have a contact list stored in the cloud. You may even use the calendars in
these accounts to keep track of your schedule, so you may also have
calendar events stored in the cloud.
Finally, you may have important phone numbers stored only on an old
phone. You no longer use that phone now that you have a Veer, but you
want those numbers on your new smartphone.
You want to be able to access all this data on your smartphone. This section
explains how you can do that. The actual how-to part of getting your
personal data on your smartphone is pretty simple. But before you take that
step, we recommend that you spend some time thinking about where you
want your personal data to be stored and how you want to access it.
On your smartphone and in the cloud: You can set up a sync relationship
between your smartphone and an online account in the cloud. This enables
you to create and change data in one place—on your smartphone or in the
online account—and have it show up in both places.

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

On your smartphone and on your computer: You can set up a sync
relationship between your smartphone and selected desktop organizers.
Different kinds of sync relationships are possible using third-party solutions.
This enables you to create and change data in one place—on your
smartphone or in the desktop organizer—and have it show up in both
places.
On your smartphone only: Store and create contact and calendar data in
your Palm profile account. It’s backed up to your Palm profile in the cloud.
You cannot create, change, or look at your Palm profile account data except
on your smartphone.

NOTE Data that you store in your Palm profile account cannot be accessed
anywhere but on your smartphone. Palm profile account data is backed up daily.
No one, not even you, can see that data.

For further information about getting personal data onto your smartphone,
see palm.com/migrate-webOS.
What do we recommend? We recommend that you set up a Google
account and move your contacts and calendar data to the cloud. That way,
you can access, create, and change your data both on your smartphone and
in your Google online account. The remaining personal data that you create
on your smartphone—tasks and memos—are automatically backed up as
part of your Palm profile.
Use the following table to review your options. Then click the link to learn
how to complete the solution you choose for your personal data.
These solutions are not mutually exclusive. Do what works best for you. You
could potentially use all these solutions. You could, for example, sync several
online accounts, including an Exchange account; sync data with a desktop
organizer using a third-party solution; and store and create new data in your
Palm profile account.

Table 1. Data transfer and synchronization solutions for HP webOS smartphones

My personal data is here

I want to access data here

Do this

Learn how here

Online account (Google, Yahoo!,
Facebook, and so on)

My smartphone and my online
account

Set up the online account on your smartphone

See Manage online
accounts

Corporate Exchange account

My smartphone and
Outlook/other corporate email
app on my computer

Set up an online account for Exchange on your smartphone

See Manage online
accounts

Desktop organizer software—
and I want to stop using it

My smartphone and maybe
elsewhere

Export your personal data from the desktop organizer and add
it to an account on your smartphone, either an online account
(accessible in the cloud) or your Palm profile account
(accessible only on your smartphone)

See Export data from a
desktop organizer on your
computer

Desktop organizer software—
and I want to keep using it

My smartphone and my desktop
organizer

Set up a sync relationship between the smartphone and your
desktop organizer using a third-party solution

See Sync your desktop
organizer and your
smartphone

An old phone

My smartphone and maybe
elsewhere

Work with your wireless service provider to transfer data from
the old phone to an account on your new smartphone, either
an online account (accessible in the cloud) or your Palm
profile account (accessible only on your smartphone)

See Transfer data from an
old phone

Nowhere—I just want personal
data on my smartphone

My smartphone

Create new contacts and new calendar events in your Palm
profile account

See Backup

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

Transfer data from an old phone

BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you want the data from your desktop organizer to
be transferred to an online account, be sure you set up that account on the
web and on your smartphone first.
• On your computer, create an account on the Google website (go to
gmail.com) or in Exchange (speak to an IT person at your company).
• Set up the same account on your smartphone (see Manage online
accounts).

BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you want the data from your old phone to be
transferred to an online account, be sure you set up that account on the web
and on your smartphone first.
• On your computer, create an account on the Google website (go to
gmail.com) or in Exchange (speak to an IT person at your company).
• Set up the same account on your smartphone (see Manage online
accounts).
Otherwise, your data must be transferred to your Palm profile account (see
What is a Palm profile?).
•

Go to a AT&T store and ask a support agent for help in transferring
data from your old smartphone. When you’re ready to transfer data
from your old smartphone, be sure to tell the agent which account to
transfer the data to.

Otherwise, your data must be transferred to your Palm profile account (see
What is a Palm profile?).
1

On your computer, go to palm.com/migrate-webOS.

Click the link for transferring Contacts/Calendar data from a desktop
organizer.

Read the instructions and follow the links to download the Data
Transfer Assistant.

Export data from a desktop organizer on your
computer
About the Data Transfer Assistant (DTA)
The DTA enables you to do a one-time, one-way export of data from
selected desktop apps to your Veer through the USB cable included with
your smartphone. After the data is on your smartphone, you can select the
account you want to import the data to.

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

IMPORTANT The DTA is not synchronization software. It is meant to be used
once per desktop app, to export your info from the desktop app to an account on
your smartphone.

NOTE You cannot use the DTA to transfer Calendar and Contacts to a Yahoo!
account. Instead, you must use the upload tool provided by Yahoo!. Data is
transferred from your computer to Yahoo.com, and then from Yahoo.com to the
smartphone. Data is not transferred from the smartphone to Yahoo!. For more
information, go to palm.com/migrate-webOS.

These are the desktop apps that the DTA works with, and the data that the
DTA transfers to your smartphone:
Table 2. DTA: application data transferred
Operating Desktop
System
application
Windows
XP or
Vista®, or
Windows
7
Mac OS
10.5

Contacts

Calendar Tasks/ To
dos

Memos/
Notes

Outlook 2003,
2007, or 2010



Palm Desktop



Address Book






iCal

Get data from an online account in the cloud

Note the following:
• If you use a desktop organizer that is not listed in the table, go to
palm.com/migrate-webOS and click the link for transferring
Contacts/Calendar data from “somewhere else”.
• Depending on the amount of data you are transferring, it can take up to an
hour to complete the transfer of your data.
• Do not use the DTA to transfer data from a copy of Outlook that is
associated with Exchange ActiveSync, which wirelessly syncs data
between your smartphone and an Exchange server (see Manage online
accounts).
• The DTA is compatible with Palm Desktop versions 4.14e, 4.2, 6.2, and
6.22. If your version of Palm Desktop is not one of these, you can
download version 6.2 for free from palm.com/desktop. Install it, sync with
your old Palm device, and then use the DTA to transfer your data.
• If you use Palm Desktop on the Mac, you can export your contacts,
calendar events, and To do items into Address Book and iCal. Then use
the DTA to transfer your data. For more information, go to
palm.com/migrate-webOS.

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

If you are already using Google, Facebook, Yahoo!, and/or Exchange to
manage your calendar and contacts, then all you need to do to sync data to
your smartphone is set up one or more of these accounts on your
smartphone. The data syncs automatically. See Manage online accounts for
information on how to create an online account on your smartphone.
Table 3. Online account sync table
Set up your Veer to sync with...

To sync this data...

Google

Contacts and calendar events

Exchange

Contacts, calendar events, and tasks

Yahoo!

Contacts and calendar events

Facebook

Contacts and calendar events

NOTE Changes you make in your Yahoo! or Facebook account on the web show
up on your smartphone. There's nothing you have to do. You cannot, however,
change Yahoo! or Facebook contacts and calendar events on your smartphone.

Sync your desktop organizer and your
smartphone

If you prefer to sync your Veer directly to your computer without going
through the web, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth technology, or your smartphone’s
USB cable, you can download a third-party application (sold separately) that
enables synchronization of your smartphone directly to your desktop.
1

Go to palm.com/sync-solutions to learn about third-party applications
that enable you to sync your smartphone with your computer.

Follow the instructions given by the third-party vendor to install the
app on your computer.

NOTE You may also have to install another part of the application on your
smartphone. Follow the instructions of the third-party vendor.

If you want to continue using a desktop organizer to store your contacts,
calendar events, and tasks—iCal and Address Book on the Mac, or desktop
Outlook® or Palm Desktop by ACCESS on Windows—you have two
choices:
• Sync directly with your desktop organizer, avoiding the web completely.
• Sync your desktop organizer with Google on the web, and then sync
Google with your smartphone.

Sync your desktop organizer to Google, and Google to your
smartphone

Both choices require you to use a third-party solution (sold separately). Go
to palm.com/sync-solutions to learn more about these third-party solutions.

Sync directly with your desktop organizer

Download and install a third-party application (sold separately) that can
sync your desktop app to Google. Your desktop app syncs with your Google
account, and your smartphone also syncs with Google.
1

On your computer, set up an account on the Google website if you
don't already have one (go to gmail.com).

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

Set up your Google account on your smartphone. See Manage online
accounts.

Install a third-party application on your computer that enables you to
sync with Google. Go to palm.com/sync-solutions to learn about
available third-party sync solutions.

Follow the instructions given by the third-party vendor to sync the data
in your desktop app with Google. The next time Google syncs with
your smartphone, your data appears on your smartphone.

Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data

Phone
Your HP Veer 4G enables you to effectively manage
multiple calls. You can answer a second call, swap
between calls, and set up a six-way conference call.
Use Just Type to make a call by typing your contact’s
first and last initials.
You can also work with other applications while on a
call. Your Veer helps you to do all these tasks with
ease.

In this chapter
66
70
71
71
74
75
75
77
77
79
83

Chapter 6 : Phone

Make calls

Dial by contact name using voice dialing
1

For information on how to turn the phone on your smartphone off and back
on, see Turn wireless services off (airplane mode).

To open Voice Dial, do one of the following:
• Open Voice Dial

• Press and hold volume.
• Open Phone

, and tap and hold

• If you have a headset connected to your smartphone, press and hold
the button on the headset.

NOTE The first time you open Voice Dial, a brief audio tutorial explains how to
use voice dialing. You can choose to skip the tutorial.

* These indicate that the phone is on. You can make and receive calls.

* These indicate that the phone is off (airplane mode). You cannot make calls. Incoming calls
go to voicemail.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Say the contact name, number, or name and number type (such as
“John Smith mobile”).

If prompted, provide additional information for the number you want
to call. For example, if you say a contact name only, and you have
multiple phone numbers for that contact, Voice Dial prompts you to
say the type of number you want to call. Or, if you say a contact name
that matches more than one contact in your contacts list, Voice Dial
prompts you to specify which contact you want.

Additional Voice Dial commands: You can say any of the following voice
commands when Voice Dial is open:

Begin typing the contact first or last name, or initials.

Tap one of the contact’s phone numbers to dial it. If only the contact
name appears, tap the name to display the phone numbers for that
contact, and tap a number.

•
•
•
•

To redial the last number called: Say, “Redial.”
To check voicemail: Say, “Voicemail.”
To repeat the last audio prompt: Say, “Repeat.”
To go back one step and repeat the preceding audio prompt: Say, “Back”
or “Try Again.”
• To start from the beginning: Say, “Restart,” “Reset,” or “Start Over.”
• To exit Voice Dial without making a call: Say, “Cancel,” “Stop,” or “Exit.”
You can also exit Voice Dial by tapping Cancel, pressing and holding
volume, closing the Voice Dial app, or pressing the button on an attached
headset.
TIP You can turn on a preference that allows you to use voice dialing when the
screen is locked (see Use voice dialing when the screen is locked). If this preference
is on, you can access voice dialing by first turning the screen on if it is off (by
pressing power or sliding out the keyboard), and then pressing and holding
volume. You do not need to enter your PIN or password. If this preference is on
and you have a headset attached to your smartphone, you can access voice dialing
when the screen is locked by pressing and holding the button on the headset—you
don’t need to turn the screen on first.

Dial using the onscreen dial pad

TIP You can use voice dialing to call any contact number type except the

following: fax, pager, assistant, and radio. Some of these types appear for contacts
in certain online accounts only (such as a Google or Exchange contact).

Dial by contact name using Just Type
1

The onscreen dial pad is useful when you need to dial numbers that are
expressed as letters and when you need large, brightly lit numbers that you
can tap.
1

Open Phone

Display Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or open the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).

Chapter 6 : Phone

Tap the dial pad numbers to enter the number.

2
3

Tap

When you finish entering the number, press Enter
number to dial.

or tap the

to dial.
TIP If you turn off the preference to show contact matches in the dial pad (see

Turn contact match display on/off), this changes how you dial using the keyboard
in the Phone application. In Phone, after you enter the number with the keyboard,
tap the onscreen dial icon to dial.

TIP Press Backspace or tap the onscreen backspace icon (at the top of the screen,

to the right of the number you entered) to delete numbers one at a time. Tap and
hold the icon to delete all the numbers.
TIP You can paste numbers copied from other applications—for example, from an
email message or a memo—into the dial pad.
TIP To enter +, tap and hold 0 onscreen.

Dial a favorite
See Create a favorite for instructions on creating a favorite.

Dial using the keyboard

Open Phone

Tap

In the Launcher, Card view, or Phone, use the keyboard to enter the
number. You do not need to press Option
to enter numbers, *,
or #.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Tap the favorite. The call is made using the default number you
selected for that favorite.

Dial using a speed dial

• If your company uses Microsoft Exchange Server with a Global
Address List (GAL), entering the contact search information returns
matching results from the GAL as well. GAL results appear with the
icon next to the name.

Tap the number.

See Assign a speed dial to a contact for instructions on creating a speed dial.
TIP If you do not want contact matches to appear when you type a number on

the keyboard, you can turn off the Show Contact Matches preference (see Turn
contact match display on/off). When this preference is off, you can still dial by
contact name in the Phone application. After opening Phone, tap the contact list
icon to the right of “Enter name or number.” Type the contact name or initials, and
tap the number when it appears.

• In the Launcher, Card view, or Phone, press and hold the speed-dial key
you assigned to the number.

Dial by contact name in the Phone application
See How do I add names and other info into Contacts? for instructions on
adding contacts to your smartphone. You can also look up and dial contacts
using Just Type (see Dial by contact name using Just Type) or Voice Dial (see
Dial by contact name using voice dialing).
1

Open Phone

Using the keyboard, enter a name or initials until the contact you want
appears. Note the following:

Redial the last number dialed
1

Open Phone

Tap
. When the contact name or number appears at the top of the
screen, tap
again to dial.

• If you press E, R, or any other key that displays both a letter and a
number, you see both matching names and numbers onscreen.
Chapter 6 : Phone

Dial your national emergency number

Receive calls

To dial 911, do the following:
1

Press power

to wake up the screen if needed.

Drag

Do one of the following:

up to unlock the screen if needed.

• If Secure Unlock is not on (see Set options for unlocking the screen),
tap the center of the gesture area to display Card view if Card view is
not displayed. Enter the emergency number, and tap the number to
dial. You don’t have to press Option
to enter numbers.
• If Secure Unlock is on, tap Tap to dial emergency call, and then tap
Emergency call. Edit the displayed number if needed, and then tap
to dial.

If you want to answer calls, the phone must be on. This is different from
having only the screen turned on (see Turn your smartphone on/off). When
the phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.
You can pick the ringtone for incoming calls (see Select a file from the
ringtones folder as a ringtone). You can set a ringtone for individual contacts
as well (see Add a ringtone to a contact).

Answer a call
Do one of the following:
• If the screen is on when the smartphone starts ringing, tap

NOTE If the phone is turned off (that is, if it’s in airplane mode), you don’t have to
turn it on. It automatically tries to connect to a network to make the call.

Dial from another application
If a phone number appears in another application as an underlined link, you
can begin dialing the number directly from that application. For example,
you can dial phone numbers that appear in web pages; in messages (email,
text, or multimedia); or in notes to calendar events.
1
2

If a phone number appears as an underlined link, tap the number. This
displays the dial pad with the number already entered.
Tap

to dial.

In Messaging, you can dial a contact from a conversation by tapping Text or
the IM account name in the upper-right corner of the screen to open a list of
phone numbers you have for that contact, and then tapping
next to the
number you want to call.

Chapter 6 : Phone

• If the screen is off, drag
up to unlock the screen and answer the call.
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.
• If the smartphone is placed on an HP Touchstone charging dock (sold
separately), simply lift the smartphone off the dock to automatically
answer the call.

TIP You can see a photo of the person calling you by assigning a caller ID photo.

Use voicemail

See Add a photo to a contact.
TIP If you miss a call, a notification appears at the bottom of the screen. Tap the
notification to open the missed call dashboard item. On the dashboard item, tap
the name or number to call the person back, or tap the icon on the left to open
your call history (see View your call history).

Set up voicemail
1

Do one of the following:
• In the Launcher, Card view, or Phone, press and hold 1

Silence the ringer on an incoming call
When you silence the ringer on an incoming call, you can answer the call or
let it ring through to voicemail.
Do one of the following:
• Press power
.
• Press volume.
• Slide the ringer switch off (red means off). This silences the ringer and
any notification sounds. These sounds remain off until you slide the ringer
switch back on. Other sounds, such as music and video playback, are not
affected by sliding the ringer switch off.

Ignore a call

• Open Phone

. Then tap

• Open Phone

. Then tap and hold 1 onscreen.

Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.

Listen to voicemail messages
1

Do one of the following:
• In the Launcher, Card view, or Phone, press and hold 1

• Tap a voicemail notification at the bottom of the screen.

• Open Phone

. Then tap

• Open Phone

. Then tap and hold 1 onscreen.

Follow the voice prompts to listen to your messages.

To send a call immediately to voicemail, do one of the following:
• Tap
.
• Press power

What can I do during a call?
twice.

To reply to a caller who is in your Contacts list after you ignore a call, tap the
ignored call notification. This opens the caller’s contact entry, where you can
select a reply method. To reply to a caller who is not in your Contacts list, go
to your call history (see View your call history).

Your smartphone offers many advanced telephone features, including call
waiting, conference calling, and call forwarding. These features depend on
your service plan. Contact AT&T for more information.
While you’re on a call, info about the call appears on the call screen. When
you’re on a call, you can open other applications and work in them, and you
won’t lose your call. See Open applications.

Chapter 6 : Phone

If you created a reminder in the contact info of a caller, the reminder appears
as a notification when you make a call to or receive a call from the person.
See Assign a reminder message to a contact.

NOTE If you hold the smartphone up to your ear while you’re on a call, the
screen goes dark to prevent your accidentally tapping an item on the screen. This
is normal behavior. See Why the screen goes dark for more information.
* Volume

Manage a call

DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages during a call. This is
a great way to stay connected with friends and colleagues during a long call (see
Create and send a text or multimedia message).

Do any of the following:

End a call
Do one of the following:
• Tap
.
• Minimize the call screen to a card, and throw the card off the top of the
screen.
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.

Use another application while on a call
• Put the call on speakerphone: Tap
.
• Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Tap

TIP You don’t need an on-hold button to put a call on hold. Just tap the mute icon
to mute your end of the line.

• Open the dial pad to enter numbers for navigating phone trees,
responding to prompts, and so on: Tap
.
• Add a call: See Make a second call.
• Adjust call volume: Press volume.

Chapter 6 : Phone

The applications that you can use when you’re on a call depend on the kind
of network your smartphone is connected to. How can you tell which kind of
network you’re connected to? See Icons in the title bar.
GPRS network: You can use the personal information applications
(Contacts, Calendar, and so on) and send and receive text messages. But
some kinds of data connections are not possible: You cannot browse the
web, or send or receive email, multimedia, or instant (IM) messages. To
browse the web or send or receive email or IM messages while on a call,
you must connect to a Wi-Fi network. See Wi-Fi.

4G or 3G network: You can make simultaneous voice and data
connections. So when you’re on a call, you can also send and receive email;
browse the web; and send and receive text, multimedia, and IM messages.

NOTE You can’t send or receive multimedia messages using a Wi-Fi network.

While on a call, do one of the following:

Switch between two calls
• Tap
to put the active call on hold and switch to the other call.
For example, in the screen shown here, the call on the top of the screen,
555-0267 is currently on hold. The call on the bottom of the screen,
555-7592, is the active call—the caller you’re talking to. To switch between
the two, so that you switch to talking to 555-0267, tap
. Just remember to
tap
to switch between the two calls.

• Display Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and
begin typing the name of the app.
• Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).
• Open Quick Launch (see Open an application in Quick Launch).
2

Tap the application to open and work in it.

Tap the call notification at the bottom of the screen to return to the call
screen.

Make a second call
1

While on a call, tap
the first call on hold.

Dial the second call.

. This does not mute the microphone or put

Tap
to end either call. If you end the currently active call, the call on hold
becomes active.

Make a conference call
Answer a second call (call waiting)
When a second call notification appears, tap

. The first call is put on hold.

You can join up to five calls into a six-way conference call. The number of
calls you can join in conference depends on your service plan. Additional
charges may apply, and minutes in your mobile account may be deducted
for each call you make. Contact AT&T for more information.
1

Make or answer a first call, and then make or answer a second call.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Tap

Look up or send a message to a contact

to create the conference call.

When you’re on a call with a contact, tap the contact name to see the
person’s information in Contacts. With the contact entry open, you can do
the following:
• Tap
to send the contact a text message. For example, if the contact is
on hold while you’re having a long conversation with a second caller, you
can send the contact a text stating that you’ll call him or her back.
• Tap Edit to edit the contact entry. For example, if a contact gives you his
or her new email address while you’re talking, you can enter the address
during the call.

What’s my number?
3

Do any of the following:

• To add callers: Tap

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts. Your
phone number appears at the top of the Phone Preferences screen.

• To extract a call from the conference and talk privately: Tap the caller
name or number, and then tap
.
• To return an extracted call to the conference: Tap
4

When you’re done, tap
conference call.

Chapter 6 : Phone

to end either an extracted call or the

TIP You can also see your phone number by opening Device Info. The number

appears as the first entry under Phone.

View your call history
Your call history is more than just a log. It’s also a place where you can dial a
number, send a text message, and save or view contacts.
1

Open Phone

Tap

Do any of the following:

• To delete a call history entry: Throw the entry off the side of the
screen. Tap Delete to confirm.
• To clear the call history: Open the application menu, tap Clear Call
History, and tap Clear Call History to confirm.
4

If you displayed additional options for the contact or number, do any of
the following:
• To call an alternate number for a contact: Tap the number.

• To send a text message: Tap

• To save the number to Contacts: Tap Add to Contacts (see Save a
phone number to Contacts).
• To view a contact entry: Tap View Contact.
DID YOU KNOW? The additional options display includes the time and type
(incoming, outgoing, missed) of the call. If a call history entry collapses multiple
calls, the additional options show information for each call.

Work with favorites

• To switch the types of calls displayed: Tap All Calls or Missed Calls.
• To call a number: Tap the number.
• To display other options for the contact or number: Tap the contact
icon or the contact picture to the right of the number.
DID YOU KNOW? If a call history entry displays a number next to the contact
picture or icon, this indicates that you made and/or received multiple calls to or
from that phone number or contact in the same day. If you had calls to or from a
contact using more than one of that contact’s phone numbers, all calls are
collapsed into a single entry, and the most recently used phone number is
displayed.

You can quickly reach your closest contacts by phone, email, or text/
multimedia message by designating them as favorites. Creating a favorite
from a contact lets you view and touch base with that contact in just a few
taps.
For instructions on calling a contact you designate as a favorite, see Dial a
favorite.

Create a favorite
You can also create favorites in Contacts (see Create a favorite).
1

Open Phone

Chapter 6 : Phone

Tap

Tap Add Favorite, search for the contact, and tap the contact when
the name appears.

Tap the contact photo or contact
name.

Do one of the following:

icon to the right of the favorite

• To call the favorite using a different number: Tap the number.
• To send the favorite a text/multimedia message: Tap

• To view the favorite’s contact entry: Tap View Contact.

Add a phone number to a favorite
If you create a favorite in Contacts, but the contact does not have a phone
number associated with it, you can add a phone number to the favorite in
Phone.

If the contact has more than one phone number, tap the number you
want to set as the favorite. When you call the favorite, the call is made
using this number.

View favorite details
From the favorites list, you can dial a different phone number for that
contact, send a message, or view the favorite’s contact entry.
TIP In the favorites list, you can change the order of any favorite with an assigned
default number (see Create a favorite and Set or change the default number for a
favorite) by tapping and dragging. So you can put the people you call most at the
top of the list.

Open Phone

Tap

Chapter 6 : Phone

Open Phone

Tap

Enter the number, and tap to select the phone number type (see
Create a contact for information).

Tap Done.

and tap the favorite.

NOTE You can enter more than one phone number for the favorite here. If you
do, you need to set one of the numbers as the default (see Set or change the
default number for a favorite).

Set or change the default number for a favorite
If you create a favorite in Contacts, but the contact has more than one
phone number associated with it, you need to set the default number for the
favorite in the Phone app.
Also follow these steps if you want to use a different number as the default
number for a favorite.

Open Phone

Tap

Do one of the following:

• If you enter a phone number in Just Type that is not associated with
a contact, tap Add to Contacts.
• Before dialing a number you entered in the dial pad, tap Add to
Contacts.

• To set a default number: Tap the favorite.

• During a call, tap

• To change the default number: Tap the contact photo or contact
icon to the right of the favorite name, and tap Change Default
Number.
4

Do one of the following:

Tap the number you want to use.

at the top of the screen.

• After a call, from the dial pad, tap
. Tap the contact
the right of the number, and tap Add To Contacts.
2

icon to

Tap one of the following:
Add New Contact: Create a new contact for the phone number.

Remove a contact from the favorites list
When you remove a contact as a favorite, you do not delete the contact
itself. The contact no longer shows up as a favorite in Phone, Contacts,
Email, Messaging, or Just Type search results.
1

Open Phone

Tap

Throw the favorite off the side of the screen. Tap Remove to confirm.

Add To Existing: Tap the contact you want to add the phone
number to.

Use a phone headset

TIP You can also remove a contact as a favorite from within the Contacts app (see
Remove a contact from favorites).

Save a phone number to Contacts

You can connect a 3.5mm headset to your smartphone for hands-free
operation. You can also connect to a wireless headset using Bluetooth®
wireless technology. Both 3.5mm and wireless headsets are sold separately.

WARNING If driving while using a phone is permitted in your area, we
recommend using a headset or hands-free car kit (sold separately). However, be
aware that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your ability to hear other
sounds. Use of such a headset while operating a motor vehicle or riding a bicycle
may create a serious hazard to you and others, and may be illegal. If you must use
a stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in only one ear. Leave the other ear
free to hear outside noises, and use the headset only if it is legal and you can do so
safely.

You can save the number from an incoming or outgoing call to an existing
contact, or create a new contact for the number. If an incoming call uses
caller ID blocking, you cannot save the number.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Use a wired headset

• Hang up a single active call or all calls on a conference call.
• Switch between calls if there is one active call and one call on hold.

Your smartphone works with headsets that have a 3.5mm connector (look
for three colored bands on the plug). When in doubt, ask the third-party
headset manufacturer if the product is compatible with your smartphone. If
you hear a headset buzz or poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your smartphone.
1

If you want to stop using the headset, do any of the following:
• To switch from the headset to your smartphone’s speakerphone:
Tap
and tap Speaker.
• To switch from the wired headset to a previously paired Bluetooth®
hands-free device: Tap
and tap the device name.

Connect the magnetic end of the 3.5mm headset adapter to the
charger/connector on the right side of your smartphone.

• To use your smartphone without the headset: Disconnect the
headset.

Set up and use a Bluetooth® hands-free device
Your smartphone is compatible with many headsets and car kits (sold
separately) enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology version 2.1, with
EDR and Stereo (with AVRCP media controls).
After you set up a connection with a Bluetooth headset or hands-free car kit,
you can communicate using that device whenever it is within range and the
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is turned on. The range can vary
greatly, depending on environmental factors. The maximum is about 30 feet
(10 meters).
2

Insert a 3.5mm headset into the jack on the adapter. When you are on
a call, the
icon changes to
.
NOTE You can use an A2DP-enabled Bluetooth headset or speakers to listen to
music files on your smartphone.
TIP After use, keep the headset adapter connected to the headset, so you can
easily attach them to your smartphone again.

Open Bluetooth

The button on the headset performs different actions depending on
the headset model and what’s happening on the smartphone. Press
the button once to perform any of the following tasks supported by
your particular headset:

If the Bluetooth setting at the top of the screen is off, tap Off to switch
the Bluetooth feature from Off to On.

Tap Add device.

• Answer an incoming call.

In Type, make sure Audio is selected.

Tap the device name.

• Respond to call waiting.

Chapter 6 : Phone

To use a Bluetooth device with your smartphone, follow the
instructions that came with the Bluetooth device.

To switch to another Bluetooth device while on a call: Tap
and tap
the new device name. You can also tap Handset or Speaker to use
your smartphone without the headset.
TIP If you make a Bluetooth connection with a car kit, you might get a notification
on your smartphone asking if you want to upload contacts to the car kit. Tap Allow
to upload contacts. If you later want to delete the contacts from the car kit, check
the car kit documentation for instructions.

For more information on using the Bluetooth feature on your smartphone,
see Bluetooth® wireless technology.

Turn contact match display on/off
By default, when you have the dial pad displayed but you’re using the
keyboard to enter a phone number, both numbers and letters appear and
your smartphone performs a search of matching names in Contacts. If you
turn off this preference, typing on the keyboard with the dial pad displayed
enters numbers only, and no search is done in Contacts.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Show Contact Matches, tap On or Off.
TIP If you turn off the Show Contact Matches preference, you can still perform a

contact search in the Phone application. After opening Phone, tap the contact list
icon to the right of “Enter name or number.” Type the contact name or initials, and
tap the number when it appears.

Customize smartphone settings
Use Phone Preferences to customize smartphone settings.

Turn call forwarding on/off
You can forward calls to another phone number. Check with AT&T about
availability and pricing of forwarded calls; additional charges may apply.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Call Forwarding, tap On or Off.

If you turn call forwarding on, tap Enter Number and enter the call
forward number. Tap to change an existing number.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Turn my caller ID on/off
The caller ID feature controls whether your phone number appears on
another person’s phone when you call them. Check with AT&T about
availability and pricing of the caller ID feature.

U.S. or Canada. So you can simply enter the 10-digit number or dial a
contact with a 10-digit number, and the call goes through correctly. The
preference does not work with 7-digit numbers.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In International Dialing, tap Off to switch international dialing from
Off to On.

Begin typing the name of the country you are currently located in, or
scroll the list to find it.

Tap the country when it appears.

DID YOU KNOW? The caller ID feature does not affect whether your

smartphone displays the caller ID for an incoming call. Your smartphone always
shows the incoming caller ID unless the number is hidden or private.

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Show My Caller ID, tap On or Off.

Change your voicemail number
Turn call waiting on/off
You can choose to be notified when you receive a call while you are on a
call. You can choose to accept the call or not. See Answer a second call (call
waiting). Check with AT&T about availability and pricing of the call waiting
feature.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Call Waiting, tap On or Off.

When the international dialing preference is on, your smartphone
automatically adds the correct international dialing prefix and country code
to any 10-digit U.S. or Canadian number when you are traveling outside the

Chapter 6 : Phone

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

By default, under Voicemail Number, your current voicemail number
is highlighted. To change it, simply type the new number. If the current
number is not highlighted, tap the number to highlight it, and then
type the new number.

Turn the international dialing auto-prefix feature on/off

Use dialing shortcuts
Dialing shortcuts add a prefix at the beginning of a number, so you can dial
an extension instead of the whole number.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Under Dialing Shortcuts, tap Add new number.

Set the following:

When I Dial: Tap this field and select the number of digits you need to
enter to have your smartphone add a dialing prefix.

• To lock the SIM card: Tap Lock SIM Card. Enter the PIN provided
by AT&T to lock the SIM and tap Done. The SIM card locks anytime
you turn off your smartphone. To turn the smartphone back on, you
must enter the PIN.

Use This Dialing Prefix: Enter the prefix to be added at the beginning
of the dialed number. The combination of prefix and digits you enter
must add up to a complete phone number.
5

Do one of the following:

• To change the PIN: Tap Change SIM Card PIN and enter the old
PIN. Enter the new PIN twice and tap Done.
• To turn off SIM lock: Tap Unlock SIM Card. Enter the PIN and tap
Done.

Tap Done.

Example: A complete phone number in your company’s phone system has
11 numbers, for example, 1-408-555-1122. When dialing from a phone that’s
part of the system, you need to dial only the last five digits (51122). When
you create a dialing shortcut on your smartphone, you select “5 digit
numbers” for When I Dial and enter “140855” in Use This Dialing Prefix.
So when you dial your co-worker’s five-digit extension (51122), your
smartphone automatically dials the whole number: 1-408-555-1122.

Lock or unlock the SIM card
You can lock your SIM card to prevent unauthorized use of your mobile
account. When your SIM card is locked, you must enter your PIN to turn on
your smartphone to make or receive calls, except for emergency numbers.
The SIM card remains locked even if you move the card to another phone.
To unlock your SIM card, turn on the smartphone and enter your PIN.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Use restricted dialing
When restricted dialing is turned on, you can make calls to or answer calls
from only those numbers that are on your list of restricted numbers.
To add to or change the list, you need to enter a PIN2. If you enter an
incorrect PIN2 more times than allowed by AT&T, the SIM card locks. After
the SIM card locks, you need to enter a PUK2 to unlock the SIM card.
Contact AT&T to learn more about restricted dialing.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get your PIN2 from AT&T. If you have entered your
PIN2 incorrectly and your SIM card is locked, obtain your PUK2 from AT&T.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Restricted Dialing, tap On or Off.

If you turn restricted dialing on, enter the PIN2 and tap Next.

To edit the restricted number dialing list: In Restricted Dialing, tap
View Restricted Dialing List and do one of the following:

• Get your default PIN from AT&T.
• Make sure the phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area (see
Turn wireless services on).
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

• To add an entry: Tap Add an entry and enter the PIN2. Enter the
name and phone number and tap Done.
• To edit an entry: Tap the entry and enter the PIN2. Edit the
information and tap Done.

Chapter 6 : Phone

• To delete an entry: Swipe the entry off the side of the screen and
enter the PIN2. Tap Delete to confirm.

Set roaming and data usage preferences
Use roaming and data usage preferences to set options for using your
smartphone in your home network and while roaming. For example, you can
set options to prevent placing a call or making a data connection while
roaming, so that you avoid extra charges.
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Under Network, set any of the following:
Network Auto-Select: Set whether your smartphone automatically
selects a network. If you turn auto-select off, tap the network to use.
Network Type: Set whether your smartphone automatically connects
to any available network type, or whether to connect to 4G/3G
networks only or 2G networks only.
Data Roaming: Set whether to allow web browsing, email,
multimedia messaging, and instant messaging when you are roaming.
Data Usage: Set whether to turn data services—web browsing, email,
multimedia messaging, and instant messaging—on or off.

Manually select network settings
If your smartphone cannot read the network settings from your SIM card
during setup, you can manually enter the settings.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Obtain the following from AT&T:
• The Internet access point name (APN)
• Your username and password for accessing the Internet APN

Chapter 6 : Phone

• The multimedia messaging APN name (MMS APN)
• Your username and password for accessing the multimedia messaging
APN
• The multimedia messaging service center name (MMSC)
• The multimedia messaging proxy server name (MMS proxy)
• The maximum multimedia messaging size
1

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Under Network, in Manual, tap Off to switch manual network
settings from Off to On.

Tap Edit Network Settings.

Tap Internet APN and enter the settings you obtained from AT&T.

Tap MMS APN and enter the settings you obtained from AT&T.

Tap Change Settings.

Turn TTY/TDD on/off
A TTY (also known as TDD or text telephone) is a telecommunications
device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have
speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. Your
smartphone is compatible with select TTY devices.
You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your smartphone using the
3.5mm headset adapter. Check with the manufacturer of your TTY device
for connectivity information. Be sure that the TTY device supports digital
wireless transmission.
When TTY/TDD is turned on, the

icon appears in the title bar.

Attach the magnetic end of the 3.5mm headset adapter to the charger/
connector on the side of your smartphone.

Connect a TTY/TDD device to the jack on the 3.5mm headset
adapter.

Open Phone

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In TTY/TDD, tap On or Off.

Use SIM Toolkit
The SIM Toolkit app gives you access to services from AT&T such as
account information, payment, and news.
1

Open SIM Toolkit

View and work with the features displayed.

Chapter 6 : Phone

Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
Enjoy the ease and speed of keeping in touch with
friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can
access the AT&T data network or a Wi-Fi network.
You can send and receive attachments as well.
And keep the Messaging app in mind for times when
you need to send a short text, multimedia, or instant
message to a mobile phone number—especially
handy when you’re in a meeting that’s running late.

In this chapter
86
98
101
104

Email
Messaging: All messages in one application
Messaging: Text and multimedia messaging
Messaging: Instant messaging

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Merged inboxes in Email

How do I send and receive email on my smartphone?

You can set up multiple email accounts on your smartphone. When you
open Email, you see all your accounts in a single view: Account List view.
From there, you can open the inbox of an individual account, or you can
open the All Inboxes smart folder and see all messages from all your inboxes
displayed in a merged view.

Use the Email application on your smartphone to access the many email
accounts you have: company (like Exchange), ISP (like Earthlink or
Comcast), and web-based (like Gmail). You must create the account online
before you can set it up on your smartphone.
You can set up your email accounts in either of these locations. The
procedure is the same in both locations.
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Email app
The HP Synergy feature (see Your HP Veer 4G) provides another advantage:
During the same process you go through to set up an email account, you
also set up the same account for all other applications that can display data
from that account. For details on how Synergy works for the current list of
online accounts, see Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Gmail account on your
smartphone. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that you
want to receive data from your Google account (besides Email, you can
include Contacts, Messaging, and Calendar). After setup is complete, your
smartphone begins to download your email and all data for all other apps
you selected for synchronization.
If you want, you can also use your smartphone’s web browser to view your
web-based email—just go to the email provider’s website.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

1 Number to the right of All Inboxes indicates the total number of unread email messages in
all your email accounts.
2 Number to the right of an individual folder name indicates the number of unread messages
in that folder.

If you reply to a message when you’re working in All inboxes, the message is
sent from the same account in which it was received. To reply from a
different account, tap the From field and tap a different account to send the
email from.
If you create a new message when you’re working in All Inboxes, the
message goes out using the account you set as the default account (see Set
email preferences).

Set up email

Follow this procedure if you have a common email provider, for example,
AOL, EarthLink, or Yahoo!. If you are setting up the Email application to
work with your corporate email account that uses Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync or Lotus Notes, see Set up email: Microsoft Exchange and Lotus
Notes.
1

Open Email

Do one of the following:
• The first time you open Email, tap an account type or tap Email
Account.

Tap Done.

NOTE If automatic setup fails for your email account, an error message appears.
Tap Manual Setup or Find a Synergy Service, gather the settings info you need,
and enter the account settings (see Set up email when automatic setup fails).

Set up email: Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes
Follow this procedure to get email for Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes
accounts.

• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add An
Account, and then tap an account type or tap Email Account.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get this info from your email provider or system
administrator:

• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and tap an account
type or tap Email Account.

• Server domain name

• Mail server name or IP address for receiving mail
• Your username and password

NOTE If your corporate Exchange system utilizes policies such as remote wipe
and password enforcement (including minimum password length, allowed
number of failed password attempts, and other parameters), those policies are
supported in your Exchange account on your smartphone. Check with your system
administrator for details.

Open Email

Do one of the following:
• The first time you open Email, tap Microsoft Exchange.

Enter your email address and password, and tap Sign In.

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.

• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add An
Account, and tap Microsoft Exchange.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and then tap
Microsoft Exchange.

Set up email when automatic setup fails
Follow these steps if automatic setup (see Set up email) does not work for
your email account.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get this info from your email provider or system
administrator:
• Account type (POP or IMAP)
• Incoming and outgoing mail server names
• Incoming mail server username and password
• Incoming and outgoing server port numbers
• Any SSL requirements for incoming and/or outgoing mail
• Any authentication (ESMTP) requirements for outgoing mail
• Root folder (IMAP accounts only)

Enter your email address and password, and tap Manual Setup.

Enter info for the incoming mail server as needed, based on the server
information you got from your email provider or system administrator.
You can enter either the server name or IP address in the Incoming
Mail Server field.

Tap Sign In.
To keep your Exchange account secure, you may be asked to set a
password or PIN that is required to unlock the smartphone. Tap Set
Password or Set Pin. Enter a password or PIN and tap Done.

You may be presented with options for which apps should download
data from that account. For each app, tap On or Off, and then tap
Create.

Tap Done.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

If you have already started account setup and an “Unable To Sign In”
message appears, tap Manual Setup, and skip to step 6. Otherwise,
start at step 2.

Open Email

Do one of the following:

• The first time you open Email, tap Email Account.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add An
Account, and then tap Email Account.

• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and then tap Email
Account.

Enter your email address and password, and tap Manual Setup.

Tap the Mail Type field and tap your account type.

Enter info for the incoming and outgoing mail server as needed, based
on the server information you got from your system administrator.

Tap Sign In.

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.

Tap Done.

Enter advanced account settings
These settings apply only to the account you select in step 3.
1

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Set any of the following:

Account Name: Enter the name that appears in the account list.
Full Name: Enter the name you want to appear in the From field for
messages you send.
Show Icon: Set whether a notification icon appears onscreen when a
new message arrives.
Alert: When Show Icon is on, set whether a sound plays when a new
message arrives (see Turn new email notifications on/off).
Signature: Tap to create a signature that’s added to outgoing
messages (see Add a signature to outgoing messages).
Reply-to Address: Enter the address you want recipients to see and
reply to on your outgoing messages, if this is different from the email
address you send the message from.
Show Email: Set how many days’ worth of messages to retrieve from
the server.
Get Email: Set how frequently to synchronize email for this account.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Sync deleted emails (POP accounts only): Set whether messages
should be deleted on the server when you delete them on your
smartphone.
Sync server to device (POP accounts only): Set whether messages
should be deleted on your smartphone when they are deleted on the
server.
Default Folders (IMAP accounts only): Specify the folder where
messages you send, save as drafts, or delete are stored.
Change Login Settings: See Change account login settings.

Change account login settings
When you change your password for an online email account, remember to
make the change in the account settings on your smartphone.
1

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Change Login Settings and tap the relevant fields to change the
account information.

Remove Account: See Delete an email account.

Turn new email notifications on/off
The settings you select here apply to individual email accounts. You can
apply different settings to each email account.
.

Rename an account
You can change the name that appears in the account list.
1

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Account Name and enter a new name.

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap an account in Accounts.

In Show Icon, tap On or Off.

Tap Alert, and tap any of the following:

Delete an email account

Vibrate: The smartphone vibrates with no other sound.

When you delete an email account from your smartphone, it removes the
account information from your smartphone only. It does not affect your
account with the email provider.

System Sound: The system sound plays. If the ringer is off, the
smartphone vibrates.
Ringtone: Tap Ringtone, and tap a ringtone name. To hear the
ringtone: Tap
to the right of its name.
Mute: No sound plays and the smartphone does not vibrate.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Remove Account, and then tap Remove Email Account.

Create and send an email message
1

Open Email

Tap

TIP To address an email directly from the Launcher or Card view, type the email

address. If the email address is already associated with a contact, the contact is
displayed. Tap the email address. A new email is opened, with the address in the To
field.

.
5

(Optional) Tap To to open the Cc and Bcc fields, and enter an address.

(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter additional addresses.

Enter the subject, press Enter

(Optional) To set the priority for the message: Open the application
menu and tap Set As Normal Priority or Set As High Priority.

(Optional) To discard a message: Open the application menu and tap
Discard Message.

Tap

TIP If you have set up an email account, you can also start writing an email from

Card view or the Launcher. Start typing a message, scroll down the list of search
options, and tap New Email. The Email application opens at a new email message,
with the text you entered in the body of the message.

, and enter the body text.

Format email text
To format the text of a message you are creating, do one of the following:

(Optional) Tap From to change the email account you are using to
send the message. This option appears only if you have more than one
email account set up on your smartphone.

In the To field, do one of the following to address the message:
• Enter a contact name, initials, or email address. Tap the email
address when it appears. When you enter a contact name, favorites
appear at the top of the search results (see Create a favorite).
• Tap
to open the full contact list. Tap the contact you want, or
enter a name or address to narrow the list.

• To enter bold, italic, or underlined text: Open the application menu and
tap Edit > [the option you want]. Enter the text. To turn off the
formatting, open the application menu and tap Edit > [the option you
want to turn off].
• To enter colored text: Open the application menu and tap Edit > scroll
down > Text Color. Tap the color and enter the text.
• To format text you already entered: Select the text (see Text selection
gestures), open the application menu, and tap Edit > [the option you
want]. To turn off a formatting option, open the application menu and tap
Edit > [the option you want to turn off]. For text color, tap the black
square.

• Enter the full email address for a recipient who is not a contact.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Add attachments to a message
1

While composing a message, tap

To get the file you want to attach, do the following:

Open Email

If the folders for the account you want are hidden, tap
the folders.

Tap the folder you want to check messages for. If synchronization
doesn’t start, tap
.

• Tap an icon at the bottom of the screen to search for pictures,
videos, music files, or documents.

to display

How can you tell if sync is happening? Look for the animated circular
movement around the number of messages in the upper-right corner
of the screen.

• Begin typing the file name.
• To take a new picture to send as an attachment: Tap the photo icon
at the bottom of the screen, tap New Photo, take the photo, and
then tap Attach Photo.

Tap a message to open it.

(Optional) Do any of the following:

• To record a new video to send as an attachment: Tap the video icon
at the bottom of the screen, tap New Video, record the video.
3

Tap the file name.

Repeat steps 1–3 to attach other files.
TIP To remove an attachment you added to an email: Throw the attachment off
the side of the screen and tap Delete to confirm.

Save a message as a draft
• While composing a message, open the application menu and tap Save As
Draft.

• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap

Receive and read email messages
The Email application synchronizes messages anytime you open a mail
folder. It also synchronizes messages on an automatic schedule—the default
interval depends on the type of account you have (see Enter advanced
account settings for information on changing the interval).

to call it.

• To send a text message: Tap and hold the number, and tap Text.
• To add a number to Contacts: Tap and hold the number, and tap
Add to Contacts. Tap Save As New to create a new contact, or tap
Add To Existing to add this number to an existing contact.
• To send an email: Tap the email address, enter your message, and
tap
.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.

Follow these steps to manually retrieve messages.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

• To share a link to a web site: Press and hold Option
link. Then tap Share Link.

and tap the

• To copy a link to a web site: Press and hold Option
link. Then tap Copy URL.

and tap the

• To copy an email so you can paste it into a memo or other
document: Open the application menu and tap Edit > Copy All.
6

Tap

in the subject line to view the previous or next message.

To view messages for another account, make the back gesture twice
(see Go up one level in an app (back gesture)) to return to the account
list, and tap the account name.

Open email attachments

• To play an MP3 file attachment: Tap
. Tap
to pause. MP3 files you
download from Email are not saved to USB storage, and they are not listed
in Music.

Save attachments
When you open attachments of certain file types, you can save them to your
smartphone so you can view them later in one of your smartphone’s
applications.
1

Open the attachment (see Open email attachments).

Do one of the following:

You can receive any kind of file sent to you in email, but you can open an
attachment only if your smartphone has an application that can open the file
type.
• To open a single attachment: Tap the attachment name to download the
attachment. If the attachment is a supported file type (MP3, PDF, DOC,
DOCX, XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX, TXT, GIF, or JPG), it opens automatically.
• To open multiple attachments: Tap the list of attachment names to view
the attachments, and tap an attachment name to open the file.

• For pictures in JPG, GIF, BMP, or PNG format, tap Copy To Photos.
• For other file types, open the application menu and tap Save As. If
the Save As menu item is not available, you cannot save the
attachment. To save Microsoft Word, Excel®, or PowerPoint® files,
you must have set up a Quickoffice account (see Quickoffice®
mobile office software).
3

To open a saved attachment on your smartphone, open the application
that can display the attachment. The attachment appears in the list of
available files. Tap the file to open it.

Save or share an inline image
If a message contains an inline image—an image inserted right into the
body text—you can share the image with someone else via email. If you
choose this option, a new blank email message opens with the image file as
an attachment.
If the image is in JPG, GIF, BMP, or PNG format, you can also save it to and
view it in the Photos app.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Do one of the following:

View a contact from an email message

• To share an image: With the message open, press and hold Option
and tap the image. Then tap Share Image.
• To copy an image to Photos: Tap the image file name and then tap Copy
to Photos (if available).

• In a message you’ve received from someone listed in the Contacts app,
tap the name to open the contact entry.

Search for an email message
Add a contact from an email message
You can add a contact name or email address to your Contacts list directly
from the header or from the To or Cc field of an incoming email message.
You can either create a new contact or add the information to an existing
contact.
1

Do one of the following in a message you’ve received:
• To add a contact from the message header: Tap the name or email
address in the header.
• To add a contact from the To or Cc field: Tap To and tap an email
address in the list of recipients.

Tap Add To Contacts.

Tap one of the following:

You can search for messages in any email folder. Incoming messages must
be fully downloaded to your smartphone to show up in search results.
• In Launcher or Card view, type a few characters of a name, email address,
or subject of an email. Tap Email, scroll to find the email you want, and
tap to open it.
• Open Email
, and open the folder containing the message. Start typing
a name, email address, or subject line of a message you're looking for.
Matching results appear as you type. Keep entering characters to narrow
the list.

Reply to a message
1

Open a message.

Tap one of the following:

Add New Contact: Create a new contact for the name or address.

: Reply to just the sender.

Add To Existing: Tap the contact you want to add the name or
address to.

: Reply to the sender and all other addressees.
3

Enter the reply message text and tap

DID YOU KNOW? You can add an email address to Contacts directly from the

Launcher or Card view. Type the email address. If the email address is not already
in Contacts, tap Save to contacts. Tap Add To Contacts, and tap Add New
Contact or Add To Existing. If you are adding to an existing contact, tap the
contact you want to add the name or address to. Enter the contact details and tap
Done.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Forward a message
1

Open a message and tap

Address the forwarded message (see Create and send an email
message).

Enter the forwarded message text and tap

Mark all messages in a folder as read
1

Open a folder.

Open the application menu, tap Mark All Read, and then tap Mark
All Read again.

Show or hide message recipients
You can show all recipients in the To or Cc fields of an email you received.

Flag or unflag a message

Open a message.

Open the application menu, tap Show Recipients or Hide
Recipients.

When you flag a message, a
is placed beside the message in your Inbox.
You might flag a message to highlight it as something that you need to
return to.

Copy messages
You can copy the body text of a message.
1

Open a message.

Open the application menu, tap Edit, and tap Copy All.

Move a message to another folder
1

Open a message.

Open the application menu and tap Move To Folder.

Tap the folder you want.

Open a message.

Open the application menu and tap Set flag or Remove flag.

Show or hide message header details
1

Open a message.

Tap a recipient name to show details. Tap again to hide details.

Delete a message
Deleting a message moves it to your deleted items folder, so it’s still on your
smartphone. Depending on your email account, this folder is called Deleted
Items, Deleted, Trash, or something else.
Do one of the following:

Mark a message as read or unread
1

Open a message.

Open the application menu and tap Mark as Read/Unread.

• In the message list: Throw the message off the side of the screen.
• In an open message: Tap
.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

To avoid deleting a message accidentally, you can turn the Delete
Confirmation preference on (see Set email preferences). If you do
accidentally delete a message, you can move it back to the original folder
(see Move a message to another folder). To remove a message from your
smartphone permanently, delete it from the deleted items folder. To delete
all messages from the deleted items folder, open the application menu while
in the folder, tap Empty Trash, and then tap Empty Trash again.
TIP If you change the folder where you store deleted messages for an IMAP
account (see Enter advanced account settings), deleting messages from the folder
removes them from your smartphone.

Add a signature to outgoing messages
A signature includes information you want to add to the closing of all your
outgoing messages—for example, your name, address, and phone numbers;
your website; or a personal motto. You can use a different signature for each
email account.

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account you want.

Tap the Signature field and enter the signature text. To format the text
with bold, italics, or color, select the text (see Text selection gestures),
open the application menu, and tap Edit > [the option you want].

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

View mail folders
1

Open Email

Tap

Tap the folder name you want to open.

(Optional) Tap the folder header to view information such as last sync
and number of messages.

to the right of an account name.

Sort email in a folder

Set email preferences

Open Email

If the folder you want is not displayed, tap
one of your accounts.

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Set any of the following:

Tap a folder, open the application menu, and tap Sort.

Tap any of the following:

.
to display the folders for

By Date: Sort the folder contents by date, from most recent to oldest.
Tap By Date again to sort in reverse order.
By Sender: Sort by sender first name, from A to Z. Tap By Sender
again to sort in reverse order. In outgoing message folders, such as
Sent and Outbox, By Sender sorts emails by recipient first names.
By Subject: Sort by subject, from A to Z. Tap By Subject again to sort
in reverse order.

Add an email folder as a favorite

Smart Folders: Set whether to include All Inboxes and/or All
Flagged messages as favorites at the top of Account List view.

Favorites appear at the top of Account List view.
1

Open Email

If the folder you want is not displayed, tap
account name to display the folder.

Tap

Delete Confirmation: Tap to turn this setting On/Off. When Delete
Confirmation is on, you are asked to confirm deletion of email
messages.

.
to the right of the email

Accounts: Tap an account name to enter advanced settings or to
change synchronization settings for email, contacts, calendar events,
or tasks (see Enter advanced account settings and Rename an
account).

to the right of the folder name.

To remove a folder as a favorite, repeat steps 1 and 2 and tap
of the folder name.

to the right
Add Account: See Set up email.
Default Account: Tap the account shown and then tap the account
you want to set as the new default. The default account is used to send
a message when you create a new message in Account List view or in
a merged folder view such as All Inboxes or All Flagged.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Reorder accounts

Send email messages from within another application

You can change the order of the accounts in Account List view.

Use the share menu item in any application that supports this feature to
send an item as an attachment to an email message. This feature is available
in the Contacts, Photos, PDF View, and Memos applications, among others.
Depending on the app, the menu item might be named Share, Send, or
Email. For details, see the section in this guide on the specific application.

Open Email

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap and hold the account name, wait for the visual cue, and then drag
the account up or down.

Reply to meeting invitations
You receive meeting invitations on your smartphone in the same way that
you receive email messages. You cannot create meeting invitations on your
smartphone.
Tap to accept, tentatively accept, or decline an invitation.
Here are the key features of meeting invitations:
• Meeting invitations appear on your smartphone in the Email application,
not in the Calendar application.
• From within the Email application, you can accept, decline, or tentatively
accept a meeting invitation.
• If you accept or tentatively accept an invitation, it appears as an event in
Calendar.
• You can reply to and forward meeting invitations in the same way as
email messages.
TIP If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to accept,
decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation, open the
message and tap Remove From Calendar to delete the meeting from your
calendar.

Messaging: All messages in one application
What kinds of messages can I send and receive?
You can use the Messaging application to send and receive the following
types of messages:
• Text and multimedia messages (see Create and send a text or multimedia
message)
• Instant messages for an IM account you already have set up online (see
Set up an instant messaging (IM) account)
The Synergy feature enables the Messaging app to gather all your text,
multimedia, and instant messages to and from the same contact into a
single conversation (sometimes called a “thread”). So you can see your
entire message history with someone regardless of the different methods
you happened to use to communicate with that person (see Work with
conversations). You can even switch from account to account without losing
the thread of your conversation (see Switch between messaging accounts in
a conversation)—just pick the messaging account that’s most likely to keep
you in unbroken contact with the person you’re talking to.

Work with conversations
When you exchange more than one message with a person, the messages
are grouped into a conversation. A single conversation can contain text,
multimedia, and IM messages. When you start or continue a conversation,

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

the upper part of Conversations view displays all messages you’ve
exchanged with this person, and the bottom part provides the area where
you type your next message.

In Messaging, start a new conversation or open one that’s listed in
Conversations view.

Tap Text or an IM account name in the upper-right corner of the
screen. If available, the other ways to communicate with this contact
appear in a list. Tap the account or phone number you want to use.

You can carry on multiple conversations at the same time.
1

Open Messaging

Do one of the following:
• Start a new conversation: Create a message (see Create and send a
text or multimedia message or Send and receive IM messages), or
tap a message and reply to it.
• Continue an existing conversation: Tap the conversation.

Enter your message.

Tap

TIP You can copy the contents of a conversation as plain text, which you can
paste in a memo, email message, and so on (see Copy messages).

Dial a number from a conversation
Switch between messaging accounts in a conversation

Open Messaging

In a single conversation, you can switch between text/multimedia
messaging and an IM account. So if you are having an IM chat with
someone and he or she goes offline, you can send the person a text message
to wrap up the conversation. You can also switch between different phone
numbers for sending a text message to a person.

Tap a conversation.

Do one of the following:

TIP To be able to switch between text messaging and IM messaging with

someone, that person’s mobile phone number and IM address must be in the same
single contact or a linked contact. If the address and number are in different
unlinked contacts, link them (see Link a contact).

• Tap the contact name or phone number at the top of the screen, and
tap the number you want to call.
• Tap Text or the IM account name in the upper-right corner, and tap
beside the number you want to call.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Switch between Conversations view and Buddies view
Conversations view lists all of your Messaging conversations. Buddies view
lists all of your IM buddies.
1

Open Messaging

For Conversations view, tap Conversations. For Buddies view, tap
Buddies.

the recipient’s smartphone, as long as the receiving IM application supports
the image.
This table shows the emoticons that are supported on your smartphone.

NOTE Emoticon combinations that use words, such as :cool or :cry, are not
supported in most messaging applications. Emoticons created using these
combinations may not appear correctly on the recipient’s phone.

Table 1. Supported emoticons
To display this
emoticon...

Enter any of these keyboard character combinations...
>:o

>:-o

o_O

In Buddies view, tap
contact that person.

to expand a buddy list. Tap a buddy name to

TIP You can set a preference to show all your buddies, whether they are online or
offline, or to hide offline buddies. In Buddies view, open the application menu and
tap Show/Hide Offline Buddies.

Use emoticons in a message
To include an emoticon in a text, multimedia, or IM message, type a
keyboard character combination for that emoticon. Most emoticons can be
created by more than one combination. After you send the message, the
emoticon image appears in the conversation on your smartphone and on

100

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

>:O

>:-O

>:-(

:angry

:mad

:confused

8-)

:’(

=’(

:cry

:-[

:-S

:-!

:eek

:-(

B-)

=-[

:redface

:-s

%-(

=-(

:sad

^_^

:heart

O:)

O:-)
:*

:cool

:O :-O :o :-o
:shock :omg

:-*

>:(

X-(

=-O

^-^

:grin

:biggrin

o:)

o:-)

:innocent

=-*

:kiss

:eww

=-o

:angel

:gross

:surprised

Table 1. Supported emoticons
To display this
emoticon...

Enter any of these keyboard character combinations...
:-D

>:-)

>:)

:|
:-&

:-|

=-D

>:->

>:>

:neutral

:laugh
:evil

:lol
:twisted

:meh
=-&

:-)

=-)

:-/

:-\

;)

;-)

:wink

:-@

=-@

=-\

:doh

:sick

:smile
=/

:P :-P :p :-p :b
=-P :yuck :razz

=-/

:-b

=-b

=-p

Customize messaging notifications
You can set your smartphone to show a notification and/or play a sound
when a new message arrives. These settings apply to all your Messaging
accounts.
1

Open Messaging

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

In Show Notifications, tap On or Off.

When Show Notifications is on, tap Alert, and tap any of the
following:
Vibrate: The smartphone vibrates with no other sound.
System Sound: The system sound plays. If the ringer is off, the
smartphone vibrates.
Ringtone: Tap a ringtone. To change a ringtone for messages, below
Alert, tap Ringtone. Tap a ringtone name. To hear the ringtone:
Tap
to the right of its name.
Mute: No sound plays and the smartphone does not vibrate.

Messaging: Text and multimedia messaging
Create and send a text or multimedia message
Each text message can have up to 160 characters. You can send a message
of more than 160 characters, but the message may be split into several
messages. If you send a text message to an email address, the email address
is deducted from the 160-character count.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

101

Multimedia messages consist of text and pictures or videos. You can include
pictures in JPG format and videos that you record on your smartphone.

• Enter a phone number for a recipient who is not a contact.
• Do you need to enter a short code that contains letters—for
example, to text a vote to a TV poll or to make a donation to a
charity? Use the keyboard to enter it; just press the letter keys and
tap the code that appears under Short Code. This is not the same as
dialing a number that is expressed as letters—for example, (555) 256
TALK. To dial a number like this, you must use the onscreen dial pad
and tap the numbers that correspond to the letters T,A,L,K— which
would be 8255.

DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages even while you are
on a phone call. This is easiest when using a hands-free headset or the speaker.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Before you use your smartphone to send or receive multimedia messages,
refer to your service plan for pricing and availability of multimedia
messaging services.

(Optional) Tap the To field and repeat step 3 to enter additional
recipients.

• Make sure that the phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area
(see Turn wireless services on).

To attach a picture in JPG format to a multimedia message, do one of
the following:

TIP You can also use Just Type to write a text message from Card view or the
Launcher. Start typing a message and scroll down the list of search options. Under
Quick Actions, tap More, and then tap New Message. The Messaging application
opens at a new message, with the text you entered in the body of the message.

Open Messaging

The first time you open Messaging, tap Done to send a text or
multimedia message. Thereafter, skip to step 3.

Tap
. The cursor is in the To field. Do one of the following to
address the message:

• Before entering the message text: Tap
. Tap the album containing
the picture you want and tap the picture, or tap New Photo and
take a picture. Tap Attach Photo.
• After entering the message text: Open the application menu and tap
Add File. Follow the instructions given above.

.
6

• Before entering the message text: Tap
, and tap
. Tap the
album containing the video and tap the video, or tap New Video. If
you tap New Video, tap
to start recording, tap
to stop, and
then tap the new video’s date. If a video is above the maximum size
allowed for sending by multimedia message, you can trim the video
to an appropriate size (see Edit videos you recorded).

• Enter a contact’s first or last name or initials, screen name, phone
number, or email address. When you enter a contact name, favorites
appear at the top of the search results (see Create a favorite). Tap the
phone number, IM account name, or email address you want to use
to send the message when it appears.
• Tap
to open your full contact list. Tap the contact you want or
enter a name or address to narrow the list.

102

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

To attach a video you recorded to a multimedia message, do one of the
following:

• After entering the message text: Open the application menu, tap
Attach File, and tap
. Tap the album containing the video and tap
the video, or tap New Video. Follow the instructions given above.
7

Enter the message text and tap

TIP You can include emoticons in your message (see Use emoticons in a

(Optional) Do any of the following from the body of the message:

message).

• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap

TIP You can also send a contact entry as part of a multimedia message. Do this in
the Contacts app (see Send contacts).

• To add a number to Contacts: Tap and hold the number, and tap
Add to Contacts. Tap Save As New to create a new contact, or tap
Add To Existing to add this number to an existing contact.

• To send an email: Tap the email address.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.

Add a contact from a text or multimedia message
To add a message sender as a contact:

Receive and view text and multimedia messages

In Conversations view, tap a conversation with someone who is not a
contact.

Tap the header at the top of the screen.

Tap Add To Contacts.

Tap one of the following:
Add New Contact: Create a new contact for the number.

You can view pictures, videos, and animated GIFs, and listen to music files
included in a multimedia message. You can save pictures in JPG format to
your smartphone for viewing in the Photos application. Animated GIF files
appear as JPG files in the Messaging app.

Forward a message

Open Messaging

Tap a conversation to view messages.

In a conversation, tap a message.

To view an attached file in a multimedia message: Tap a music, video,
or vCard file name.

Do one of the following:

Add To Existing: Tap the contact you want to add the number to.

Attached pictures are displayed within the message. To view an
attached picture: Tap the picture and tap View. Tap Copy To Photos
to save an attached JPG picture.

• To forward the message through Messaging: Tap Forward, and
enter the recipient’s number or address in the To field.
• To forward the message in an email: Tap Forward Via Email, and
enter the recipient’s name or email address in the To field.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

103

(Optional) Tap the message text, and edit the text.

Delete a conversation

Tap

In Conversations view, throw the conversation off the side of the
screen.

Tap Delete to confirm.

Copy messages
You can copy an individual message as plain text. You can also copy the
contents of an entire conversation.
1

Open Messaging

Tap a conversation.

Set up an instant messaging (IM) account

Do one of the following:

Your smartphone supports instant messaging through popular online IM
services, such as GoogleTalk and AIM. If you already have an IM account,
you can sign in through the Messaging app or through the Accounts app
(see Use the Accounts application to set up an online account).

• To copy the entire conversation: Open the application menu, tap
Edit, and tap Copy All.
• To copy a single message: Tap the message and tap Copy Text.

View a contact’s information from a message
• In a conversation, tap the header of a message received from a contact to
open the contact entry.

Dial a number from a message
•

104

Messaging: Instant messaging

Tap a phone number and tap

The HP Synergy feature (see Your HP Veer 4G) provides another advantage:
During the same process you go through to set up a messaging account,
you also set up the same account for all other applications that can display
data from that account. For details on how Synergy works for the current list
of online accounts, see Online accounts available for HP webOS
smartphones.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Google Talk account on your
smartphone. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that you
want to receive data from your Google account (besides Messaging, you
can include Contacts, Calendar, and Email). After setup is complete, your
smartphone begins to download your messages and all data for all other
apps you selected for synchronization.

Delete a message

Open Messaging

In a conversation, throw the message off the side of the screen.

Do one of the following:

Tap Delete to confirm.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

• The first time you open Messaging: Tap Add An Account.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add IM Account.

Do either of the following:
• To set up messaging with one of the accounts listed: Tap the account
type.
• To set up an account type that is not listed, tap Find More, tap an
app, and follow the instructions onscreen to add the account.

Tap

to the left of the text Offline and tap Available.

Sign out of an IM account
1

Open Messaging

Enter your username and password.

Tap Buddies.

Tap Sign In.

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.

Tap the status icon to the left of your online status (Available or Busy)
and tap Sign off.

Tap Done.

Send and receive IM messages
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the phone is on and that you’re
inside a coverage area (see Turn wireless services on).

Open Messaging

Tap Buddies.

Open Messaging

Do one of the following to start or continue a conversation:
• In Buddies view, tap a buddy name. If there’s more than one account
for that buddy, the most recently used IM account is opened. To
switch to another IM account, tap the IM account name in the
upper-right, and tap an IM address.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

105

• In Conversations view, tap an existing conversation.
• In Conversations or Buddies view, tap
to start a new message.
Enter an IM address, or tap
to search for a contact.
3

Enter the message text and tap

(Optional, if available) Tap the Message field and enter a message for
your buddy invitee.

Tap Add Buddy.

TIP You can include emoticons in your message (see Use emoticons in a

message).

When the message recipient replies, the reply appears below your
message in the conversation. Repeat step 3 to reply to that person.

(Optional) Do any of the following from a message you receive:
• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap

Receive a buddy request
1

Open Messaging

Tap the conversation containing the invitation.

Do one of the following:
• To accept a buddy request: Tap

• To add a number to Contacts: Tap and hold the number, and tap
Add to Contacts. Tap Save As New to create a new contact, or tap
Add To Existing to add this number to an existing contact.
• To send an email: Tap the email address.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.

Add a buddy
To add a buddy to an IM account, you must send a buddy request and be
accepted as a buddy by the invitee.
To send a buddy request:
1

Open Messaging

Open the application menu and tap Add Buddy.

Tap the IM Service field and tap the account in which you want to add
the buddy.

In the Buddy Name field, enter the buddy's IM address.

• To decline a buddy request: Tap

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

.
and tap Delete.

Block a message sender
You can block a person from contacting you by IM if you don’t want to
receive any further messages from them.
You cannot, however, block a person if they are on your IM buddy list. To
block an IM buddy you first need to delete them from your buddy list (see
Delete a buddy).
1

Open Messaging

Tap a conversation with the person you want to block.

Open the application menu and tap Delete This Person.

Tap Delete.

Delete a buddy
1

106

Open Messaging

Do one of the following:

Change your IM account username and password

• In Conversations view, tap a conversation with the buddy you want
to delete.

If you change the username or password for your IM account online, you
need to enter the updated information for the account on your smartphone.

• In Buddies view, tap a buddy.
3

Open the application menu and tap Delete This Person.

Tap Delete.

Change your online status
1

Open Messaging

Tap Buddies.

Tap the status icon to the left of the status description, and tap your
new status.

Change your custom message

Open Messaging

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Enter the new information and tap Sign In.

Delete an IM account
1

Open Messaging

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Messaging Account.

Your custom message is seen by your IM buddies. It appears next to your
IM screen name and status. It can contain any text you want.
1

Open Messaging

Tap Buddies.

Do one of the following:
• If you already have a custom message, tap the current message and
enter the new message text.
• If you’re creating a custom message for the first time, tap the status
text (Available or Busy) and enter the custom message text.

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

107

108

Chapter 7 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging

Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
Your HP Veer 4G is all you need to organize your
personal information and keep it with you wherever
you go.
All your personal information is backed up and kept
private either in your Palm profile or in one of your
online accounts.

In this chapter
110
121
128
132
133
135
135

Contacts
Calendar
Tasks
Memos
Clock
Calculator
Facebook

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

109

Contacts
How do I add names and other info into Contacts?
You have a few options for getting info into Contacts.
Connect to an online address book: If you have an address book in an
online account that works with the HP Synergy feature (see Your HP Veer
4G), for example, Google or Microsoft Exchange, you can set up Contacts
on your smartphone to synchronize and display contacts that you store in
the online address book. After you set up the connection to the online
address book, contacts you enter online show up automatically in Contacts,
and contacts you enter on your smartphone sync to the online account,
provided the account allows writing from the smartphone to the online
account.
You can set up your contacts accounts in either of these locations.
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Contacts app (see Use Contacts for the first time and Customize
Contacts)

110

NOTE In the Launcher, tap Accounts and then tap Add Account to see the
current list of online accounts you can set up on your smartphone and from which
you can access contact info. See Online accounts available for HP webOS
smartphones to see how major online accounts synchronize data between the
web-based account and your smartphone.

Enter a contact directly in Contacts: See Create a contact for instructions.
You can assign the contact to one of your online address books—if you do, it
synchronizes with the online address book. Or you can create the contact in
your Palm profile account, which means it shows up on your smartphone
only. Palm profile contacts are included in the daily backup of your Palm
profile information, so you can restore them if they are accidentally erased.
Use a third-party sync solution: If you want to use a desktop app to store
your contacts, you can use a third-party solution (sold separately) to sync
your contacts directly with your computer (see Sync your desktop organizer
and your smartphone or to go palm.com/sync-solutions).
Export contacts from desktop software or an old phone: When you
export contacts from desktop software or an old phone, you select which
account to assign those contacts to. Look for those contacts in the account
you select (see Transfer data from an old phone and Export data from a
desktop organizer on your computer).

The Synergy feature provides another advantage: During the same process
you go through to set up a contacts account, you also set up the same
account for all other applications that can display data from that account.
For details on how Synergy works for the current list of online accounts, see
Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones.

Download vCard info to Contacts: A vCard is a file type made especially
for contact info. A vCard may contain one or many contact entries. A vCard
can be attached to an email or a multimedia message, and you can
download the info in a vCard to your Contacts app. See Receive vCards.

For example, suppose you want to set up your Google contacts account on
your smartphone. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that
you want to receive data from your Google account (besides Contacts, you
can include Messaging, Calendar, and Email). After setup is complete, your
smartphone begins to download your contacts and all data for all other apps
you selected for synchronization.

Linked contacts

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

The Synergy feature automatically links contacts from different accounts if it
finds data in common between them. For example, if you have a contact in
Exchange and in Google for Emily Weeks, your smartphone links the
contacts so that all of Emily’s info shows up on a single contact screen. You

need to open just one view to see all of Emily’s info. The actual data remains
separate in the various accounts where you originally created the data; it’s
just assembled in one view on your smartphone for your convenience.
How can you tell if a contact is linked? Look in the upper-right corner of the
contact screen. If you see a number beside the photo icon, that means that
you’re looking at a linked contact, with combined info from contacts you’re
storing in separate accounts.

Do one of the following:
• To set up an online account to sync: Tap Add An Account and go to
step 3.
• To open Contacts without creating an online account: Tap Done.
This opens your Palm profile account, and you can start creating
contacts in this account.

3
1 Tap the photo icon to see the contacts that are linked.

To set up an account that is listed, tap the account type, enter the
account information, and then tap Sign in.

2 Emily is a contact in your Google online account and in your Palm profile account.
3 Scroll down to see Emily’s combined contact info.

You can unlink linked contacts, and you can manually link contacts (see
Unlink a contact or Link a contact).

Use Contacts for the first time
1

Open Contacts

NOTE When setting up an AT&T Address Book account, you are asked to accept
AT&T’s terms and conditions. Tap Terms & Conditions and then tap the plus icon
in the upper right to see the full terms and conditions. Tap Create Account to
continue and follow the onscreen instructions.

If you are setting up an Exchange account, to keep your Exchange
account secure, you may be asked to set a password or PIN that is
required to unlock the smartphone. Tap Set Password or Set Pin.
Enter a password or PIN and tap Done. If you encounter problems
while setting up an Exchange account, see Set up email: Microsoft
Exchange and Lotus Notes to learn about setting up an account
manually.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

111

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.
4

To add detailed name information, such as prefix, suffix, or middle
name, to a name, open the application menu and tap Name Details.

To set up an account type that is not listed, tap Find More, tap an app,
and follow the instructions onscreen to add the account.

NOTE If you add your Facebook or LinkedIn account to Contacts, your friends’
Facebook and LinkedIn email addresses show up in Contacts. You cannot change
Facebook or LinkedIn info from Contacts on your smartphone. You also cannot
add friends to your Facebook or LinkedIn account from Contacts. To work directly
with Facebook or LinkedIn, download the free Facebook or LinkedIn application
from HP webOS App Catalog (see Download a free application and Facebook), or
go to facebook.com or linkedin.com in the Web application (see Web).

Create a contact

* Account icon, showing Palm profile account

You can add a contact to an account. If you don’t specify the account, the
new contact is added to your default account.
If you are using Contacts for the first time, you go through a few different
steps to add or access the contacts on your smartphone (see Use Contacts
for the first time). Follow this procedure to add contacts directly on your
smartphone after the first time you use Contacts.
1

Open Contacts

Tap

(Optional) Tap the account icon to the right of Name to change the
account to which the new contact will be added.

112

Tap fields to enter contact details, select a ringtone for this contact,
and so on. Scroll to see all fields. You can add a reminder that appears
whenever you and this person get in touch. See Assign a reminder
message to a contact.

In some fields, such as New Phone Number, when you enter the
information, a label button appears on the right. Tap the button to
change the label for your entry—for example, to identify a number as a
mobile or work phone.

NOTE If an account doesn’t appear in the list, you can’t add data to that account
from your smartphone.

Tap Name to enter the contact name.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

TIP When you enter a phone number that requires pauses—for example, a

number for which you need to enter a password or respond to prompts—you can
insert a pause or a stop in the number. To insert a two-second pause, enter a P
where you want the pause to appear. To insert a stop, enter a W where you want
the stop to appear. To dial the next set of numbers after the stop, tap the numbers
you entered as they appear onscreen.

Tap Done.

(Optional) To assign the contact as a favorite, tap
favorite).

(see Create a

Find a contact

If you have contacts that you call frequently, you can do any of the following
to help access their numbers quickly:

To find a contact within the Contacts app, use these steps.
1

Open Contacts

Begin typing any of the following:

• Create a favorite in Phone (see Create a favorite) or in Contacts (see
Create a favorite).
• Create a speed dial (see Assign a speed dial to a contact).
• Add a contact to the Launcher (see Add a contact entry to the Launcher).

• First, middle, or last name
• First and last initial (no space between)

View, edit, or delete contact information

• Company
• Nickname

For more search options, tap Global Address Search. (This option is
available if you are using Microsoft Exchange with a Global Address
List.)

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

(Optional) To copy a contact, open the application menu, tap Edit, and
tap Copy All.

Tap the contact.
TIP You can also use Just Type to find a contact from Card view or the Launcher.
Start typing a name or initials and scroll down the list of search results.

The contents of the contact entry are copied as plain text, with
carriage returns between each element.
4

To edit a contact, tap Edit.
Info that’s dimmed means it originates from an account that you can’t
edit on your smartphone (like Facebook).

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

113

In a linked contact, tap the account icon in the upper-right corner to
edit fields specific to that account.

The contact info is copied to the SIM card, and a linked contact is
created between the source contact and the contact(s) on the SIM
card.

NOTE The fields that make up the contact header (name, photo, job title,
company) are unique to each account. You must open a specific account to edit
these fields.

If the contact has more than one phone number, tap the number you
want to copy to the SIM card. To copy other numbers, repeat steps 3
and 4, selecting a different number each time.

Do one or both of the following:
• To add or change information: Tap a field (see Enter information in a
field).
NOTE In a linked contact, when you enter info in a field for the first time, you can
assign that info to any account by tapping the account button in the field.

• To delete a piece of contact information: Throw the item off the side
of the screen and tap Delete.
7

Tap Done.

Copy a contact to the SIM card
After you add a phone number for a contact, you can copy that contact’s
name and phone number to the SIM card. If a contact has more than one
phone number, you can copy each number as a separate entry on the SIM
card.

114

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

Open the application menu and tap Copy To SIM Card.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Add a photo to a contact
The photo you add appears onscreen when this contact calls you or when
you call the contact.
1

While creating (see Create a contact) or editing (see View, edit, or
delete contact information) a contact, do one of the following:
• To add or change the photo in the default account: Tap

• In a linked contact, to add or change the photo of another account:
Tap the account button in the upper-right corner and tap the other
account (see Linked contacts).

Add a ringtone to a contact
Select the ringtone you want to hear when this contact calls you.
1

While creating (see Create a contact) or editing (see View, edit, or
delete contact information) a contact, tap Set a ringtone.

Do one of the following:
• Tap the ringtone name.
• To use a music file as a ringtone: Tap
and tap the file name. Then
tap the file name in the list of ringtones.

(Optional) Tap

Tap Done.

to preview the ringtone.

TIP To change the ringtone for a contact, tap the ringtone and tap Change
Ringtone. Delete Ringtone deletes the ringtone from the contact, not from the list
of available ringtones.

Do one of the following:
• To take a new photo: Tap New Photo, and take the picture.
• To use an existing photo: Tap the album containing the picture and
tap the picture.
DID YOU KNOW? If you see a number attached to a contact’s photo, that's

because it's a linked contact (see Linked contacts).

(Optional) Do either or both of the following:
• To zoom out or in on a part of the picture: Pinch in or out on the
picture.
• To capture the portion of the picture you want: Tap and hold the
picture, and then drag the portion you want to the center of the
onscreen box. This portion becomes the contact photo.

Create a favorite
You can make a contact a favorite, so that it appears at the top of the search
results list when you search using Just Type.
1

Open Contacts

Tap Favorites.

Tap Add Favorite, and tap a contact.
In the All contacts list, favorites are identified with a

Tap Assign To Contact.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

115

Remove a contact from favorites
1

Open Contacts

Tap Favorites.

Tap a contact and tap

Tap the phone number you want to assign a speed dial to, and then do
one of the following:
• To assign a speed dial: Tap the key to use as a speed dial.
• To reassign a speed dial to the selected number: Tap the assigned
speed dial and then tap Reassign To [Name].

.
TIP To remove a speed dial from a number, open the contact, open the

application menu, and tap Set Speed Dial. Tap the number and tap Remove
Speed Dial [key letter].

Assign a speed dial to a contact
You can assign a speed dial to any contact phone number. You can assign up
to 23 speed dials.

NOTE You cannot assign 1 (the E key) as a speed dial. The number 1 is reserved
for dialing your voicemail system. The # (B) and * (Z) keys are also unavailable.

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

Open the application menu and tap Set Speed Dial.

Assign a reminder message to a contact
If you have an important message or a question for a contact, you can enter
a reminder right on your smartphone. The next time you and the contact
are in touch—whether by phone call, email, or text message/IM—a
notification appears showing the contact name and a message bubble. Tap
the bubble to view the reminder.
1

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

Open the application menu and tap Add Contact Reminder.

Enter the reminder, and make the back gesture to save it.
TIP When you create a reminder message for a contact, unless you remove it, it

pops up every time you make contact with that person. To remove a reminder
message, open the application menu, and tap Add Contact Reminder. Tap the
trash icon.

116

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Link a contact

When your smartphone recognizes matching information in two or more
contacts—for example, the same name and phone number—it
automatically gathers the info from the two records into a single view that
displays all the contact information. You can also manually link contacts.
The info for your linked contacts appears combined only on your
smartphone; the actual info is kept separate and distinct in the accounts it
came from.

IMPORTANT To maintain the integrity of your contact data, it’s important that
you link only one person’s contact info in different accounts. For example, if you
have contact info for Emily Weeks in Google, Facebook, Microsoft Exchange, and
your Palm profile account, go ahead and link all four contacts into a linked contact.
But don’t link Emily’s contact info with her sister Allison’s.

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

In the open entry, tap the contact name in the header, and tap Link
more profiles.

(Optional) After you create the link, you can ensure that the linked
contact appears in your Contacts list under the name you’re most likely
to recognize (and not, say, under a person’s IM screen name, which
can be unrelated to their real name). To do this, tap the contact name
you want to appear, and tap Set As Primary Profile.

Unlink a contact
1

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

Tap the contact name in the header, and tap the contact you want to
unlink.

Tap Unlink This Profile.

Search for the contact (see Find a contact) and tap it to link the two
contacts.

Add a contact entry to the Launcher
Add your favorite contacts to the Launcher, so you can open them directly
from that location.
1

Open Contacts

Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.

Open the application menu and tap Add To Launcher.

(Optional) Edit the first and last name as you want them to appear in
the Launcher.

Tap Add To Launcher. To see the contact in the Launcher, scroll down
on page 1 of the Launcher.

If the contact has a picture (see Add a photo to a contact), the picture
appears as a Launcher icon. If the contact doesn’t have a picture, the contact
name appears in the Launcher with a placeholder icon. Tap the real or
placeholder icon to open the contact.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

117

TIP To remove a contact from the Launcher, open the contact, open the
application menu, and tap Remove From Launcher.

Get in touch with a contact
1

Open Contacts

Tap the contact name.

NOTE Entries that you cannot change on your smartphone, like those from
Facebook and LinkedIn, you also cannot delete from the smartphone. You must
delete them from your account on the web to remove them from your
smartphone.

Do one of the following:
• To delete only one entry in a linked contact: Tap the displayed
contact name to open the list of all entries in the linked contact. Tap
the entry you want and tap Delete This Profile.
• To delete an unlinked contact or an entire linked contact: Open the
application menu and tap Delete Contact. Tap Delete All Profiles
to confirm.
NOTE If you see Delete Other Profiles rather than Delete All Profiles, you have
linked contacts that come from accounts whose info you can't change on your
smartphone (like Facebook and LinkedIn). Tap it. To delete any remaining contacts,
go to the account online using your computer and delete them there.

Do any of the following:
• To call or send an email or instant message to that contact: Tap the
appropriate field. For example, tap a phone number to call the
contact.
• To send a text message: Tap

• To locate an address on a map: Tap an address field.
If you delete a contact that is assigned to an online account, the
contact is deleted in the online account also.

Delete a contact

118

Open Contacts

Tap the contact name.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Customize Contacts
1

Open Contacts

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

You can also choose to sort by Company & first name or Company &
last name. In these cases, the company name is alphabetized, and
within the company, whichever you choose, the names are still listed
as first name followed by last name.

Accounts: Tap an account to change login settings and sign in using
the new settings.
Default account: Tap the current default account to change the
default to another account. New contacts you create are assigned to
this account unless you specify otherwise.
Sync Now: Tap to manually synchronize your online accounts (see
Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts).
Add An Account: Tap, and then tap an account type. Enter the
account information. Before you can set up an account on your
smartphone, you must already have an account online with the
provider.

Set the following options:
List Order: Tap to select the criterion by which the contact list is
sorted. If you select Last name to sort on, the names are alphabetized
by last name, but they still appear in the Contacts list as first name
followed by last name. If you select First name to sort on, names are
alphabetized by first name.

Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts
If you want to get contacts from an online account on your smartphone
immediately, or upload contacts from your smartphone to the online
account, you can do a manual sync. This synchronizes Contacts with all the
accounts you have set up on your smartphone, and it syncs all other apps
associated with all online accounts that you selected for synchronization.
1

Open Contacts

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap Sync Now.

Delete an online account from Contacts
1 Contact list sorted by first name
2 Contact list sorted by last name

If you synchronize contacts with an online account, deleting the account
from Contacts stops synchronization of contacts only—if you also sync email
or calendar events with that online account, those continue to synchronize.
Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

119

Deleting the account from Contacts also deletes the associated contact
entries from your smartphone only. The entries are not deleted from the
online account.

Open Contacts

To send one contact:

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Open Contacts

Tap the account name.

Open the application menu and tap Send Contact.

Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Contact Account.

Tap one of the following:

Open the application menu and tap Send All To Car Kit.
If a Bluetooth device is detected, all contacts are sent.

To restart synchronization with an account you have deleted from Contacts:
Open Accounts
, tap the account name, and tap Off beside Contacts to
turn synchronization on.

, and tap a contact.

Send To Car Kit: Your Bluetooth device needs to be on and detected.
Send Via MMS: Messaging opens.
Send Via Email: Email opens.

Send contacts
You can send all contacts to a hands-free car kit (with Bluetooth), or send a
contact using multimedia messaging (MMS) or email.

Receive vCards
To get an emailed vCard into Contacts:

To send all contacts to a car kit, first ensure that your car kit can be detected
by your smartphone (see Connect with a paired device). Basic contact
information, such as first name, last name, and phone number are always
sent to all car kits. If a car kit requests it, other contact information may be
sent, such as address, company name, email address, URL, notes, and
images.
Linked contacts are sent to a car kit as a single contact. For example, if you
have one phone number in your Google contacts for Emily Weeks, and
another in your Exchange contacts, and you have linked them on your
smartphone, a single Emily Weeks contact with two phone numbers is sent
to the car kit.
1

120

Open Contacts

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

From the open Email message, tap the attachment.
The vCard opens automatically within Contacts.

Tap Add To Contacts.

Tap one of the following:
Add New Contact: Save the vCard as a new contact.
Add To Existing: Add the vCard information to an existing contact.

Calendar
How do I get events into Calendar?
You have a few options for getting events to show up in Calendar:
Connect to an online calendar: If you have a calendar in an online account
that works with the HP Synergy feature (see Your HP Veer 4G), for example,
Google or Microsoft Exchange, you can set up Calendar on your
smartphone to synchronize and display events in the online calendar. After
you set up the connection to the online calendar, events you enter online
show up automatically in Calendar, and events you enter on your
smartphone sync to the online account, provided the account allows writing
from the smartphone to the online account.
You can set up your calendar accounts in either of these locations.
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Calendar app (see Use Calendar for the first time and Customize
Calendar)
DID YOU KNOW? If you synchronize with your Google calendar, you can add

Google Weather to the calendar on your desktop and have it appear in Calendar
on your smartphone. On your desktop, log in to your Google Calendar account
and open Calendar Settings. Click the General tab, enter your location, and click
the temperature unit you want in Show weather based on my location. The next
time your smartphone synchronizes with your Google account, Google Weather
appears in Calendar on your smartphone.

The Synergy feature provides another advantage: During the same process
you go through to set up a calendar account, you also set up the same
account for all other applications that can display data from that account.
For details on how Synergy works for the current list of online accounts, see
Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Google calendar account on
your smartphone. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that

you want to receive data from your Google account (besides Calendar, you
can include Contacts, Messaging, and Email). After setup is complete, your
smartphone begins to download your calendar events and all data for all
other apps you selected for synchronization.

NOTE In the Launcher, tap Accounts and then tap Add Account to see the
current list of online accounts you can set up on your smartphone and from which
you can access Calendar events. See Online accounts available for HP webOS
smartphones to see how major online accounts synchronize data between the
web-based account and your smartphone.

Enter an event directly in Calendar: See Create an event for instructions.
You can assign the event to one of your online calendars—if you do, it
synchronizes with the online calendar. Or you can create the event in your
Palm profile account, which means it shows up on your smartphone only.
Palm profile events are included in the daily backup of your Palm profile
information, so you can restore them if they are accidentally erased.
Use a third-party sync solution: If you want to use a desktop app to store
your calendar events, you can use a third-party solution (sold separately) to
sync your calendar events directly with your computer (see palm.com/
sync-solutions).
Export calendar events from desktop software: When you export
calendar events from desktop software, you select which account to assign
those events to. Look for those events in the account you select (see Export
data from a desktop organizer on your computer).

Layered calendars
Suppose you use the calendar in both Microsoft Exchange and in Google. If
you set up both of those accounts to sync with your smartphone, your
smartphone’s Calendar app shows the events from both in a single view—a
layered calendar with events that are color-coded to identify which provider
they come from. Individual events are stored separately with your different
providers; the events are just assembled in one view on your smartphone for
your convenience.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

121

If you change an event, the change is made in the appropriate calendar.

You can also look at the events of just one calendar at a time.

Use Calendar for the first time
1

Open Calendar

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.
4

To set up an account type that is not listed, tap Find More, tap an app,
and follow the instructions onscreen to add the account.

NOTE If you choose to sync Calendar with an online Facebook account, your
Facebook events show up in Calendar, but you cannot add calendar events to
Facebook from the Calendar app. To work directly with Facebook, use the
Facebook application developed for your smartphone (see Facebook). To work
directly with LinkedIn, go to linkedin.com in the Web application (see Web) or
download the free LinkedIn application from App Catalog.

Do one of the following:

Create an event

• To set up an online account to sync: Tap Add An Account and go to
step 3.

If you are using Calendar for the first time, you go through a few different
steps to add or access the calendar events on your smartphone (see Use
Calendar for the first time). Follow this procedure to add events directly on
your smartphone after the first time you use Calendar. For information on
managing your smartphone’s time settings, see Date & Time.

• To open Calendar without creating an online account: Tap Done.
This opens your Palm profile account, and you can start creating
events in this account.
3

122

To set up an account that is listed, tap the account type, enter the
account information, and then tap Sign in.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Open Calendar

• Tap
to the right of the name to enter more details about the
event. Make the back gesture to return to Day view.
Don’t look for a save button—your info is automatically saved when
you make the back gesture to close the event.
TIP You can also use Just Type to create a Calendar event directly from the

Launcher or Card view. Start typing the event text and, under Quick Actions, tap
New Calendar Event. The Calendar application opens at a new event, with the
text you entered in the subject line.

Enter the event location
2

While creating an event (see Create an event), tap
to the right of
the event name. To enter the event location after creating an event, tap
the event name in Day view.

Tap Event location and enter the location.

Tap All or an online account name in the upper-right corner, and tap
the calendar you want to use for this event.

NOTE If an account doesn’t appear in the list, you can’t add data to that account
from your smartphone.

TIP Need to find the event location on a map? Open an event that has a location

specified in the Event Location field, open the application menu, and tap Event
Location. Tap either Show on Map, which shows the location on Google Maps,
or Get Directions, which gives directions from your current location.

If you create an event in All Calendars view, the event is created in the
calendar that is set as the default (see Customize Calendar).
3

Go to the day you want (see Move around in Calendar) and tap a blank
time slot.
In Day view, available time slots between events are compressed and
labeled X Hrs Free. To expand free time so you can enter an event, tap
X Hrs Free.

Schedule a repeating event
1

While creating an event (see Create an event), tap
to the right of
the event name. To set an event as repeating after creating the event,
tap the event name in Day view.

Enter the event name, and then do one of the following:
• Press Enter

to add the event to the calendar.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

123

Tap No Repeat, and then tap a repeat interval or Custom to define a
repeat interval and set the end date.

Open Calendar

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the Event Reminders field and tap any of the following:
Vibrate: The smartphone vibrates and makes a vibrating sound but
makes no other sound.
System Sound: The system sound plays. If the ringer is off, the
smartphone vibrates (see Set ringer switch settings).
Ringtone: A ringtone that you choose plays.
Mute: No sound plays and the smartphone does not vibrate.

Add a note to an event
DID YOU KNOW? To enter a birthday, anniversary, or holiday, create an

untimed event. Then select Yearly on [date] as the repeat interval. See Create an
all-day (untimed) event.

Add an alarm to an event
1

While creating an event (see Create an event), tap
to the right of
the event name. To add an alarm after creating an event, tap the event
name in Day view.

The default alarm setting is 15 minutes before the start of the event. To
change the setting, tap 15 minutes before and tap the new setting for
the alarm.

Customize event notification sounds
The settings you apply here apply to all of your Calendar accounts.

124

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

While creating an event (see Create an event), tap
to the right of
the event name. To add a note after creating an event, tap the event
name in Day view.

Tap Event notes and enter the note.

NOTE If a phone number is displayed in an event note as an underlined link, you
can tap the number to make a call. This displays the phone dial pad with the
number already entered.

Create an all-day (untimed) event
An all-day event such as a birthday appears in your calendar without a
specific time slot.
1

Open Calendar

Go to the day you want, open the application menu, tap New, and
then tap All Day Event.

Tap the account icon in the upper-right corner to do any of the
following:
• To switch the Calendar account you’re viewing: Tap All Calendars
or one of your Calendar accounts.
• To remove a Calendar account from the layered calendar view (All):
Scroll down and tap Calendar View Options. For the account you
want to remove, tap On to switch the view option to Off.
• To change the color that identifies a Calendar account: Scroll down
and tap Calendar View Options. Tap the current color, and then
tap a new color in the list.

Move around in Calendar

Enter the event details.

Change the Calendar display
You can change the display of Calendar to show the events from all of your
calendars or just the events recorded in one of your calendars. You can also
change the color that identifies a calendar account, and you can display
events in Day, Week, or Month view.
1

Open Calendar

Tap an icon on the bottom of the screen to see different calendar
views:

• To go to the next or previous day: In Day view, swipe left or right on the
screen.
• To go to the next or previous week: In Week view, swipe left or right on
the screen.
• To go to the next or previous month: In Month view, swipe up or down on
the screen.
• To go to a specific day from Week or Month view: Tap the day.
• To go to a specific month, date, or year: Open the application menu and
tap Jump To. Tap the month, day, and year and tap Go To Date.
• To go to today: In Day view, tap the Day View icon.
TIP Other ways to go to today: Open the application menu and tap Show Today,

or tap Jump To > Go To Today.

Table 1. Calendar Views

Quickly glimpse your schedule

Icon

• In Day or Week view, slightly drag left or right to peek at the next/
previous day or week without changing the current view.
• In Month view, slightly drag up or down to peek at the next/previous
month.

Description
Day view
Week view
Month view

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

125

Delete an event

Respond to an event reminder

If you delete an event that is assigned to an online account, the event is
deleted in the online account also.

When an event reminder appears in the notification bar at the bottom of the
screen, tap the event description to open the event, or tap one of the
following:

IMPORTANT When you delete an Exchange event on your smartphone,
notification is not sent to attendees.

Open Calendar

Do one of the following:
• In Day view, press and hold Option , and tap the event. You have
the option to delete just this event or the entire series, or to cancel
the delete.
• Tap the event name. Open the application menu and tap Delete
Event, and then tap Delete to confirm. If this event is one of a series
of repeating events, tap the option to delete just this event or the
entire series.
• Contact meeting attendees: This opens an email message with the
participants’ addresses added to the To field. The default message text is
“Running late, on my way...”. You can edit the text before sending the
message.
• Dismiss: Close the notification.
• Snooze: The reminder reappears in five minutes.

View meeting participants
If you receive a meeting request, you can view the participants.

126

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

On your calendar, tap the meeting. The Participants field shows the
organizer name plus the number of participants.

Tap the number to see the participants’ names.

(Optional) Tap a participant’s name. If the participant is a contact, the
contact entry is displayed. If the participant is not a contact, tap Add
To Contacts to add the participant to your contacts list.

Event Reminders: Select to play a sound when a calendar notification
appears.
Default Event Duration The default event duration is set to one hour.
Tap to change this to 30 minutes or 2 hours.

Customize Calendar
1

Open Calendar

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Accounts: For all calendar accounts, tap an account to change login
settings or remove the account. You should change login settings only
if you have changed this information for the calendar account online—
the information you enter here must match the information in the
online account.

Add Account: Tap the account type and enter your username and
password for the online calendar account. Before you can set up an
account on your smartphone, you must already have an account
online with the provider.
Calendar View Options: Set the color for events created in that
account and show or hide that account in All Calendars view.
Default Calendar: If you create an event in All Calendars view, the
event is assigned to your default calendar. Tap to change the default
calendar.

Manually synchronize Calendar with your online accounts
3

Set the following options:
First Day of Week: Select the day that appears as the start of the
week in Week view and Month view.
Day Start and End: Tap to enter the default start and end times that
appear in Day view and Week view.
Default Event Reminder: Tap the time interval for a notification to
appear for timed and all-day events. Reminders you set for individual
events override the default setting.

If you want to get calendar events from an online account on your
smartphone immediately, or upload events from your smartphone to the
online account (if the account allows it), you can do a manual sync. This
synchronizes Calendar with all the accounts you have set up on your
smartphone, and it syncs all other apps associated with all online accounts
that you selected for synchronization.
1

Open Calendar

Open the application menu and tap Sync Now.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

127

Delete an online account from Calendar

Tap

Enter the list name in the List name field and press Enter

Create a task (see Create a task).

If you synchronize calendar events with an online account, deleting the
account from Calendar stops synchronization of calendar events only—if
you also sync contacts or email messages with that online account, those
continue to synchronize. Deleting the account from Calendar also deletes
any associated events from your smartphone only. The entries are not
deleted from the online account.
1

Open Calendar

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Under Accounts, tap the account name.

Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Calendar Account.

To restart synchronization with an account you have deleted from Calendar:
Open Accounts
, tap the account name, and tap Off beside Calendar to
turn synchronization on.

Create a task

Tasks
Create a task list
A task list is a group of related to-do items. All individual tasks you create
(see Create a task) must be placed in a task list.
1

128

Open Tasks

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Open Tasks

Tap the list you want to assign the task to.

Tap

Enter the task name in the Task name field. To set the task priority, see
Set task priority, due date, and other details.

Tap

Set any of the following:
Priority: High priority tasks appear in red. Normal priority tasks appear
in bold text, and low priority tasks appear in gray text.

TIP You can also use Just Type to create a task directly from the Launcher or Card
view. Start typing the task text and, under Quick Actions, tap New Task. The Tasks
application opens at a new task, with the text you entered in the body of the task.

List: Assign the task to a different list.
Due: Tap No due date, and tap a due date option. If you set a due
date, a notification appears at the bottom of the screen on the due
date. Tap the notification to open the task.

Set task priority, due date, and other details
1

Open Tasks

Tap the list containing the task.

to the right of the task name.

To enter a note about the task, tap the blank field at the bottom of the
screen and enter the note.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

129

Check off a task
1

Tap the list containing the task.

Tap the box to the left of the task name.

Tap a task list name to view tasks that are due today or overdue.

NOTE Tap Exchange to view task lists and tasks synchronized from your
Exchange account.

View tasks that are due today
1

Open Tasks
. The number to the right of the List all tasks field
shows the total number of tasks that are due today or are overdue. The
number to the right of each task list name shows the number of tasks
in that list that are due today or overdue.

Rename a task
1

On the task list, tap the task name.

Enter the new name and press Enter

Sort a task list
You can sort a task list to show tasks in the order you have determined, or
by due date or priority.

130

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Open Tasks

Tap the list you want to sort.

Tap My Order in the upper-right corner, and tap the sort option you
want: My Order, Due Date, or Priority.

To manually sort tasks, tap and hold a task, wait for the visual cue, and
then drag it to a new location in the list (see also Check off a task).

Open the application menu and tap Set Due Date For All.

Tap the month, date, and year, and then tap Set Due Date.

To remove a previously assigned due date, tap No Due Date.

Reorder your tasks

Mark all tasks in a list completed/incomplete

You can change the order of a task list or an individual task.

Open Tasks

• Tap and hold the list or task name, wait for the visual cue, and then drag
the item to another position.

Tap the list containing the tasks.

Open the application menu and tap Mark All and tap Mark All
Completed/Mark All Incomplete.

Set due dates for all tasks in a list
1

Open Tasks

Tap the list containing the tasks.

Hide or delete all completed tasks in a list
1

Open Tasks

Tap the list containing the tasks.

Open the application menu.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

131

Do one of the following:

• To hide completed tasks: Tap Hide Completed.

• Tap New Memo

• To delete completed tasks: Tap Delete Completed Tasks.

• Open the application menu and tap Add A Memo.
3

Delete a task or a task list
•

Throw the task or task list off the side of the screen and tap Delete to
confirm.

If you used the Data Transfer Assistant and imported notes from Outlook on
your desktop to your smartphone, those notes are in Memos. Your
Exchange notes, however, do not sync. All memos are backed up to your
Palm profile.

Enter the memo text. Memos are saved as you type.

TIP You can also use Just Type to create a memo directly from the Launcher or

Card view. Start typing the memo text and, under Quick Actions, tap More, and
then tap New Memo. The Memos application opens at a new memo, with the
text you entered in the body of the memo.

Find a memo
• In Memos, start typing any letters or numbers in the memo, and then tap
the memo when it appears.
NOTE The results of a Just Type search that you access in Card view or the
Launcher do not include memos.

Create a memo
Open Memos

See Enter and save information and Text selection gestures.

Memos

Do one of the following:

Edit a memo
1

Open Memos

Tap the memo you want to edit.

Tap the screen to position the cursor (see Text selection gestures), and
edit the memo text.
TIP To copy the whole memo: In the application menu, tap Edit > Select All, and

then tap Edit > Copy.

132

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Change the color of a memo

The subject, “Just a quick memo”, is automatically filled in. You can edit
the text before sending the message.

Color-code your memos to help you recognize memos of a certain type. For
example, make all of your grocery lists blue.
1

Open Memos

Tap the memo.

Tap the lower-right corner of the screen, and tap the new color.

Enter the email address.

Tap

Clock
The Clock application lets you set an alarm. You can set Clock to wake you
up at the same time wherever you are, for example, the recurring 7AM
alarm you set in San Francisco rings at 7AM in New York. However, use
Calendar to have your appointment times adjusted so that the notification
for a 9AM meeting in San Francisco will sound at noon when you’re in New
York (see Create an event).

Manage Clock

Delete a memo
1

In an open memo, open the application menu and tap Delete.

Tap Delete to confirm.

Open Clock

Open the application menu and tap Preferences.

Do any of the following:
• To set whether the alarm sounds when the ringer switch is off:
Under Alarm Sound, tap Ringer Switch Off and then tap Mute to
turn the sound off or Play Alarm to turn the sound on.
• To set whether an alarm gets louder as it rings: Next to Ascending
volume, tap Yes/No.

Email a memo

• To set how long you can snooze after an alarm goes off: Tap
Duration under Snooze and tap a time period.

• To change the clock display: Tap the current Theme. Then tap a
theme.

In an open memo, open the application menu and tap Email Memo.

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

133

Occurs: Tap to select the alarm frequency.

TIP To change the time: See Date & Time.

Time: Tap to set hour, minute, and AM/PM for the alarm.
Sound: Tap to open the list of ringtones, and then tap the name of a
ringtone. Tap
to preview it. If you have music on your smartphone,
you can select a song as your alarm sound (see Select a song as a
ringtone).

Set an alarm
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure ringtone volume is on and you can hear
it, and make sure the preference to play the alarm even when the ringer
switch is off is set to Play Alarm (see Manage Clock). That way you can
sleep through the night without being disturbed by phone calls, but your
alarm still wakes you up in the morning.
1

Open Clock

Tap the screen if

Tap

When an alarm sounds on your smartphone, tap Dismiss to stop it or
Snooze to have it sound again. The default snooze duration is 10 minutes,
but you can change this to 5 minutes or 20 minutes (see Manage Clock).

.
NOTE Alarms don't sound after you shut down your smartphone by pressing and
holding power and tapping Power > Shut Down.

is not visible.

, and then tap

Cancel an alarm
When an alarm is canceled, it remains in the Clock app, but it won’t sound
again until you turn it back on.
1

Open Clock

Tap

, and then tap On to switch the alarm from On to Off.

Change the alarm volume

Open Sounds & Ringtones

Set the following options:

Tap, hold, and drag the Ringtone Volume slider.

Alarm Preferences: Tap Off in the upper-right corner to switch the
alarm from Off to On. When the alarm is on, the alarm icon (a bell)
appears in the lower-right corner of the smartphone screen. Tap the
icon to see alarm details.

Delete an alarm

Name: Enter a name for the alarm.

134

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Open Clock

Tap

, and then tap the alarm name.

Tap

Facebook
The Facebook app allows you to update your status, view and respond to
friends’ comments, upload photos, and more.

Calculator

Install Facebook
Use Calculator for addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, and
also for determining percent and square root. You can enter numbers in
Calculator using either the onscreen keypad or the smartphone’s keyboard.

Perform calculations
1

Open Calculator

Enter numbers and perform calculations.

NOTE Press the space bar to access additional operations.

Calculator buttons

BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use Facebook on your smartphone, you must
already have a Facebook account.
This section describes the procedure for downloading and installing the free
Facebook app. Installing this app is different from setting up an online
account on your smartphone, which enables you to see your Facebook data
in Contacts and Calendar, and upload files from Photos and Videos (see Use
the Accounts application to set up an online account). We recommend that
you both install the free app and create the online account.
1

Open App Catalog

Type Facebook in the search field, and then tap

Tap Facebook.

Tap Download for free.

or press Enter

Table 2. Calculator buttons
Button

Description
Clear the current calculation or displayed number
Add the currently displayed number to memory

TIP After you download the Facebook app and sign in to your Facebook account,

you can update your status directly from the Launcher or Card view. Start typing
your status update and, under Quick Actions, tap More and then tap Update
Facebook Status. The Facebook app opens with your message in the update field.
Tap Update.

Display the memory
Clear the memory
Subtract the currently displayed number from memory

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

135

136

Chapter 8 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information

Photos, videos, and music
There’s no need to carry a separate media player; you
can play music and videos, and view photos, on your
HP Veer 4G. Listen to music through the built-in
speaker or through a 3.5mm headset or headphones
(sold separately). Take pictures and record videos and
then share them with your friends immediately,
directly from your smartphone.

In this chapter
138
138
143
146
147
150

Camera
Photos
Videos
YouTube
Music
Amazon MP3

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

137

Camera

The picture you took is automatically saved in JPG format. You can keep
snapping pictures, and then go to Photos to look at them and delete the
ones you don’t want.

Take a picture

DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone offers another way to “take a picture”: You

can save any currently displayed screen as a picture file (also known as a screen
capture or screenshot). To take a picture of the currently displayed screen, press
and hold Option + Sym + P. The picture is saved in PNG format to the Screen
captures album in Photos and is stored in the screencaptures folder of the USB
drive. You can work with it like any other picture.

Your smartphone comes with an easy-to-use, 5-megapixel camera. You can
use the camera to take pictures, and then use the Photos app to view them
and send them to your friends and family (see Share a picture). To add a
personal touch to your smartphone, use your pictures as your wallpaper
(see Save a picture as wallpaper) and as caller ID images (see Add a picture
to a contact).
1

Open Camera

Review pictures

After taking a picture, tap the thumbnail of the picture in the lower-left
corner of the screen. This opens the picture in the Photo roll of the
Photos application.

Swipe left or right on the screen to view other pictures you took.

Photos
Look at pictures
2
3

To take the picture in landscape view, turn your smartphone 90
degrees.
Slide out the keyboard and press Space
take the picture.

or tap

onscreen to

TIP Press and hold Space to take pictures in continuous burst mode. Release
Space to stop taking pictures. Continuous burst mode allows you to capture
several images with a single action.

138

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

To get pictures on the smartphone, you can do any of the following:
• Take a picture with your smartphone’s camera (see Take a picture).
• Copy pictures from your computer (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer).
• Receive pictures as email attachments (see Open email attachments).
• Receive pictures as part of a multimedia message (see Receive and view
text and multimedia messages).
• Copy a picture from a web page (see Copy a picture from a web page).

The following table shows you the photo formats that you can see on your
smartphone and the apps you can see them in.
Table 1. Photo formats viewable on HP webOS smartphones
Photo format

View in Photos

Download from
Email

BMP




(see Note)



GIF
JPG
PNG




Download from
MMS

Swipe left or right on the screen to look at other pictures in the album.

To find photos you took on your smartphone, connect your
smartphone and your computer using the USB cable and tap USB
Drive on your smartphone. On your computer, click the drive
representing your smartphone, click DCIM, and then click 100PALM.

Organize your pictures into albums


NOTE You can download and look at GIFs in Email, and they are saved to USB
storage, but you can't look at GIFs in Photos or use one as wallpaper.

You can also look at pictures on the web directly in the web browser (see
Web).
1

Open Photos

Tap the album containing the picture, and tap the thumbnail of the
picture. The Photo roll album contains pictures you took with your
smartphone’s camera.

The Photos app organizes the pictures you take or add to your smartphone
into predefined albums. The following table tells you where to find your
photos both in the Photos app and in your smartphone’s USB Drive storage.
Table 2. Photo locations
Origin of photos

Album in Photos

Folder in USB storage

Downloads

downloads

MMS

Messaging

Copied from computer

Miscellaneous

Root level of USB
storage

Camera on
smartphone

Photo roll

DCIM > 100PALM

Smartphone

Screen captures

screencaptures

Smartphone

Wallpapers

wallpapers

Copied from elsewhere [Folder created by you
in USB storage]

[Folder created by you
containing at least one
BMP, JPG, or PNG]

You can use any photo in any album in Photos as wallpaper (see Save a
picture as wallpaper). The photo does not have to be in the Wallpapers
album.
You can assign any pictures on your smartphone to one of these albums or
to an album you create. To create and assign pictures to albums, you must
put your smartphone into USB Drive mode. You then create the albums and
move pictures into them using your computer.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

139

TIP Besides using USB Drive mode to copy your photos, videos, and DRM-free

music from your computer to your smartphone, you can also use solutions
available from third-party software developers (sold separately) that facilitate the
transfer of media files to your smartphone. For more information, open the
browser on your computer and go to palm.com/sync-solutions.

• To delete an album: Connect your smartphone to your computer and
tap USB Drive. From your computer, open the drive representing your
smartphone and delete the folder representing the album.

Connect your smartphone and your computer using the USB cable.

On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. If prompted, tap OK. On your
computer, your smartphone appears as a removable drive.

Look at photos in a slideshow

On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard opens,
click Cancel to close the wizard.

You can view the photos in any album as a slideshow.

Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), and double-click the drive
representing your smartphone.

To create an album, use your computer’s controls for creating a new
folder. To be sure the Photos application can find the album, create it at
the root level of the drive representing your smartphone, not as a
subfolder of another folder.

Open Photos

Tap the album you want to view as a slideshow.

Do one of the following:
• To start with the first photo in the album: Open the application
menu and tap Play Slideshow.
• To select a different starting point: Tap the photo you want the
slideshow to start at and tap
.

Assign pictures to albums using your computer’s controls to copy or
move items. It is easiest to find the pictures you want by displaying
them as thumbnails.

End the connection safely. If you do not eject your smartphone safely,
your smartphone resets when you disconnect the USB cable:

Add a picture to a contact

• On a Windows computer, right-click the drive representing your
smartphone and click Eject.

TIP You can also add a picture to a contact in the Contacts application (see Add a

photo to a contact).

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

To exit the slideshow, tap a photo.

You can add a picture to a contact using the Photos application.

• On a Mac computer, from your desktop, drag the drive representing
your smartphone to the Trash. The Trash icon changes to Eject.

140

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and from the
smartphone when the USB Drive screen no longer appears on your
smartphone.

Tap a picture thumbnail to view it full-screen.

is not visible, tap the screen to display it.

• To capture the portion of the picture you want for the contact photo:
Tap and hold the picture, and then drag the portion you want to the
center of the onscreen box. This portion becomes the contact photo.
6

Tap Assign To Contact.

Save a picture as wallpaper
Wallpaper is the background screen that appears in Card view.

Tap

Enter the contact name and tap the contact.

(Optional) Do either or both of the following:

Tap a picture thumbnail to view it full-screen.

Tap

(Optional) To zoom in or out on a part of the picture, pinch out or in on
the picture.

is not visible, tap the screen to display it.
and tap Set wallpaper.

and tap Assign to contact.

If you have zoomed in on a picture, to capture the portion you want to
use as wallpaper, tap and hold the picture, and then drag the portion
you want to the center of the screen. This portion becomes the
wallpaper.
5

Tap Set Wallpaper.

Share a picture
You can send a picture to other picture-enabled devices or to an email
address as an attachment.

• To zoom out or in on a part of the picture: Pinch in or out on the
picture.

Tap a picture thumbnail to view it full-screen.

Tap

Create the email or multimedia message.

is not visible, tap the screen to display it.
and tap Share via email or Share via MMS.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

141

DID YOU KNOW? If you set up a Facebook account in the Photos application
and you leave “Use account with” Calendar and Contacts turned on when setting
up the account, your Facebook contacts and calendar events appear in the
Contacts and Calendar applications on your smartphone also. Likewise, if you set
up a Facebook account in Contacts, and you accept the default options while
setting up that account, the account is already set up to allow you to upload
pictures from Photos. See Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones
for information about the behavior of Facebook, Photobucket, and other online
accounts on your smartphone.

TIP You can also copy pictures from your smartphone to your computer (see
Copy files between your smartphone and your computer).

Upload a picture to the web
To upload a picture to a web service such as Facebook or Photobucket, you
must already have an account with the service. If you do not already have an
account, go to a service website (for example, facebook.com or
photobucket.com) and set up an account. You must then set up the account
on your smartphone. You can set up the account on your smartphone
during the upload process, as described in this procedure, or you can set it
up at any other time (see Set up an online pictures account on your
smartphone).
1

Tap a picture thumbnail to view it full-screen.

Tap

Do one of the following:

Open Photos

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap Add An Account, and tap the type of account you want to add.

Enter your account username and password and tap Sign In.

Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.

is not visible, tap the screen to display it.
and tap Upload.

• If your picture web service is already set up on your smartphone, tap
the name of the service you want to use.
• If your picture web service is not yet set up on your smartphone, tap
Add An Account and tap the account type. Enter your username
and password, tap Sign In, and then tap Create. After you set up
your account, return to the picture in full-screen view and repeat
steps 2 and 3.

Set up an online pictures account on your smartphone
To upload pictures to an account you have with a web service such as
Facebook or Photobucket, you must set up the account on your
smartphone.

142

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

Delete an online pictures account
1

Open Photos

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Photo Account.

Turn your smartphone to landscape view.

Slide out the keyboard and press Space
begin recording.

Press Space

(Optional) To watch a video when you finish recording: Tap the
thumbnail on the lower-left side of the screen >
.

Delete a picture
1

Tap a picture thumbnail to view it full-screen.

Tap

Tap Delete to confirm.

is not visible, tap the screen to display it.
.

To delete an album, see Delete files and folders using USB Drive mode.

or tap

onscreen to

to stop recording.

TIP In Camera, press the P key to switch the camera to video mode. Press the Q
key to return to still mode.

Videos
Edit videos you recorded
Record a video
Your smartphone has an easy-to-use video camera that lets you record
videos in VGA Resolution at 30FPS (frames per second) in MPEG-4, with
AAC audio. Background sound is recorded when you record a video.
1

Open Camera

Tap

You can create a shorter version of a video you recorded. The original
version is not affected. Your edited version is saved with the word “edit”
added to the video name. You can also rename videos and add descriptions
of them.
1

Open Videos

Tap Video roll, and tap the video date or title.

To rename the video, tap Title and enter a new name.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

143

To add a description, tap Description and enter the description.

Upload or share videos you recorded

To begin editing the video, tap

Open Videos

Turn your smartphone to landscape view.

Tap Video roll, and tap the video date or title.

The sequence of frames that make up the video is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. To shorten the video, tap, hold, and drag the
handles on either end of the video frame selector.

Tap

To make adjustments to the portion you selected for saving without
changing the length of the selected portion, tap and hold the middle of
the saved portion, and then move the whole frame selector left or
right.

and tap any of the following:

Share via email or Trim & share via email: If a video is above the
maximum size allowed for sending by email you can trim the video to
an appropriate size (see Edit videos you recorded).
Share via MMS or Trim & share via MMS: If a video is above the
maximum size allowed for sending by MMS you can trim the video to
an appropriate size (see Edit videos you recorded).
Upload: If your video web service is not yet set up on your
smartphone, tap Add An Account and tap the account type. Enter
your username and password and tap Sign In. Enter an account name,
tap On/Off to select other applications you want to synchronize this
account with, and then tap Create. After you sign in, return and repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Upload to [online account]: To rename the video, tap Title and enter
a new name. To add a description, tap Description and enter the
description. Tap Upload Video. The
icon indicates that the upload
is in progress. The
icon displays when the upload has finished.

Watch a video

1 Handle
2 Handle
3 Tap and hold here to move the frame selector

Tap

The edited copy of the video is saved in Video roll along with the original.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put videos on your smartphone, make
sure you have enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the file.
Open Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.
To get videos on your smartphone, you can do any of the following:
• Record a video (see Record a video).
• Copy videos from your computer (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer).

144

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

• Receive videos as email attachments (see Open email attachments).
• Receive videos as part of a multimedia message (see Receive and view
text and multimedia messages).

Use video playback controls
Tap the video to manually display or dismiss the playback controls.

You can view DRM-free videos that you receive as email attachments or
that you copy from your computer in the MPEG-4, H.263, H.264, MP4,
M4V, 3GP, 3GPP, 3G2, and 3GP2 formats. You can view videos sent to your
smartphone as MMS attachments in 3GP format. Videos play on your
smartphone in landscape orientation.
KEY TERM DRM-free: A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management.

DRM-free video files can be copied as many times as you like and can be played on
your Veer.

Use the YouTube application to view YouTube videos (see YouTube).
1

Open Videos

Table 3. Video playback controls
Control

Function
Play.
Pause.
Move forward or backward (tap and hold the slider, and then
drag it right to move forward or left to move backward).
Switch between full-screen view and the original size.

Use the volume button on the left side of your smartphone to control the
sound level.
TIP To skip ahead 30 seconds in a video, swipe left to right on the screen. To jump

back 10 seconds, swipe right to left.

Tap an album and tap the video you want to watch.

Delete a video
1

Open Videos

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

145

Tap the album containing the video.

Throw the video off the side of the screen, and tap Delete.

• To display videos you have recently viewed: Tap Videos and tap
History.
3

When the video you want appears, do one of the following:
• To view the video: Tap the video thumbnail.

YouTube

• To view video details: Tap the text to the right of the video
thumbnail.

Watch a YouTube video
The YouTube application on your smartphone lets you watch videos
available online at the YouTube website. Videos are displayed on your
smartphone in landscape orientation.
1

Open YouTube

Do one of the following:
• To search for a video: Enter a search term and then press Enter
or tap
.

DID YOU KNOW? Some videos can be viewed in YouTube on your computer
only. For those videos, you can view video details on your smartphone, but if you
try to play the video on your smartphone, an error message appears.

TIP You can also search for videos in YouTube directly from the Launcher or Card

view. Start typing a search term and, under Launch & Search, tap More, and then
tap YouTube. To use this search option, you must add YouTube to your list of Just
Type preferences (see Customize Just Type).

Use video playback controls
Playback controls automatically appear when you start a YouTube video.
They disappear after a few seconds. Tap the video to manually display or
dismiss the controls.
Table 4. Video playback controls
Control

Function
Play.
Pause.
Move forward or backward (tap and hold the slider, and then
drag it right to move forward or left to move backward).

• To display the most highly rated videos: Tap Videos and tap
Popular. (This is the default view.)
• To display the most frequently viewed videos: Tap Videos and tap
Most Viewed.

146

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

Switch between full-screen view and the original size.
Use the volume button on the left side of your smartphone to control the
sound level.

Find related videos

Get music onto your smartphone

Find videos from the same author or otherwise related to the one you
selected.

To get music onto your smartphone, you can do any of the following:

On the video details screen (see Watch a YouTube video), do one of the
following:
• To view videos from the same author: Tap More > More from This
Author.
• To view related videos: Tap More > Related Videos.

Share a video
Send a friend a link to a YouTube video.
1

On the video details screen (see Watch a YouTube video), tap Share.

Tap Email or Text Message.

Address and send the message.

Music

• Copy music files from your computer (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer). You can copy music files to any folder
on your smartphone’s USB drive. However, to make it easy to find and
manage files, consider creating a “Music” folder and copy files to there.
• Use solutions available from third-party software developers (sold
separately) that facilitate the transfer of music files to your smartphone.
For more information, open the browser on your computer and go to
palm.com/sync-solutions.
• Listen to music files received as email attachments (see Open email
attachments).
• Listen to music files received as part of a multimedia message (see
Receive and view text and multimedia messages).
• Buy music using the Amazon MP3 app (see Amazon MP3).
The following table lists music formats that you can play on your
smartphone:
Table 5. Music formats playable on HP webOS smartphones
File
format

Play in Music/Copy to
USB storage

Download from
Email

AAC










(see Note)
(see Note)
(see Note)

AAC+
You can add and listen to DRM-free music files on your smartphone. You
can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or
through headphones (sold separately). If you have speakers or a stereo
headset (both sold separately) that are equipped with Bluetooth® wireless
technology, you can also use them to listen to music. You can also listen to
streaming music from the web directly in the web browser (see Web).
KEY TERM DRM-free: A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management.

AMR
MP3TM
WAV

Download from
MMS

(see Note)

NOTE You can download and listen to MP3, WAV, and AMR files in Email, and
you can download and listen to MP3 files in Messaging. Files you download from
Email or Messaging are not saved to USB storage, and they are not listed in Music.

DRM-free music files can be copied as many times as you like and can be played
on your Veer.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

147

Listen to music

• To listen to all songs from an artist: Tap Artists and tap the artist
name. Tap the first song.

After you begin to play music, music continues to play if you switch to
another application, turn off the screen, or slide the ringer switch off. If a call
comes in, music pauses automatically and resumes when you hang up or
ignore the call.

• To listen to an album: Tap Albums and tap the album name. Tap the
first song.

If you put the Music app in the background while you work in another app, a
music notification icon appears at the bottom of the screen. Tap the icon to
display the music playback controls. You can use the controls even if the
screen is locked.

• To listen to all songs in a genre: Tap Genres and tap the genre name.
Tap the first song.
• To listen to playlists you synchronized to your smartphone: Tap
Playlists. Go to palm.com/sync-solutions for a list of third-party
solutions (sold separately) that you can use to sync music and
playlists from your computer to your smartphone.

• To end play: Close the Music app.

• To browse a music store to preview or purchase songs (if available):
Tap the music store name. Continue making selections until the song
you want appears. Tap the song name.

Add music files to your smartphone. See Get music onto your
smartphone.

Songs play in the order they are displayed onscreen. To listen to them
in random order: Tap Shuffle All.

Open Music

Do one of the following:

Use music playback controls
Use the volume button on the left side of your smartphone to control the
sound level.
Table 6. Music playback controls
Control

Function
Play.
Pause.
Rewind.
Fast forward.
Shuffle current playlist.

• To listen to all songs on your smartphone: Tap Songs. Tap the first
song.
• To listen to a specific song: Tap Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, or
Playlists to search that category. Continue making selections until
the song you want appears. Tap the song name.
148

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

Repeat. Tap once to repeat the current song. Tap again to repeat
the entire playlist.
Move forward or backward. Tap and hold the slider, and then
drag it right to move forward or left to move backward. To
display the slider, tap the text below the album art in Album Art
view.

DID YOU KNOW? If you stop playback of an audio file for which the Genre field

is defined as podcast, speech, spoken word, netcast, or audiobook, when you play
the item again, playback resumes at the point it was stopped.

Search for related songs or content
When you are listening to a song, you can search the web for related items
such as songs by the same artist or from the same album.
1

While listening to a song, open the application menu.

Return to Album Art view for the currently playing song from
anywhere in the Music app

Tap one of the web search options (such as Amazon MP3, if available,
or YouTube), and then tap the info you want.

You can move around the Music app while a song is playing. To return to
the Album Art view for the song that is currently playing from anywhere in
the Music app, tap Now Playing in the header at the top of the application.

Change the order of items in Playlist view
• In Playlist view (see Switch the Now Playing display), tap and hold a song
name. Drag the song to move it to a new location in the list.

Remove a song from Playlist view
• In Playlist view (see Switch the Now Playing display), throw the song
name off the side of the screen. This does not delete the song file from
your smartphone. It merely removes the song from the list of songs you
are currently listening to.

Delete a song
* Album Art view

To delete a song file from your smartphone, you must put your smartphone
in USB Drive mode and delete the song using your computer.

Switch the Now Playing display
You can switch the display to show the songs you are listening to by name
or by album cover art.
• While you are listening to a song, tap the header at the top of the current
view of the Music app to switch between Playlist view and Album Art
view.

Connect your smartphone and your computer using the USB cable.

On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. If prompted, tap OK. On your
computer, your smartphone appears as a removable drive.

On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard opens,
click Cancel to close the wizard.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

149

Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), and double-click the drive
representing your smartphone.

Search for a specific song, album, or artist
1

Open Amazon MP3

Delete the song using your computer’s controls.

Tap Search and enter the song, album, or artist name.

End the connection safely. If you do not eject your smartphone safely,
your smartphone resets when you disconnect the USB cable:

Press Enter

Do one of the following:

• On a Windows computer, right-click the drive representing your
smartphone and click Eject.

• On a Mac computer, drag the drive representing your smartphone
to the Trash. The Trash icon changes to Eject.
7

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen no longer appears on your smartphone.

Amazon MP3
Before you can download items using the Amazon MP3 application on your
smartphone, you must have an Amazon account, and you must read and
agree to the MP3 Music service terms and conditions.

• If the item you want appears on the screen, tap the song, album, or
artist name. Tapping the name of a song plays the preview; tapping
its price gives you the option to buy it (see Preview and buy a song).

MP3 files you buy from Amazon MP3 are DRM-free. After you buy and
download items from Amazon MP3, listen to them with your smartphone’s
Music application (see Get music onto your smartphone).

NOTE Music you download from Amazon MP3 is not backed up to your Palm
profile. To back up your music, you can copy downloaded files from the
AmazonMP3 folder on your smartphone’s USB drive to your computer (see Copy
files between your smartphone and your computer).

• If the item you want doesn’t appear, tap See all [total number of]
results at the bottom of the Artists, Albums, or Songs section.

Browse songs, albums, artists, or genres
1

Open Amazon MP3

Do any of the following:

• To view all songs in a certain genre: Tap

and tap the genre.

• To view the top 10 new and notable releases: Swipe left or right on
the New & Notable album thumbnails.
150

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

• To view the top 100 new releases: Tap New releases.

Search for (see Search for a specific song, album, or artist) or browse
to (see Browse songs, albums, artists, or genres) an album, and tap the
album name.

To preview a song, tap anywhere on the song entry except the price.

Do either of the following:

• To view the top 100 albums: Tap Albums.
• To view the top 100 artists: Tap Artists.
• To view the top 100 songs: Tap Songs.

View artist information
1

Search for (see Search for a specific song, album, or artist) or browse
to (see Browse songs, albums, artists, or genres) an artist.

Tap the artist name.

Tap the word in the lower-right corner of the page (Albums or Songs).

Tap to view any of the following:
Albums: To buy and download an album, tap the album price and tap
Buy. Tap anywhere else on the album entry to view detailed album
information.
Songs: To buy and download a song, tap the song price and tap Buy.
Tap anywhere else on the song entry to preview the song.

If you tap Buy, enter your email address and password, and tap Sign
In. To purchase songs without needing to enter your password each
time, turn on Enable 1-Click.

IMPORTANT When you are signed in to your Amazon MP3 account, your
credit card is charged for the price of an item as soon as you tap Buy.

• Tap the album price and tap Buy.
• Tap a song price and tap Buy.
4

Enter your email address and password, and tap Sign In. To purchase
songs without needing to enter your password each time, turn on
Enable 1-Click.

IMPORTANT When you are signed in to your Amazon MP3 account, your
credit card is charged for the price of an item as soon as you tap Buy.

Preview and buy a song
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you download a song to your smartphone,
make sure you have enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the file.
Open Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.
1

Search for (see Search for a specific song, album, or artist) or browse
to (see Browse songs, albums, artists, or genres) an album or artist
entry containing the song you want.

View album information and buy an album
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you download an album to your
smartphone, make sure you have enough storage space on your
smartphone to fit the files. Open Device Info
and look at the Available
field under Phone.

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

151

To preview a song, tap anywhere on the song entry except the price.

Tap the song price and tap Buy.

Enter your email address and password, and tap Sign In. To purchase
songs without needing to enter your password each time, turn on
Enable 1-Click.

IMPORTANT When you are signed in to your Amazon MP3 account, your
credit card is charged for the price of an item as soon as you tap Buy.

View and work with downloaded items
1

Open the application menu and tap Downloads. This displays items
that you are currently downloading or that you already downloaded.

To cancel a current download, tap

After you download an item, listen to it in the Music application (see Get
music onto your smartphone).

152

Chapter 9 : Photos, videos, and music

Web and wireless connections
With AT&T’s network and your HP Veer 4G
smartphone’s web browser, you can take the web with
you almost anywhere you go.
You can use your smartphone’s Wi-Fi feature to
connect to a public, work, or home network. The
Bluetooth® wireless technology on your Veer helps
you easily set up wireless connections to a number of
devices.

In this chapter
154
158
161
163
169
170
171
176
178

Wi-Fi
Palm mobile hotspot
VPN
Web
Location Services
Google Maps
AT&T Navigator
YPmobile
Bluetooth® wireless technology

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

153

Wi-Fi

Are there different kinds of Wi-Fi networks?
There are two types of Wi-Fi networks.

What is a Wi-Fi connection?
Many environments, such as corporate offices, coffee shops, airports, and
libraries, offer access to a Wi-Fi network, which is a wireless local area
network (WLAN). To access this WLAN, you connect your smartphone to
the WLAN through a Wi-Fi access point (also called a hotspot). When
you’re within range of an accessible Wi-Fi network, you can use your
smartphone’s Wi-Fi feature to connect to that network and access the web.
Your smartphone supports Wi-Fi connectivity based on the 802.11 standard
(802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n), with WPA, WPA2, WEP, and 802.1x
authentication.

Open networks: These networks broadcast their name (SSID) and do not
require you to enter a password or other settings. To learn how to connect
to an open network for the first time, see Connect to a new open network.
Secure networks: These networks may broadcast their name, but at the
very least, they require you to enter a password that you get from an
administrator (who may be, for example, the librarian or the person behind
the counter at the coffee shop). You may also have to get other network
settings from the system administrator. To learn how to connect to a secure
network for the first time, see Connect to a new secure network.
To connect to either type of network after the first time, see Connect to a
previously used network.

TIP Your Veer is itself a Wi-Fi access point. Use your smartphone to connect your
laptop to the Internet. See Palm mobile hotspot.

Turn Wi-Fi on/off
Why use a Wi-Fi connection?

Wi-Fi is turned on by default. Do one of the following to turn it off or on:
• Open Wi-Fi

A Wi-Fi connection is especially helpful in the following situations:
• You’re outside a coverage area and you want to access the web.
• Your AT&T service plan incurs additional charges for data services and
you want to minimize data service charges by using a Wi-Fi connection
instead.
• You want to maintain a web connection while talking on the smartphone.
• You’re inside a coverage area, but outside AT&T’s 3G or 4G coverage area.
(A Wi-Fi connection may provide faster throughput than a GPRS or EDGE
data connection.)

154

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

, and tap On or Off.

• From any screen: Open the connection menu in the upper-right corner of
the screen, tap Wi-Fi, and tap Turn on Wi-Fi or Turn off Wi-Fi.

• If the network you want is not displayed, tap Join network and
enter the network name. Make sure Open is displayed in the
Security field, and then tap Connect.
TIP You can also open Wi-Fi by opening the connection menu, tapping Wi-Fi,

and tapping Wi-Fi Preferences.

Connect to a new secure network
For an explanation of secure networks, see Are there different kinds of Wi-Fi
networks?

* Tap the icons in this corner, or drag your finger down across the icons.

If your smartphone finds the network you want, tap the network name to
connect to it. Otherwise, see Connect to a new open network and Connect
to a new secure network.

Open Wi-Fi

Make sure Wi-Fi is on (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).

Do one of the following:
• If the network you want is displayed, tap the network name, enter
your Username and/or Password, and tap Sign In. You’re done.
• If the network you want is not displayed, tap Join network and
enter the network name. Follow steps 4 to 7.

Connect to a new open network
For an explanation of open networks, see Are there different kinds of Wi-Fi
networks?
1

Open Wi-Fi

Make sure Wi-Fi is on (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).

Do one of the following:
• If the network you want is displayed, tap the network name.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

155

Tap the Security field, and then tap the network type: Open,
WPA-personal, WEP, or Enterprise.

Tap Connect.

A series of different screens appears depending on the network type.
Enter or select the following if you are prompted to do so:

To connect to a captive portal:
1

Tap
at the bottom of the screen and then tap the notification
Captive Portal Detected on WiFi.

If required, review the security certificate notices and tap one of the
following:

Username and/or Password

Trust Certificate: Connects you to the captive portal page
automatically whenever you connect to this Wi-Fi access point.

Certificate
7

Trust Certificate Once: Connects you to the captive portal page for
this session only. The next time you try to connect to this Wi-Fi access
point, you will be asked to trust this certificate again.

Tap Sign In.

Don’t Trust Certificate: Cancels the connection.

Connect to a previously used network
• If Wi-Fi is turned off, turn on Wi-Fi (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off). Your
smartphone automatically attempts to connect to a previously used
network, starting with the most recently used network.
• If you move to a new location and Wi-Fi is turned on, your smartphone
automatically attempts to connect to a previously used network if one is
discovered at the new location. If more than one previously used network
is discovered, the smartphone starts with the most recently used network.
• If you are connected to one network and want to use a different one, open
Wi-Fi
and open the application menu. Tap Stored Profiles and tap
another network name.

Connect to a captive portal
When connecting to some Wi-Fi access points, such as in a coffee shop, a
hotel, or an airport, the notification for a captive portal sometimes appears.
This means that to connect to this Wi-Fi access point, you must first go to a
special Internet page, known as a captive portal, before you can connect to
the Internet. A captive portal might be used by your Wi-Fi host for
authentication or for payment to access the Internet.

156

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Your Wi-Fi host may require you to view advertisements, pay a fee, or
accept conditions of use. Follow the instructions onscreen.

AT&T Wi-Fi Hot Spots
AT&T Wi-Fi service is available at access points called AT&T Hot Spots.

NOTE Requirements for using an AT&T Hot Spot may vary. Check with the
owner/operator of the AT&T Hot Spot location for specific information about
using their Wi-Fi service.

If you have an HP webOS smartphone, an active AT&T account in good
standing, and an appropriate data plan, you can access music, email, and the
web at over 20,000 AT&T Wi-Fi Hot Spot locations nationwide, including
the following:
•
•
•
•

Airports
Hotels
Universities
Convention centers

•
•
•
•

Put Wi-Fi to sleep when the screen is off

Sports centers
Starbucks locations
Restaurants
Bookstores

To find the nearest AT&T Wi-Fi Hot Spot: Open Web
, tap the AT&T
Hot Spots bookmark, and follow the onscreen instructions.

By default, your smartphone keeps its Wi-Fi connection active even when
the screen is dark. If, however, you find that a Wi-Fi connection is constantly,
unnecessarily waking up your smartphone, you can save battery power by
turning off this setting. When you turn the screen on again, the Wi-Fi
connection is reactivated.

AT&T is committed to enhancing your experience by providing powerful
broadband speeds. This allows for fast and easy downloads of your favorite
music, streaming videos, games, and more.

Open Wi-Fi

Open the application menu and tap Sleep Settings.

To connect to an AT&T Wi-Fi Hot Spot:

The current setting is displayed in the When Phone Sleeps field. To
change the setting, tap the current setting and then select the other
option from the displayed list.

Open Wi-Fi

Make sure Wi-Fi is on (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).

Tap attwifi in the list of available networks.

Customize connection settings
Do not change Wi-Fi settings unless you are having trouble connecting to a
network.

Disconnect from a network
When you disconnect from a network, you can keep it on your list of known
networks so that your smartphone can automatically connect to it again. If
you remove the network from your list of known networks, however, you
must reconnect to the network. Follow the steps in Connect to a new open
network or Connect to a new secure network to connect to the network
again.
• To disconnect from a network but keep it on your list of known networks:
Turn off Wi-Fi (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off). This disconnects you from the
network.
• To disconnect from a network and remove it from your list of known
networks: Open Wi-Fi
. Tap the network name, and then tap Forget
Network.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must be connected to the network you want to
customize (see Connect to a new open network, Connect to a new secure
network, or Connect to a previously used network).
1

Open Wi-Fi

Tap the network name.

In Automatic IP settings, tap On or Off.
• When Automatic IP settings is on, the IP address is automatically
and dynamically configured.
• When Automatic IP settings is off, you can manually configure the IP
address.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

157

If you turned Automatic IP settings off, enter any of the following:
Address: The IP address of the network
Subnet: The Subnet address of the network
Gateway: The Gateway address of the network
DNS Servers: Addresses (#1 and #2)

Tap Done.

Palm mobile hotspot
What is Palm mobile hotspot?
Quickly turn your HP webOS smartphone into a Wi-Fi hotspot for up to five
devices. Enjoy mobile Internet access for your laptop while on the go, and let
friends or co-workers connect at the same time. The app is simple to
configure and easy to use.

IMPORTANT The Palm mobile hotspot requires a fast data connection with
your wireless service provider's network and only works when you're within a
wireless coverage area. Additional data charges or monthly subscription fees may
apply. Please contact your wireless service provider regarding applicable charges
before using this application. Be aware that unless your data plan is unlimited you
may accumulate significant data charges using this application, especially when
roaming. While Palm mobile hotspot is active, other applications on your
smartphone continue to work, and any data sent or received counts against your
mobile hotspot data plan allowance (if applicable).

If you just want to browse the web on your smartphone, use the
smartphone’s browser (see Web).

158

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Palm mobile hotspot has a range of up to 170 feet (about 50 meters). The
actual range varies depending on environmental conditions, such as
obstructions and radio interference.
When using Palm mobile hotspot, your smartphone’s battery charge may
not last as long as usual. When possible, to improve battery performance,
you should charge your battery while using Palm mobile hotspot (see
Charge the battery).

Secure hotspots and open hotspots
We recommend that you set up your Palm mobile hotspot as a secure
hotspot (see Create a secure hotspot). That way, you can protect your
hotspot with a passphrase, and you can control who connects to the
Internet through your smartphone by controlling the distribution of your
passphrase.

Create a secure hotspot
1

Open Palm mobile hotspot

The first time you open Palm mobile hotspot, tap OK to continue.

Tap Off to switch Palm mobile hotspot from Off to On.

If you are connected to a Wi-Fi network, tap Continue to disconnect.

NOTE The smartphone must remain connected to your wireless service
provider's network, so don't use airplane mode to turn off Wi-Fi.

Do one of the following:

Create an open hotspot

• If this is your first time opening Palm mobile hotspot, enter a
passphrase and tap Done.

Open Palm mobile hotspot

The first time you open Palm mobile hotspot, tap OK to continue.

Tap Off to switch Palm mobile hotspot from Off to On.

If you are connected to a Wi-Fi network, tap Continue to disconnect.

NOTE The smartphone must remain connected to your wireless service
provider's network, so don't use airplane mode to turn off Wi-Fi.

Do one of the following:
• If this is your first time opening Palm mobile hotspot, tap Create
Open Network.

• If you have an open hotspot set up already, tap Open and tap WPA/
WPA2 Personal. Enter a passphrase and tap Done.
6

A message may be displayed if your data plan does not include Palm
mobile hotspot. Tap Dismiss to continue.

NOTE If your data plan does not include Palm mobile hotspot, you cannot access
the Internet from devices that use your webOS smartphone as a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Contact your wireless service provider to have your data plan enabled for Palm
mobile hotspot.

(Optional) To customize the name of your hotspot, tap the name in
Network Info, enter a new name, and tap Done.

After you create the hotspot, go to the device you want to connect to
the Internet (for example, your laptop) and use its Wi-Fi connection
settings to connect to your Palm mobile hotspot. When prompted,
enter the passphrase you created when setting up the secure hotspot
on your smartphone. After the connection is made, you can browse
the web on your laptop.

• If you have a secure hotspot set up already, tap WPA/WPA2
Personal, and tap Open.
6

A message may be displayed if your data plan does not include Palm
mobile hotspot. Tap Dismiss to continue.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

159

4
NOTE If your data plan does not include Palm mobile hotspot, you cannot access
the Internet from devices that use your webOS smartphone as a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Contact your wireless service provider to have your data plan enabled for Palm
mobile hotspot.

When you finish using your smartphone as a mobile hotspot, turn off
Palm mobile hotspot to save battery power.
TIP You can extend your battery time by charging your battery (see Charge the

battery) while you are using Palm mobile hotspot.

(Optional) To customize the name of your hotspot, tap the name in
Network Info, enter a new name, and tap Done.

After you create the hotspot, go to the device you want to connect to
the Internet (for example, your laptop) and use its Wi-Fi connection
settings to connect to your Palm mobile hotspot. After the connection
is made, you can browse the web on your laptop.

Use Palm mobile hotspot
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
• Create a secure (see Create a secure hotspot) or open (see Create an
open hotspot) hotspot.

Change your secure passphrase
1

Open Palm mobile hotspot

Tap Change Passphrase.

Enter the new passphrase and tap Done.

View information about connected devices
1

Open Palm mobile hotspot

In Connected Devices, tap a device.

• Make sure you are connected to the AT&T network.
1

Open Palm mobile hotspot

Tap Off to switch Palm mobile hotspot from Off to On.

The following information is displayed:
Name: The name of the connected device
The
icon appears at the bottom of the screen when the mobile
hotspot is turned on.
If you are connected to a Wi-Fi network, your smartphone
automatically disconnects from that network.
3

160

Connect other devices to the hotspot (such as a laptop). Any devices
enabled with Wi-Fi that are in range of your smartphone can connect
to an open hotspot. To connect a device to a secure hotspot it must
also have the passphrase. If you already set up a device to connect to
your secure hotspot, that device remembers the passphrase and
connects automatically to Palm mobile hotspot.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Type: The type of connection between the device and your
smartphone
Mac Address: A unique address associated with the device
Assigned IP: The IP address of the connected device

VPN
What is VPN?
If you want to use your smartphone to access files on your company’s
servers, you may need to set up a VPN (virtual private network). You can do
this using the VPN application. VPN enables you to log in to your corporate
server through the company’s firewall (security layer). You need to set up a
VPN to access a corporate server in any of the following situations:
• Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is outside the firewall.
• Your company’s wireless LAN is inside the firewall, but you are accessing
the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location
or at home).

• Dead peer detection setting: When selected, if no VPN traffic is received
for five minutes, the client checks to see if the VPN server is still available.
• Encryption method: Secure, Weak, None: Secure forces the client to use
more secure AES or 3DES algorithms. Weak allows the weaker 1DES
algorithm. Strong encryption may still be used, depending on what the
VPN server decides. None enables no encryption. Encryption is not
disabled and may still be used, depending on the VPN server. With the
None option, the VPN profile is simply allowed to use no encryption.
• NAT traversal method: Cisco-UDP, NAT-T (always), NAT-T (auto-detect),
or Disabled.
1

Open VPN

Tap Add Profile.

If VPNC is not selected already in the Connection Type field, tap the
Connection Type field, and tap VPNC.

Tap Enter server name and enter the server name.

Tap Next.

Enter the information you got from your system administrator.

Tap Connect.

Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required
for accessing the corporate network.
TIP Being connected to VPN may sometimes interfere with web browsing. If you
are having problems browsing in Web, disconnect VPN (see Disconnect from a
profile) and then try using Web again.

Add a VPNC VPN profile
VPNC is a Cisco-compatible IPSEC client.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get the following information from your system
administrator:
• Profile name.
• VPN server.
• Username and password.
• Group ID.
• Group secret.
• Domain.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

161

If required, enter your security token or other password, and tap Done.

Tap Next.

Tap Continue to acknowledge that you are accessing a private
network.

If required, tap Agree to accept the Cisco license agreement. Tap
to view the full agreement.

Enter your login information, and tap Connect.

If required, enter your security token or other password, and tap Done.

Tap Continue to acknowledge that you are accessing a private
network.

Add a Cisco AnyConnect VPN profile
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get the following information from your system
administrator:
• VPN server name
• Username and password
• Security token or other password

Connect to a profile

Open VPN

Do one of the following:

Tap Add Profile.

Tap the Connection Type field, and tap Cisco AnyConnect.

• Open VPN
, and tap a profile.
• From any screen, open the connection menu, tap VPN, and tap a profile.

View statistics for a connected profile
1

Open VPN

Tap

beside a connected profile.

Disconnect from a profile
Do one of the following:

162

Tap Enter server name and enter the server name.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

• Open VPN
, and tap a connected profile.
• From any screen, open the connection menu, tap VPN, and tap a
connected profile.

Edit a profile
1

• In the Launcher or Card view, type the site address (for example,
palm.com), and tap Go to website.

Do one of the following:
• Open VPN

Do one of the following:

• From any screen, open the connection menu and tap VPN, and then
tap VPN Preferences.
2

Tap

beside the profile you want to edit.

Edit your profile settings.

Tap Done.

Delete a profile
1

Open VPN

Do one of the following:

• Open Web
and enter the site address. If the page appears in the
list of viewed pages, tap it to go there again. If not, press Enter
.

• Throw the profile off the side of the screen and tap Delete.
• Tap

When entering a website address (URL), you don’t need to enter
“http://www.”

beside the profile you want to delete and tap Delete profile.

Web
Go to a website
The web browser on your smartphone is capable of displaying most web
content, including Flash plug-ins. The browser features the latest web
standard technologies such as HTML 4.01, CSS 2.1, Ajax, and JavaScript. It
does not support Java applets.

DID YOU KNOW? If you browse to a secure web page, the lock icon in the
address line appears closed.

To cancel a page while it is loading, tap

Search for a website
Do one of the following:
• In the Launcher or Card view, type the search term, and then tap a search
engine (for example, Google).

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

163

• Open Web

, enter the search term, and press Enter

Enter the address or search term for the second instance of the
browser.

To move between the two pages, tap the center of the gesture area to
display Card view. The web pages are displayed in a stack. Tap the one
you want.

Navigate a web page
Table 1. Web page navigation

Add a web search engine
When you browse to some websites that use search functionality, such as
dictionary.com, you may see the notification Web Search Engine Available.
This means that you can add this website to the list of search engines your
smartphone uses when you use Just Type to enter a search term while in the
Launcher or Card view.
1
2

Tap
at the bottom of the screen and then tap the Tap to add as
Search Engine notification.
Tap the website name listed in the Recently Visited section in the Just
Type preferences to add this website as a search option in Just Type.

Open another browser
If you are looking at one web page and need to check something on a
different one, simply open another browser.
1

164

Open the application menu and tap New card.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

To do this...

Do the following...

Move back through
previously viewed
pages

Tap
or make the back gesture from right to left
anywhere in the gesture area.

Move forward
through previously
viewed pages

Tap
or make the forward gesture from left to
right anywhere in the gesture area.

Refresh

Tap

Scroll

Drag or flick up/down on the screen.

View in landscape

Turn the smartphone on its side. When the display is
in landscape orientation, flick up/down on either the
screen or the gesture area to scroll.

Zoom in/out

Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen. Pinch in to
decrease the size of items onscreen.

Zoom in on a
column

Double-tap the column to center it and enlarge it.
Double-tap again to zoom out to see the whole
page again.

Pan

Tap, hold, and drag the page.

Enter information
in a form

Tap the form field. Enter or select information and
press Enter
.

Share a web
address as a link in
an email message

Open the application menu, tap Page, and tap
Share. Create the email message.

Table 1. Web page navigation

Flash on your smartphone does not support the following:

To do this...

Do the following...

Display the address
bar

Start typing a search term or web address, or scroll
to the top of the page. If the page title is displayed,
tap it to view or edit the URL.

Save a photo to
Photos

Press and hold Option
Copy to Photos.

and tap the photo. Tap

• Games that require arrow keys as controls. The smartphone keyboard has
no arrow keys, so unless a game enables the remapping of keys, you
cannot play that game on your smartphone.
• Hover states on Flash content.
• Some video streaming methods.

Add a web page to the Launcher
Use Flash content
When you open a web page, Flash content on the page appears with a play
button on a black background. Do either of the following:
• To play the Flash content at its current size: Tap
.
• To play and zoom in on the Flash content: Double-tap it.

Add any web pages you visit frequently to the Launcher so you can access
them in a few taps.
1

Open the page you want to add to the Launcher.

Open the application menu, tap Page, and tap Add To Launcher.

Do any of the following:

Keep the following in mind:
• When you see
in the lower-right corner of the screen, you know you’re
working with Flash content and not the web page.
• To use playback controls with Flash content and interact with other active
areas: Tap the Flash content.
• You cannot zoom in/out while working with Flash content.
• To stop working with Flash content and return to the web page: Tap
.
The ability to use Flash content is turned on by default. To turn it off: Open
the application menu and tap Preferences. In Enable Flash Content, tap
On to switch it from On to Off.
To have Flash content begin playing as soon as you open a website, without
your tapping the play button: Open the application menu and tap
Preferences. In Autoload Flash Content, tap Off to switch it from Off to
On.

Icon: Tap the currently displayed page icon thumbnail. Then tap, hold,
and drag the web page to use a different portion of the page as the
Launcher icon. You can zoom in on or out from the page while
selecting the portion you want to use. The portion that appears in the
white square is used as the icon. Tap Done.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

165

Title: Tap to edit. See Text selection gestures for useful gestures if you
want to edit the page title.

Title: Tap to edit. See Text selection gestures for useful gestures if you
want to edit the bookmark title.

URL: Enter or edit the URL for the page. For example, change the URL
to the home page of a site instead of a drill-down page within the site.

URL: Enter or edit the URL for the bookmark. For example, change the
URL to the home page of a site instead of a drill-down page within the
site.

Tap Add To Launcher.
4

The page now appears as an icon in the Launcher. Tap the icon to open the
page. To delete the page from the Launcher, see Delete applications.

The first 12 bookmarks you create become thumbnails on the start page of
the Web app.

Create a bookmark
1

Open the page you want to bookmark.

Open the application menu and tap Add Bookmark.

Tap Add Bookmark.

NOTE Web bookmarks are part of the data backed up to your Palm profile. After
a partial or full erase, a bookmark is restored with a generic thumbnail icon. After
you revisit the page for which you created the bookmark, the original thumbnail
icon is restored.

Open a bookmarked page
Do one of the following:
• In Launcher or Card view, type a few characters of the bookmark title, and
then tap Bookmarks & History. Scroll to find the bookmark you want,
and tap to open it.
• From the start page when you open the Web app: Tap a thumbnail.
• To open a bookmark if it’s not on the start page, or after you navigate
away from the start page: Open the application menu and tap
Bookmarks. Then tap a bookmark.
3

Do any of the following:
Icon: Tap the currently displayed bookmark icon. Then tap, hold, and
drag the web page to use a different portion of the page as the
bookmark icon. You can zoom in on or out from the page while
selecting the portion you want to use. The portion that appears in the
white square is used as the icon. Tap Done.

166

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Edit, reorder, or delete a bookmark
1

Open Web

Open the application menu and tap Bookmarks.

• Open Web
, open the application menu, and then tap History. Scroll
to the page name and tap the page.

Do one of the following:

• Open Web
and enter a term or address in the address bar that
matches the page name or address.
• To clear your browsing history: Open Web
, open the application
menu, tap Preferences, and then tap Clear History.

• To edit: Tap
to the right of the bookmark name. Change the icon
(see Create a bookmark), title, or URL and tap Save Bookmark.
• To reorder: Tap, hold, wait for the visual cue, and then drag the
bookmark.
• To delete: Throw the bookmark off the side of the screen and tap
Delete.

Use links on a web page
Table 2. Use links on a web page

Return to previously viewed web pages

To do this...

Do the following...
Tap the link.

Do one of the following:

Go to another
page
Dial a phone
number

Tap the link to display the dial pad with the number
entered, and tap
.

Open a link in
another browser

Press and hold Option
Open In New Card.

and tap the link. Tap

Copy the URL

Press and hold Option
Copy URL.

and tap the link. Tap

• In Launcher or Card view, type a few characters of a keyword relating to
the page you are looking for, and then tap Bookmarks & History. Scroll
to find the page you want, and tap to open it.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

167

Customize web browser settings

Table 2. Use links on a web page
To do this...

Do the following...

Share via email

Press and hold Option
Share Link.

and tap the link. Tap

Press and hold Option
Share Image.

and tap the photo. Tap

Share a photo via
email

Open Web

Open the application menu and tap Preferences.

Set any of the following:

Copy a picture from a web page
Pictures you copy from the web are stored in the Miscellaneous album in
Photos.
1

Press and hold Option

Tap Copy to Photos.

Tap OK.

and tap the picture.

Download files from the web

Default Web Search Engine: Select your default search engine.

Open Web

Block Popups: Prevents websites from opening up new browser
windows. Tap Yes to switch Block Popups from Yes to No.

Go to the web page with the file you want to download.

Tap the file name.

If an app on your smartphone supports the file type, the file name
appears at the bottom of the screen. Tap to open the file.

All files are downloaded to the smartphone’s USB storage. If an app on
your smartphone supports the file type, you can also find the file in that
app. For example, if it’s a PDF file, find it in PDF View, and if it’s an MP3
file, find it in Music.

168

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Accept Cookies: Allows cookies from any website you view, even if
you are redirected to a site from another site. Tap Yes to switch Accept
Cookies from Yes to No.
JavaScript: Tap On to switch JavaScript from On to Off. Turning off
JavaScript may prevent some websites from functioning properly.
Enable Flash Content: Tap On to switch it from On to Off. Turning off
Flash Content prevents Flash content from displaying.
Autoload Flash Content: Enables Flash content to begin playing as
soon as you open a website. Tap Off to switch it from Off to On.

Clear History: Tap to delete your browsing history.
Clear Cookies: Tap to delete cookies used by some websites to
remember visiting history and user settings.
Clear Cache: Tap to delete any web page content that has been
stored in the local cache. This ensures that you are viewing the most
current content when you visit a web page.

Location Services
The Location Services application allows you to control the sending of
information about your location to websites and applications that request it.

Manage location information passed to websites
A website might request your current location so it can provide you with
information that is relevant to where you are. For example, a weather site
might require your location so it can let you know the weather forecast for
your area.
1

Open Location Services

If required, tap Turn On GPS.

You can set Location Services to always ask your permission to send
your location to a website when the site requests this information, or
you can set it to never share your location with any website. The
current setting is displayed in the For Websites field. To change the
setting, tap the current setting and then select the other option from
the displayed list.

To clear all location data currently in use by websites, tap Clear My
Location Data, and then tap Clear.

Manage location information passed to applications
An application might request your current location so it can provide you
with information that is relevant to where you are. For example, Google
Maps might use your current location to provide driving directions to a
destination.
1

Open Location Services

If required, tap Turn On GPS.

Select one of the following in the For Applications field:
Auto Locate: Applications can automatically identify your location.
Always Ask: Applications display a request to identify your location.
You choose whether to allow this for the current session only.

Select On or Off for any of the following:
Geotag Photos: Available only when Auto Locate is selected. When
Geotag Photos is on, photos are tagged with the latitude and longitude
of the location in which they were taken.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

169

very accurate for turn-by-turn directions and for pinpointing your
location when you are outside and have a clear view of the sky.

DID YOU KNOW? The geotag data is stored as an Exif tag in the photo file. A

common use of the geotag data is in online photo services like Photobucket and
desktop apps like Google Earth, which use the data to position the photo as a
thumbnail on a map.

To turn Google Services on/off, open the application menu, tap Locate
Me Using, and tap Google Services.
Google Services uses cellular radio towers and Wi-Fi access points to
approximate your location. This technology is very fast to acquire a
location fix, but it is not as accurate as GPS. Certain applications, such
as turn-by-turn navigation solutions, require GPS to be activated in
order to work properly.

Background Data Collection: Available only when Google Services is
on (see Turn location service providers on/off). When Background Data
Collection is on, anonymous location data is collected from your
smartphone. This data is used to improve the quality of location
services.

The first time you turn on Google Services you may be asked to review
and accept the terms of use, and decide whether to allow anonymous
data collection. Do the following:
• Review the terms of use.
• If you decide not to allow anonymous data collection, tap the
checkmark to remove it.
• Tap Agree or Don’t Agree.

Google Maps

Turn location service providers on/off
Location Services provides access to two location service providers—GPS
and Google Services. At least one of these must be turned on for Location
Services to be enabled. Both of them can be turned on at the same time.
1

Open Location Services

To turn GPS on/off, open the application menu, tap Locate Me Using,
and tap GPS.
GPS, which is turned on by default, is a radio technology that uses
line-of-sight communication with satellites orbiting the earth. GPS is

170

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Google Maps cannot determine your location and therefore cannot work
properly unless a location service is turned on (see Turn location service
providers on/off).
1

Open Google Maps

Tap Menu in the lower-right corner.

In Google Maps, use these icons to do the following:

AT&T Navigator
You can use AT&T Navigator to get directions, search for an address, view
maps and traffic conditions, share your location, and much more.

Sign up for AT&T Navigator
The first time you open AT&T Navigator, you are offered the opportunity to
either subscribe now to the service and pay a monthly fee or pay for a
one-day pass to use the service. First, review the license agreement and tap
Accept to continue. To subscribe to the monthly service, tap Get Your 1st
30 Days Free. To choose the one-day pass option, tap Try A Day Pass For
[amount].
Table 3. Google Maps icons
Icon

Description

NOTE When you agree to buy AT&T Navigator, the charge is added to your
AT&T wireless bill.

Search Map: Search for a location or service.
Get Directions: Get directions.
Map: In Satellite view, tap to return to Map view.
Satellite: View a satellite photo of the map area.
Traffic: View local traffic conditions.
Clear Map: Clear the current map.

Get directions
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Help & Terms: Get help.
Close Menu: Close the Google Maps menu.

TIP You can search for a location in Google Maps directly from the Launcher or
Card view. Start typing the address or location name and, under Launch &
Search, tap Google Maps. If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location
Services. The Google Maps application opens with the closest match to your
search term displayed in the map header. Tap the header to get directions to that
location, or tap Results to see other locations that match your search term.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

171

Tap Drive To.

Find a location
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Search.

Enter a search term. For example, enter “Cinema” to get a list of
cinemas near you.

(Optional) Tap Current Location to change the location of your
search.

(Optional) Tap All Categories in the Category field to narrow your
search by service category. For example, you might want to search for
gas stations, banks, or hospitals in an area.

Tap one of the following:

Tap one of the following:
My Favorites: Select a destination from your favorites. To add a
favorite, tap
, and choose the location you want to add from
Current Location, Recent Places, Address, Business, Airport, or
Contacts.
Recent Places: Select a destination from a list of places you have
visited recently.
Address: Enter a destination address and tap Submit.
Business: Search for a business.
Airport: Select or search for an airport.
Contacts: Select a contact’s address.

Search: A list of search results is displayed.
Call It In: Tap
search.

172

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

and follow the voice prompts to perform your

View maps and traffic conditions

Share an address

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Maps & Traffic.

You can send an address and directions to that address by text message.
Recipients who have AT&T Navigator installed receive a message telling
them to go to Favorites in AT&T Navigator. Recipients who do not have
AT&T Navigator installed receive a message containing the address and a
link to directions.

Tap any of the following:
Table 4. AT&T Navigator map icons
Icon

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More.

Tap Share Address.

The first time you use Share Address, you are asked to enter your
name and email address. Tap OK to enter your name and email
address, and then tap Continue. Tap Don’t ask me again if you do
not want to enter your name and email address, and you do not want
to be asked this question again.

Tap the Recipients field.

In the To field, do one of the following to address the message:
• Enter a contact name, initials, or phone number. Tap the phone
number when it appears.

Description
Zoom in.
Zoom out
View local traffic conditions.
See your current location.
Get a 3D view of the map.

• Tap

to open the full contact list. Tap the contact you want.

Tap Done.

Tap the Address field to select the address you want to share. Your
current location is the default selection.

Tap Send Now.

Return to the 2D view of the map.
Select a new map location.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

173

Add a location to Favorites

If you saved the location to a category, tap the category name, and
then tap the location.

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More.

Tap My Stuff, and then tap My Favorites.

• To see the location on a map: Tap Map. Pinch out to zoom in.

Tap

• To share the location by text message: Tap More, and then tap
Share.

and search for the address you want to add as a favorite.

• To move the location to a new favorites category, or to change the
label: Tap Edit.

You can mark a location, such as a parked car or a meeting place, so you can
easily get back to it.
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More, and then tap Record Location.

(Optional) Do any of the following:

• To create a new favorites category for this location: Tap Category.
Tap New Category, enter the category name, and tap Done.
• To add this location to an existing favorites category: Tap Category,
tap the box to the left of the category name, and tap Done.
• To change the label for this location: Tap Label, and enter a new
label. For example, you might want to add a label like “Car in
Sunnyvale.”
5

Tap Save, and tap OK.

To return to this location:
1

Do any of the following:
• To get driving directions to the location: Tap Drive To.

Record a location

174

Tap the location.

Tap Share & More, tap My Stuff, and then tap My Favorites.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Check the weather forecast
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More.

Tap Weather.

(Optional) Tap Change Location to browse to the weather forecast
for a different location.

Set up commute alerts
Get traffic reports for a route you travel frequently.
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More.

Tap My Stuff, and then tap Commute Alerts.

Tap Share & More, and then tap About.

Tap My Account Info.
TIP By default your PIN is the last four digits of your mobile phone number.

Customize AT&T Navigator

Enter the following information:

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Open the application menu and tap Preferences. Tap any of the
following:

Route Name: Enter a name for the route.
Origin: Tap to select a point of origin other than your current location.
Destination: Tap to select your destination.
Time: Set the time of day when you travel this route.
Frequency: Tap to select your travel frequency on this route.
Notification: Tap to select how you want to receive notifications, and
tap OK.
6

Tap Submit.
Route Style: Select your default route type, for example, Shortest,
Prefer Highway, or Ask me each trip. Fastest is the default setting.

What’s my AT&T Navigator PIN?
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Moving Maps: Select whether you want maps to display in 3D or 2D.
Audio: Select Full Audio, Instructions Only, or No Audio.
Backlight: Set the screen to remain on while you are using AT&T
Navigator, to turn off according to the smartphone setting, or to

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

175

remain on only at turns. To learn how to change the screen setting for
your smartphone, see Set the interval for turning the screen off
automatically.
Traffic Alerts: Turn traffic alerts on/off.
Map Colors: Set the map color to switch from night to day
automatically, or set the map to always show night or day colors.
Distance Units: Select units of measurement for distance.
Avoid: Select things you’d like to avoid when planning a route, for
example, HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes, tolls, or traffic delays.
Account: Enter or edit your name and email address.

Get more help or cancel your AT&T Navigator subscription
You can contact customer support or cancel your AT&T Navigator
subscription from the AT&T Navigator app.

If you contact AT&T Navigator customer support, you may be asked to
provide some diagnostic information.
1

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Share & More, and then tap Diagnostic Tools.

YPmobile
You can use YPmobile to find, get information about, and get directions to
businesses in your area. Businesses and services that are in the YPmobile
app database are returned in your search results.

Find a business

Open AT&T Navigator

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Open YPmobile

Tap Share & More, and then tap About.

If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services.

Tap Support Info and do any of the following:

Do one of the following:

• To call customer support: Tap Customer Support and tap

• To cancel your subscription: Tap Cancel Subscription and follow
the onscreen instructions.

176

View AT&T Navigator diagnostic information

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

• Enter a search term and tap Find.
• Tap the search field and tap a service category.
• Open the application menu and tap Browse. In Popular
Businesses, scroll left or right through a list of businesses. Tap a
company name to find the branch nearest to your current location
based on the information available to the YPmobile app.

Alternatively, browse through service categories in Popular
Categories.

Create a calendar event at a location
You can add a business location to your calendar as an event reminder. For
example, if you have an appointment to meet a friend at a restaurant, you
can find the restaurant location in YPmobile and add the event to your
calendar from there. The event is stored in the Calendar application, and you
can set an event reminder from there (see Add an alarm to an event).

Find a local business (see Find a business).

Tap the business name and address to see more details.

On the business details page, tap

(Optional) Enter an event description in the Label field.

Enter the start date and time and the end date and time.

Tap Add To Calendar.

The first result displayed is the business or branch closest to your
current location. Tap
or
to scroll forward or back through the
search results. Tap
to see the search results in a list. Tap
to
return to map view. Tap
to return to your current location on the
map.

Add a local business to your contacts

Tap a business name and address to see more details.

You can add a service provider as a contact in the Contacts app.

(Optional) Do any of the following:
• To phone the business: Tap the phone number and tap

• To see the business location on a map: Tap Show Map.
• To read reviews about the business: Tap Read Reviews.
• To visit the company’s website: Tap Visit Website.
• To get directions in AT&T Navigator: Tap Navigate To.
• To get directions in text: Tap Driving Directions. Tap Reverse to
see the route in reverse.

Find a local business (see Find a business).

Tap the business name and address to see more details.

On the business details page, tap

Enter a name for the contact and tap Done.

Add a local business to your favorites
1

Find a local business (see Find a business).

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

177

Tap the business name and address to see more details.

Make a pairing request to another device

On the business details page, tap

Tap OK.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN The other device must be discoverable in order to
appear on your smartphone’s Devices list. Check the documentation that
came with the other device for information on making it discoverable.

To view your favorites, open the application menu and tap Favorites.

Bluetooth® wireless technology

You can make a pairing request to a Bluetooth audio device such as a
headset, car kit, or A2DP (stereo Bluetooth) device.
1

Open Bluetooth

TIP You can also open the Bluetooth app by opening the connection menu,

tapping Bluetooth, and tapping Bluetooth Preferences.

What is Bluetooth® wireless technology?
With the Bluetooth® wireless technology on your smartphone, you can
connect to a number of Bluetooth devices, including a hands-free device
such as a headset or car kit (see Set up and use a Bluetooth® hands-free
device).

Make sure Bluetooth is on (see Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off).

Tap Add device.

Tap the Type field, and tap Audio, Keyboard, or Other to filter the list
of discoverable Bluetooth devices.

Tap a device name.

Before you can connect to another Bluetooth device, you need to pair with
that device. You can either make the pairing request from your smartphone
(see Make a pairing request to another device), or accept a pairing request
from the other device (see Accept a pairing request from another device).

Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off
Do one of the following:
• Open Bluetooth
, and tap On or Off.
• From any screen: Open the connection menu, tap Bluetooth, and tap
Turn on Bluetooth or Turn off Bluetooth.

178

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

If a passkey is not required, pairing is complete when the Devices list
appears. If a passkey is required, do one of the following.

• The screen displays a passkey generated by your smartphone: Enter
the displayed passkey on the other device.

• An automatically generated passkey appears on the passkey screen:
Check the other device screen to verify that the passkey is correct,
and tap Yes, connect to connect.

• The screen prompts you to enter a passkey: Check the
documentation that came with the other device to see if there’s a
required passkey. If so, enter that passkey on your smartphone. If
not, make up a passkey and enter it on both devices.

• The screen displays a passkey generated by your smartphone: Enter
the displayed passkey on the other device.
• The screen prompts you to enter a passkey: Check the
documentation that came with the other device to see if there’s a
required passkey. If so, enter that passkey on your smartphone. If
not, make up a passkey and enter it on both devices.
7

If you are pairing with a car kit that supports Contacts access, you are
asked if you want to allow the car kit to access your contacts. Tap
Allow to pass phone numbers from Contacts to your car kit.

Connect with a paired device
After you pair with a device, you can connect to that device without having
to go through the pairing process again.
1

Open Bluetooth

Make sure Bluetooth is on (see Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off) and
tap the device name.

Accept a pairing request from another device
To establish the relationship between your smartphone and another device,
the Bluetooth app must be open, the app window must be maximized, and
Bluetooth must be turned on. After you successfully establish the
relationship with the other device, however, the Bluetooth app doesn’t need
to be open to use the Bluetooth connection, but Bluetooth must be turned
on.
1

Open Bluetooth

Make sure Bluetooth is on (see Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off).

Initiate a pairing from the other device.

When the connection request appears, tap Yes, allow.

If a passkey is not required, pairing is complete when the Devices list
appears. If a passkey screen appears, do one of the following:

NOTE To connect with a paired computer, you must initiate the connection from
the computer. See the computer documentation for instructions.

• An automatically generated passkey appears on the passkey screen:
Check the other device screen to verify that the passkey is correct,
and tap Yes, connect to connect.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

179

Disconnect from a device
Disconnecting from a device does not mean you delete the relationship you
created between the device and your smartphone. See Connect with a
paired device for instructions on how to reconnect with the device.
1

Open Bluetooth

Tap the connected device name to disconnect from it. Or tap another
device name to disconnect from the current device and connect to the
new device.

Delete a device
Deleting a device means you end the relationship you created between your
smartphone and the device. This means that you will need to pair with the
device again if you want to connect (see Make a pairing request to another
device or Accept a pairing request from another device). If all you want to
do is temporarily disconnect from a device, see Disconnect from a device.
1

Open Bluetooth

Throw the device name off the side of the screen and tap Delete.

Rename a device

180

Open Bluetooth

Tap and hold the device name.

Enter a new name.

Chapter 10 : Web and wireless connections

Documents
Your HP Veer 4G enables you to take your office with
you—including your Microsoft Office files. You can
view Microsoft Word, Excel®, and PowerPoint® files on
your smartphone. You can also set up your
smartphone to view files from online collaboration
tools such as Google Docs.

In this chapter
182
185

Quickoffice® mobile office software
PDF View

You can also view and search in PDF files on your
smartphone.

Chapter 11 : Documents

181

Quickoffice® mobile office software

Set up Quickoffice to access files from an online collaborative
tool

With Quickoffice® mobile office software, you can view Microsoft Word,
Excel®, and PowerPoint® files on your smartphone.

You can use the Quickoffice app to view files that are stored on your
smartphone. You can also set up the Quickoffice app to access files in online
collaborative tools such as Google Docs, Dropbox, or MobileMe. You must
have an account online for the tool, and then set up the account in
Quickoffice on your smartphone.

Register Quickoffice software
If you register Quickoffice software, you receive notifications of software
updates as well as features available only to users who register.
1

Open Quickoffice

Tap Register Now, Register Later, or Do Not Register. If you
choose to register later, the registration screen appears the next time
you open the Quickoffice app.

Chapter 11 : Documents

Open Quickoffice

If the registration screen appears, select one of the registration options
(see Register Quickoffice software).

Tap Add New Account.

Tap the account type.

Enter your account username and password.

Tap Sign In.

TIP You can also register Quickoffice software by opening the application menu
and tapping Register.

182

Open a file
You can view files in an online account that you set up, files that you copy
from your computer (see Copy files between your smartphone and your
computer), or files that you receive as an email attachment (see Open email
attachments). You can view files in DOC, DOCX, TXT, XLS, XLSX, PPT, and
PPTX formats.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put a file on your smartphone, make sure
you have enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the file. Open
Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.
1

Open Quickoffice . Any accounts you set up on your smartphone
appear onscreen. The option Files on my Palm also appears.
4

Tap the file.

Change the text display size in a Word document or Excel®
spreadsheet
Do one of the following:
• Double-tap the screen to zoom in or out a specified amount.
• Open the application menu and tap Zoom. Tap the zoom level.
For slide shows, see Zoom in to and pan a slide.

Tap an account to view files in that account. Tap Files on my Palm to
view files stored in the USB drive storage on your smartphone.

Tap Documents, Spreadsheets, or Presentations to see a list of just
those file types, or tap All Files.

Save a file with a new name
1

With the file open, open the application menu and tap Save As.

Enter the new file name and tap Save As.

Chapter 11 : Documents

183

Share a file

Switch among sheets in a spreadsheet

With the file open, open the application menu and tap Share.

Tap the name of the currently displayed sheet in the upper-right corner
of the screen.

Create the email message and tap

Tap the sheet you want to jump to.

View cell content in a spreadsheet

Resize columns in a spreadsheet

You can see a larger view of the contents of any spreadsheet cell.
1

Tap the cell. The cell contents appear in a larger view at the bottom of
the screen.

Tap and hold the column header line to the right or left of the column
you want to resize.

Drag the column.

Switch among slides in a PowerPoint® slideshow
Do one of the following:
• To move to the next or previous slide: Drag up or down on the screen.
• To jump to a different slide: Tap the name of the currently displayed slide
in the upper-right corner of the screen. Tap the slide you want to jump to.

Zoom in to and pan a slide
2

Tap the enlarged cell contents to see an even larger view. To close the
larger view, tap Done.

Scroll rows or columns in a spreadsheet
• To scroll rows: Flick up or down on the screen.
• To scroll columns: Swipe left or right on the screen.

184

Chapter 11 : Documents

• To zoom in to a slide: Double-tap the slide. When a red border appears
around the slide, you can pinch in or out to change the zoom level, and
drag in any direction to pan the slide.
• To return the slide to normal view: Tap the header at the top of the screen.

Update Quickoffice software

Open Quickoffice

You can update your Quickoffice software to make sure you have the most
current version.

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Do one of the following:

Open Quickoffice

Open the application menu and tap Check For Upgrades.

• To add an account: Tap Add An Account. Tap the account type,
enter your username and password, and tap Sign In.
• To edit an existing account: Tap the account, edit the username and/
or password, and tap Sign In.

You can also set a preference to receive a notification if an update is
available.
1

Open Quickoffice

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

• To delete an account: Throw the account name off the side of the
screen. Tap Delete to confirm.

PDF View
With PDF View, you can view PDF (Adobe Acrobat) files on your
smartphone.

Open a file
You can view a PDF file that you copy from your computer (see Copy files
between your smartphone and your computer) or receive as an email
attachment (see Open email attachments).

Under Notifications, tap On or Off.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put a file on your smartphone, make sure
you have enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the file. Open
Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.
1

Open PDF View

. The list of your files appears onscreen.

Add, edit, or delete an account in Quickoffice
You can set up additional accounts associated with online collaborative tools
such as Google Docs or Dropbox so that files from these accounts appear in
Quickoffice.

Chapter 11 : Documents

185

To search for a file, begin typing the name. Tap the file when it appears.

Change the text display size
• Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen.
• Pinch in to decrease the size of items onscreen.
• Double-tap the screen to zoom in or out a specified amount.
For more information on zooming in and out, see Pinch (zoom gestures).

Find text in a file
1

With a file open, open the application menu and tap Find.

Type the text you want to find, and press Enter
instance of the text appears highlighted.

Do one of the following:

If the PDF file was created with a password, enter the password to
open the file.
3

To open another file: Open the application menu and tap Open. Tap
the file.
TIP To move between open PDFs, tap the center of the gesture area to go to Card
view. Tap the card of the PDF you want to read.

Move around in a file
• To go to the next or preceding page: Tap
or
.
• To jump to a different page: Tap the current page number at the bottom of
the screen. Enter the page number you want and press Enter
.
• To move a part of the current page to the center of the display: Tap and
hold the page and drag it until the part you want appears onscreen.

• To find the next instance: Tap

186

Chapter 11 : Documents

• To find the preceding instance: Tap
4

or tap

To exit search, open the application menu and tap Find.

. The first

Save a file with a new name
1

With the file open, open the application menu and tap Bookmarks.

To search for a specific bookmark, type the bookmark name.

Tap a bookmark to jump to that section of the file.

With the file open, open the application menu and tap Save As.

Enter the new file name and tap Save As.

Share a file
1

With the file open, open the application menu and tap Share.

Create the email message and tap

View bookmarks
If a PDF file was created with bookmarks, you can see the bookmarks on
your smartphone.

Chapter 11 : Documents

187

188

Chapter 11 : Documents

HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
From playing games to making reservations to
listening to your custom radio station, HP webOS App
Catalog has the app you need to do what you want to
do.
With categories including social networking,
entertainment, finance, sports, travel, business, and
more, App Catalog lets you expand the functionality of
your smartphone in a wide variety of directions. Use
App Catalog to quickly and easily purchase and
download apps—then use Software Manager to easily
manage and update those apps.

In this chapter
190
191
191
193
193
194
194
195
195

Browse applications in HP webOS App Catalog
Download a free application
Buy an application using your billing account or by
entering a promo code
Reinstall a deleted application
Set up a billing account
Update or delete a billing account
Manage applications with Software Manager
Update a downloaded application from a notification
Manually check for application updates

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

189

Browse applications in HP webOS App Catalog

Table 1. App Catalog search icons
Icon

All apps in a category. This option appears on a
category or subcategory screen only.

Use App Catalog to browse and download any of the many applications
available for your smartphone. App Catalog contains both free apps and
apps you can buy.

NOTE Applications you installed on your old Palm OS by ACCESS or Windows
Mobile smartphone do not work on your HP Veer 4G because your Veer uses the
new HP webOS. Check App Catalog for a new version of your old favorites.

Open App Catalog

The first time you open App Catalog, review the terms of use and tap
Accept.

Tap the icon of a featured application, or do one of the following:

Description

• To search within featured, paid, free, or new apps only: Tap the
corresponding icon at the bottom of the screen, and then enter a
search term.
4

When the app you want appears onscreen, tap the name to display
app details.

On the app details screen, do any of the following:

• To search by name: Type a search term, and then tap
or press
Enter
. A list of apps whose name or category matches your
search term appears.
• To search by category: Tap Browse Categories, and tap a category.
If the category or list screen displays a category header beneath the
featured app icons, tap it to view and select subcategories. If a
subcategory screen contains a similar header, tap it to view further
subcategories.
• To narrow your search by filtering: Tap an icon at the bottom of the
screen:
Table 1. App Catalog search icons
Icon

Description
Featured apps. This option appears on the Home
screen only.
Top paid apps.
Top free apps.
New apps.

190

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

• To see a larger view of a thumbnail image: Tap the image.
• To read reviews: Tap Reviews.
• To share info about the app with a friend: Tap Share, and then tap
Email or Text Message.
• To go to the app developer’s home page: Tap Developer Home.
• To go to the developer’s product support page: Tap Support (if
available).
• To view a video of the app in your smartphone’s YouTube
application: Tap the YouTube link (if available).

Download a free application

Buy an application

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you download an app, make sure you have
enough storage space on your smartphone to fit the app. Open Device Info
and look at the Available field under Phone.

Buy an application using your billing account or by entering a
promo code

Open App Catalog

Find a free app you want (see Browse applications in HP webOS App
Catalog).

A promo code allows you to purchase one or more App Catalog apps for
free. You might receive a promo code for a specific app, or a general code
that allows you to purchase any one or more apps up to a specific dollar
amount.

Tap the app name, and then tap Download for free.

If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.

TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume

downloading, tap Download paused.

To cancel a download: Tap

on the Downloading progress bar.

After you download an app, tap Tap to Launch to open it. The app
also now appears as an icon in the Launcher, so you can open it from
the Launcher as well.

You can move to other screens and work in other applications while your
new app downloads in the background. For example, find another app in
App Catalog and start its download while the first download is finishing.
TIP A good way to get started with App Catalog is to download the free Facebook
for HP webOS app.

You need to have a billing account set up in App Catalog to purchase apps
with a promo code—however, your account is not charged when you use
the code. If you do not have a promo code for an app, the purchase is billed
to your billing account.
You can also purchase an app directly from a promo code link (see Buy an
application directly from a promo code link).
1

Open App Catalog

Browse to the app you want (see Browse applications in HP webOS
App Catalog).

Tap the app name, and then tap Download for [amount].

If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.

If prompted, enter your Palm profile password to authorize the
purchase. Tap Continue.

If If you have billing account, if prompted, tap OK to verify the email
address where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter a
different email address.

If you do not have a billing account, do one of the following:
• To bill purchases to your AT&T account: Tap Set Up Carrier
Account. Select the state associated with your account. Confirm the

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

191

email address where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter
a new address. Tap Continue.
• To bill purchases to a credit card: Tap Set Up Credit Card. Select
the country associated with your credit card account. Select the card
type and enter the card information. Confirm the email address
where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter a new
address. Tap Submit.
8

You need to have a billing account set up in App Catalog to purchase apps
with a promo code—however, your account is not charged when you use
the code..
1

If you receive a promo code link (such as in an email or text message),
click the link.

Do one of the following:

• If the main App Catalog page is displayed: Tap OK to dismiss the
promo code notification. Browse to the app you want. Tap the app
name.

• To purchase the app using a promo code: Tap Use Promo Code.
Enter the promo code, and then tap Use Promo Code.

• If a specific app page is displayed: Tap OK to dismiss the promo
code notification.

• To purchase the app using your billing account: Tap Purchase.
TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume
downloading, tap Download paused.

To cancel a download: Tap

After you download an app, tap Tap to Launch to open it. The app
also now appears as an icon in the Launcher, so you can open it from
the Launcher as well.

Tap Download for [amount].

If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.

If prompted, enter your Palm profile password to authorize the
purchase. Tap Continue.

If you do not have a billing account, do one of the following:

on the Downloading progress bar.

• To bill purchases to your AT&T account: Tap Set Up Carrier
Account. Select the state associated with your account. Confirm the
email address where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter
a new address. Tap Continue.

TIP If you delete a purchased application you can reinstall it without paying for it
again (see Manage applications with Software Manager).

Buy an application directly from a promo code link
A promo code allows you to purchase one or more App Catalog apps for
free. You might receive a promo code for a specific app, or a general code
that allows you to purchase any one or more apps up to a specific dollar
amount.

192

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

• To bill purchases to a credit card: Tap Set Up Credit Card. Select
the country associated with your credit card account. Select the card
type and enter the card information. Confirm the email address
where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter a new
address. Tap Submit.
7

Do one of the following:
• To purchase the app using the promo code: Tap Use Promo Code.s

• To purchase the app using your billing account: Tap Purchase.
TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume
downloading, tap Download paused.

To cancel a download: Tap

on the Downloading progress bar.

After you download an app, tap Tap to Launch to open it. The app
also now appears as an icon in the Launcher, so you can open it from
the Launcher as well.
TIP If you delete a purchased application you can reinstall it without paying for it
again (see Manage applications with Software Manager).

Set up a billing account
1

Open App Catalog

Do one of the following:
• Tap an app you want to buy, and tap Download for [amount].
• Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
Under Carrier Account or Credit Card Account, tap Add
Account.

Enter your Palm profile password and tap Continue.
If you enter an incorrect Palm profile password three times, a message
appears that explains how you can contact Palm support for help.

Do one of the following:s

Reinstall a deleted application

• To bill purchases to your AT&T account: Select the state associated
with the account. Confirm the email address where you want to
receive purchase receipts, or enter a new address. Tap Continue.

If you delete an app you installed on your smartphone (see Manage
applications with Software Manager), you can easily reinstall the app. You
do not need to buy the app again.

• To bill purchases to your credit card: Select the country associated
with your account. Select a credit card type and enter your credit
card and billing address details. Confirm the email address where
you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter a new address Tap
Submit.

Open App Catalog

Browse to the app (see Browse applications in HP webOS App
Catalog).

Tap the app name and tap Download again for free.

IMPORTANT Your credit card details are not stored on your smartphone. They
are encrypted and stored in your Palm profile.

Under Password is Required, select one of the following:
Once every 4 hours: You must enter your password the first time you
make a purchase. If you make any other purchases within four hours,
you don’t need to enter your password again. After four hours, you
enter your password again for the first purchase, which starts a new
four-hour clock.

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

193

Every Purchase: You must enter your password for each purchase,
regardless of the time interval.
6

Under Send Receipts, enter the email address where you want to
receive app purchase receipts.

If you set up both an AT&T account and a credit card account, under
Default Payment Method, select the account you want to use as the
default for app purchases. App Catalog purchases are billed to your
default account.

Manage applications with Software Manager
Use Software Manager to work with applications and background services
that you add to your smartphone.
1

Open Software Manager

Tap Apps to manage downloaded apps that appear in the Launcher, or
tap Other to manage background apps and services that do not
appear in the Launcher.

Tap an app or service name.

On the app details screen, do any of the following:

Update or delete a billing account
1

Open App Catalog

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

To change the password requirements or receipt email: Tap the current
entry under Password Is Required or Send Receipts, and select a
new password requirement or enter a new email address. These
settings apply to all your billing accounts.

To change specific account settings: Tap the account name.

If prompted, enter your Palm profile password and tap Continue.
If you enter an incorrect Palm profile password three times, a message
appears that explains how you can contact Palm support for help.

Do one of the following:
• To change the state associated with a wireless service account:
Select the state and tap Continue.
• To change credit card account information: Enter or select the new
information and tap Submit.
• To delete the account information from your smartphone: Tap
Remove Account.

• To read reviews of the app: Tap Review App and tap a review.
• To add a review: Tap Review App, and then tap Review.
• To share info about the app: Tap Review App, and then tap Share.
To send the link in an email message, tap Email. To send the link in a
text message, tap Text Message.
• To report a problem with the app: Tap Report A Problem. Under
Problem Type, tap Bug and tap the type of problem you are
reporting. Enter the problem description and tap
.
• To delete the app: Tap Delete. Tap Delete again to confirm.

194

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

TIP You can also delete an app by throwing it off the side of the screen from the

Manually check for application updates

app list, and then tapping Delete to confirm.
TIP You can reinstall any app you delete (see Reinstall a deleted application).

Update a downloaded application from a
notification

Open Software Manager

Tap Apps to manage downloaded apps that appear in the Launcher, or
tap Other to manage background apps and services that do not
appear in the Launcher.

If updates are available for any of your downloaded apps or services,
an Update button appears in the lower-right corner of the screen with
a number. The number indicates the number of items for which
updates are available. Tap Update.

Do one of the following:

When an update is available for one or more apps you downloaded, you get
a notification. Tap the notification and do one of the following:

• To display details about an app and the available update: Tap the app
name.
• To update one app: Tap the arrow icon to the right of the app name.
• To update all apps: Tap Install Updates.

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

195

196

Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager

Preferences
There are lots of ways to make your HP Veer 4G work
better for you. Personalize your smartphone to make it
match your lifestyle.
You can easily customize many features of your
smartphone like the wallpaper, screen brightness,
ringtone for incoming calls, and more.

In this chapter
198
202
203
206
208
209
211

Backup
Date & Time
Device Info
Exhibition
Regional Settings
Screen & Lock
Sounds & Ringtones

Chapter 13 : Preferences

197

Backup
Backup is one of the major advantages of your Palm profile. You create a
Palm profile when you set up your smartphone.

What is a Palm profile?
When you create a Palm profile during setup of your smartphone, you gain
access to the many advantages of having a Palm profile, including
automatic, daily backup of your data.
Your Palm profile gives you the following benefits:
Palm profile account: Your Palm profile account is automatically created
for you on your smartphone. In this account you can store Contacts and
Calendar info that you don’t store in online accounts like Google or
Exchange.

NOTE You cannot access the info in your Palm profile account anywhere but on
your smartphone. View, add to, and edit the info in your Palm profile account on
your smartphone.

Automatic, daily backup to a secure server: Info stored in your Palm
profile account is automatically, daily backed up to a secure server.
Your smartphone backs up the contacts, calendar events, tasks, and memos
that are in your Palm profile account, as well as system settings and
applications you downloaded to your smartphone. If you ever need to erase
the info from your smartphone, you can restore all your backed-up info. All
data backed up to your Palm profile is encrypted, and only you, the profile
owner, can access your data.
Backup does not affect information stored in online accounts like Google.
Information stored in online accounts is synchronized by the online provider
at regular intervals. Information stored in Exchange is synchronized by your
company’s Exchange server.

198

Chapter 13 : Preferences

IMPORTANT Backup does not back up files stored on your smartphone’s USB
drive.

You can turn off automatic backup, and you can also perform a manual
backup.
Remote erase of a lost or stolen smartphone: If your smartphone is lost or
stolen, open the web browser on your computer, sign in to your Palm profile
on palm.com/palmprofile, and do a remote erase of the info on the
smartphone.

Access to system updates: Automatic system and software updates are
sent to your smartphone.
Updating of Palm profile settings: To change your Palm profile
information after you set it up, see Update your Palm profile settings. To see
the email address you used when you set up your Palm profile, open Device
Info (see View system information).

What information is backed up?
All data backed up to your Palm profile is encrypted, and only you, the
profile owner, can access your data. Data in your Palm profile account can
be viewed, added to, or edited only on your smartphone.

IMPORTANT In the event that your smartphone is lost or stolen, you can go to
your Palm profile on palm.com/palmprofile and from there erase the data on your
smartphone.

The following table lists info that is and is not backed up to your Palm profile:

Table 1. Backup details

Application

Backed up

Not backed up

Contacts

Contacts in your Palm
profile account.

Contacts in online accounts.

Application

Backed up

Not backed up

Accounts

Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.

Entries (contacts, events,
messages, and so on) in
online accounts

Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.

Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Amazon
MP3

App Catalog

Nothing is backed up. You
can copy files from the
AmazonMP3 folder on your
smartphone to your
computer while the
smartphone is in USB Drive
mode (see Copy files
between your smartphone
and your computer).
When you sign in to your
Palm profile after your
smartphone is erased, apps
you downloaded from App
Catalog are downloaded
again.

Backup

Backup setting is on by
default.

Bluetooth

Nothing is backed up.

Calendar

Events in your Palm profile
account.
Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Preferences (see Customize
Calendar).

Favorites.
Preferences (see Customize
Contacts).

Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Contact photos that you
added by taking a photo
with your smartphone’s
camera.
Linking relationships
between contacts.
Speed dials.

Date & Time Nothing is backed up.
Email

Usernames for your email
accounts.

Emails, their contents, and
attachments, their sort
order, and account
preferences.

App settings and data
stored in the app.
Applications from sources
other than App Catalog.

Passwords for your email
accounts.

Excel

See entry for Quickoffice.

HP webOS
App Catalog

See entry for App Catalog.

Launcher

User customizations such
as renamed or reordered
Launcher pages (see
Reorder Launcher pages or
Rename a Launcher page),
or reordered Launcher icons
(see Reorder Launcher
icons).

Location
Services

Preferences.

Memos

All memos.

Events in online accounts.
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

199

Table 1. Backup details

Application

Backed up

Regional
Settings

Nothing is backed up.

Screen &
Lock

Nothing is backed up.

Nothing is backed up.
Keep a copy of these files on
your computer (see Copy
files between your
smartphone and your
computer).

Software
Manager

When you sign in to your
Palm profile after your
smartphone is erased, apps
you downloaded from App
Catalog are downloaded
again.

Nothing is backed up.
Keep a copy of these files on
your computer (see Copy
files between your
smartphone and your
computer).

Sounds &
Ringtones

Nothing is backed up.

Tasks

Tasks in your Palm profile
account.

Application

Backed up

Messaging

Usernames for IM accounts. Multimedia messages.
Text messages.
Instant messages.

Music

PDF View

Phone

Call history entries.

Photos

Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Facebook and Photobucket.

Not backed up

Passwords, attachments,
and history.

No photos are backed up.
On your computer, keep a
copy of the photos that are
on your smartphone (see
Copy files between your
smartphone and your
computer).

Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Exchange.
Text Assist

Nothing is backed up.

Third-party
apps

Apps you downloaded are
downloaded again from
App Catalog.

Videos

Nothing is backed up.
Keep a copy of these files on
your computer (see Copy
files between your
smartphone and your
computer).

Voice Dial

Nothing is backed up.

VPN

Nothing is backed up.

Wallpaper

Nothing is backed up.

Web

Bookmarks.

Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Facebook and Photobucket.

200

PowerPoint

See entry for Quickoffice.

Quickoffice

Usernames and passwords
for your Quickoffice
accounts.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Documents, spreadsheets,
and presentations. Keep a
copy of these files on your
computer (see Copy files
between your smartphone
and your computer).

Browser cookies.

Not backed up

App settings and data
stored in the app.
Applications from sources
other than App Catalog.

Tasks in online accounts.
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Exchange.

Downloads and web
settings.

Erase Palm profile information from the server

Table 1. Backup details
Application

Backed up

Wi-Fi

Nothing is backed up.

Word

See entry for Quickoffice.

Not backed up

Open Backup

Do either of the following:

Manually back up information to your Palm profile
Backup occurs automatically every day, but we recommend that you
manually back up your information before you reset your smartphone or
change your Palm profile settings.
1

Open Backup

• To stop backup of your info and delete all backed-up information
from the server: Tap On to switch backup from On to Off. Tap Turn
Off And Erase Data. This deletes all your information on the server.
It does not affect the information on your smartphone.
TIP Open Device Info to delete the information on your smartphone (see Erase

data and reset your smartphone).

• To turn on automatic backup if you had previously turned it off: Tap
Off to switch Backup from Off to On.

Tap Back up now.

Remotely erase Palm profile information from your smartphone
In the event that your smartphone is lost or stolen, go to your Palm profile
on your computer and from there, erase the data on your smartphone. This
does not affect the information stored in your Palm profile.
1

On your computer, go to palm.com/palmprofile.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

201

Click Device Info.

Click I Lost My Phone > Erase Device.

Email: Change the email address associated with your Palm profile. A
verification email is sent to the new address. Click the link in the email
to verify the new address. After you verify, the email address is
changed.
Security Question/Answer: Tap the current question and tap a new
one. Then tap Answer and enter an answer.

Update your Palm profile settings
IMPORTANT To ensure that the data on your smartphone is consistent with
that stored on your Palm profile, we recommend that you perform a manual
backup of your data both before and after you change any of your Palm profile
settings (see Manually back up information to your Palm profile).

Open Backup

Open the application menu and tap Palm Profile.

Enter your Palm profile password and tap Sign In.

Edit any of the following:
First Name/Last Name: Change the first name and/or last name
associated with your Palm profile.

202

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Change Password: Tap Change Password. Enter your new password
and confirm it. Tap Done.

Date & Time
You can set your smartphone to adjust the date and time automatically to
the local date and time wherever you are, or you can turn this feature off and
enter this information manually.
1

Open Date & Time

Set any of the following:
Time Format: Set whether to use a 12-hour or a 24-hour format.

Network time: Network time is set by the AT&T network. Tap On or
Off. If you turn this option off, select the date and time. If you switch
from manual time to network time, there might be a delay before the
network time updates on your smartphone.
Network time zone: Tap On or Off. If you turn this option off, tap the
city that appears onscreen. Type the name of a country or city in the
time zone you want, and then tap the location.

Device Info

Restart your smartphone
If an application freezes, first try restarting your smartphone.
An occasional restart can be good for your smartphone just the way a
restart can be good for your computer. Every once in a while, restart your
smartphone.
1

Open Device Info

Tap Reset Options and tap Restart.

NOTE If the screen does not respond to taps, press and hold power while you
slide the ringer switch three times to restart your smartphone.

View system information
1

Open Device Info
. Basic system information is displayed, such as
your phone number, battery usage, and available memory. The screen
also displays the email address you used when you set up your Palm
profile.
To view more detailed system information, tap More Info, and tap
Software or Hardware.

Erase data and reset your smartphone
If restarting your smartphone does not solve the problem of application
freezes, you may need to reset the smartphone. A reset deletes some or all
information from your smartphone (depending on the type of reset you
select). After a reset, you must follow the prompts to sign in to your Palm
profile again before you can use your smartphone.

Rename your smartphone
IMPORTANT If possible, do a manual backup of your Palm profile data before
resetting your smartphone (see Manually back up information to your Palm
profile). After you sign in to your Palm profile again, any backed-up information is
restored (see What information is backed up?).

The name you give your smartphone appears on any paired Bluetooth®
device that has a display, such as a car kit. If you rename your smartphone,
the name is updated automatically on the other device—you don’t need to
pair again.
1

Open Device Info

Tap the Name field and enter the new name.

Open Device Info

Chapter 13 : Preferences

203

Tap Reset Options.

About the full erase options
In most cases, you can perform a regular full erase if you want to erase
downloaded applications and USB drive storage files from your smartphone.
Perform a secure full erase when you give your smartphone to somebody
else and you don’t want that person to be able to access your data.
Regardless of which full erase option you choose, all your data on the web—
in your online accounts and in your Palm profile—is untouched.
After either type of full erase, you can sign in to your Palm profile either on a
new webOS smartphone or the same smartphone you just erased. Signing
in restores your Palm profile data and information from online accounts (see
What information is backed up?), but not your stored files such as pictures,
videos, and music (you must copy those again to the smartphone; see Copy
files between your smartphone and your computer).

Tap one of the following:
Erase Apps & Data: Erases all application data and settings, as well as
any applications you installed from App Catalog.
Erase USB Drive: Erases all files stored in USB drive storage, such as
pictures, videos, and music.
Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you installed, and
USB drive storage files. Use Full Erase if you want a clean erase of your
currently installed apps and files but plan to continue using the
smartphone.
Secure Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you
installed, and USB drive storage files. Use Secure Full Erase if you plan
to give the smartphone away and you do not want your data and files
to be recoverable even using a third-party tool. Secure Full Erase
performs a complete wipe of the smartphone and takes considerably
longer than a regular full erase.

Tap the button again to confirm your choice.

Run Quick Tests
If you are troubleshooting your device with a support agent, you can run
Quick Tests to supply the agent with diagnostic information about your
smartphone. If you need more information after running Quick Tests, you
can run one or more Interactive Tests (see Run Interactive Tests).
1

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Tests > Quick Tests.

Work with the support agent to view and report the test results.

Run Interactive Tests
If you are troubleshooting your device with a support agent and need more
information after running Quick Tests (see Run Quick Tests), you can run
one or more Interactive Tests.
1

204

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Tests > Interactive Tests.

Use Certificate Manager

Work with the support agent to run and view results from one or more
tests.

Certificates are digital documents that are used to authenticate and
exchange information on networks. Certificates can be issued for a user, a
device, or a service.

Change default applications
If you have more than one application on your smartphone that can perform
a particular function, you can change the default application to use for that
function.
In addition, if you have more than one application on your smartphone that
can open a particular file type, you can change the default application to use
for opening that file type.
1

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Default Applications.

To find data types and file types for which more than one app is
available, look for app names that appear in black type.

Do either or both of the following:

Install a certificate from USB drive storage
You can install a certificate that is located in the USB drive storage on your
smartphone. For information on copying a certificate into USB drive storage,
see Copy files between your smartphone and your computer.
1

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.

Tap

• To change the default application to use for different functions:
Under Data Types, tap the currently displayed application for a
given data type, and tap a different application.
• To change the default application to use for different file types:
Under File Types, tap the currently displayed application for a given
file type, and tap a different application.
To override the default application setting when looking for the map location
of an address: Press and hold Option , tap the address, and tap an
application.

and tap the certificate name.

Install a certificate from an email attachment
• Open the email attachment (see Open email attachments), and then tap
Trust Certificate.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

205

View certificate details

Start Exhibition

You can view user-installed certificates only.

Do one of the following:

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.

Tap the certificate name.

• When the screen is off and the keyboard is closed, place your smartphone
on a Touchstone charging dock. Exhibition starts automatically.
• If you place your smartphone on a charging dock while the screen is on,
or when the screen is off but the keyboard is open, Exhibition starts when
the smartphone has been inactive for the period defined in the Screen
Lock settings (see Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically).
The screen does not lock.
• Open Exhibition
and tap Start Exhibition. This starts Exhibition
whether or not your smartphone is on a charging dock.

Delete a certificate
You can delete user-installed certificates only.
1

Open Device Info

Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.

Tap the certificate and tap Delete Certificate.

Exhibition
Exhibition gives you access to special applications that optimize use of the
smartphone while placed on an HP Touchstone charging dock (sold
separately). These apps include Time (clock app), Photos (photo slideshow),
and Agenda (agenda based on your Calendar events for the day).

NOTE If you purchase an HP Touchstone charging dock, you also need to
purchase a USB cable if one is not included in the charging dock package. The
charging cable for your Veer is not compatible with a Touchstone charging dock.
Also, to use a charging dock, you must connect the USB cable to the AC adapter,
and then plug the adapter into a working outlet. You cannot use a charging dock
by connecting the USB cable to a computer.

NOTE If you place your smartphone on a charging dock when you are on a call
or watching a video in the Videos or YouTube app, Exhibition does not start.

Exit Exhibition
Do any of the following:
• Tap the center of the gesture area.
• Flick up from the gesture area to the screen.

206

Chapter 13 : Preferences

• If your smartphone is on a charging dock, remove the smartphone from
the charging dock.
When you exit Exhibition, the last used item on the smartphone is displayed:
the Launcher, Card view, or an app window.

Use your smartphone as a clock
The Exhibition Time app provides a convenient way to use your smartphone
as a clock while the smartphone is sitting on the charging dock.
• In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Time.

Use Exhibition
Here are some key features of using Exhibition:
• When Exhibition starts, the last-used app is displayed. To switch to
another app, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap the app you
want.

View a picture slideshow
When your smartphone is in Exhibition, you can set it to play a continuous
slideshow of pictures from any album in the Photos app.
1

In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Photos.
Playback of the currently selected album starts automatically. The
default album is Photo Roll.

To pause the slideshow and display playback controls, tap the screen.

When the playback controls are displayed, do any of the following:
• To use pictures from a different album for the slideshow: Tap the
currently displayed album in the upper-right corner of the screen,
and then tap the new album.
• To play the album’s pictures in random order: Tap
• To resume playback: Tap

• When Exhibition starts, notifications appear as usual, and tapping a
notification performs the same action as usual.
• If your smartphone is on a charging dock but Exhibition is turned off,
Exhibition starts automatically when the smartphone has been inactive for
the period defined in the Screen Lock settings (see Set the interval for
turning the screen off automatically). The screen does not lock.
• If you have Secure Unlock turned on, you must enter your PIN or
password to use the smartphone when Exhibition starts.

• To change the timing of the slideshow: Tap
and tap a time
interval. This interval sets how long a picture is displayed before it
transitions to the next picture.
4

To manually move to the next or previous picture during a slideshow:
Swipe left or right on the screen.

To exit the slideshow: Make the back gesture.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

207

View your day’s agenda

Do either of the following:

Agenda view displays any of the current day’s calendar events in list format.
• In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Agenda.

• To change which apps are available in Exhibition: Tap On or Off for
each app. You cannot remove the Time app.
• To find more Exhibition apps: Tap Find More. This opens App
Catalog displaying a list of apps you can use in Exhibition. Tap an app
to download it (see HP webOS App Catalog and Software
Manager). You can install as many Exhibition apps as you want.

Customize Exhibition settings
1

Open Exhibition

Regional Settings
Language
You can set your smartphone display to any language available for the
device.

208

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Open Regional Settings

Tap the language currently displayed in the Language field, and then
tap a new language.

If a region list is displayed, tap the region.

Confirm you want to use the new language, or revert to the original
language.

Your smartphone restarts after you select a new language. The restart does
not affect your data or applications.

Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically
By default, your screen turns off after one minute of inactivity to save battery
power. You can change this interval.
1

Open Screen & Lock

Formats

In Turn off after, tap the interval shown, and then tap the number of
seconds or minutes.

You can set your smartphone to format numbers, currency, date, and time in
the style you prefer. You can select the format commonly used in your
country or region, or any style you prefer.

Change your wallpaper

Open Regional Settings

In Formats, tap the country name.

Do one of the following:
• Begin typing the name of another country, and when it appears, tap
it.
• Scroll down to find a country, and then tap it.

Your wallpaper is the screen background in Card view. You can customize
the wallpaper to show a favorite picture.
1

Open Screen & Lock

Tap Change Wallpaper.

Do one of the following:

• To use an existing picture as the background: Tap the album
containing the picture, and tap the picture.

Confirm you want to change the format.

• To use a new picture as the background: Tap New Photo and take
the picture.

Your smartphone restarts after you select a new country format. The restart
does not affect your data or applications.
4

Screen & Lock

(Optional) Do either or both of the following:
• To zoom out or in on a part of the picture: Pinch in or out on the
picture.
• To capture the portion of the picture you want for your wallpaper:
Tap and hold the picture, and then drag the portion you want to the
center of the onscreen box. This portion becomes the wallpaper.

Change screen brightness
1

Open Screen & Lock

Under Screen, drag the Brightness slider to the preferred level.

Tap Set Wallpaper.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

209

Turn advanced gestures on/off

Set options for unlocking the screen

Turning on advanced gestures gives you two additional gestures, previous
and next, and also changes the way you make the back gesture and the
forward gesture in Web. Having these gestures on or off affects the way you
can switch among open applications on your smartphone.

The screen locks five seconds after it turns off automatically, or immediately
if you turn the screen off manually. Use Secure Unlock if you want to require
a PIN or a password to unlock the screen.

• Previous and next gestures: The previous and next gestures let you move
among your open applications without first going to Card view. The
previous gesture is a full swipe from left to right across the entire length of
the gesture area. The next gesture is a full swipe from right to left across
the entire length of the gesture area. Use these gestures when you have
more than one app open and an app is displayed full-screen. By making
the previous and next gestures, you go from full-screen view to full-screen
view of each app. The order of applications is determined by the order
that you opened them or arranged them in Card view.
• Change to the back gesture and to the forward gesture in Web: The back
gesture still goes from right to left in the gesture area, but you must make
a shorter swipe, from the center outward. The forward gesture in Web
also requires a shorter swipe.
1

Open Screen & Lock

TIP If your company issued your smartphone to you, check with your system

administrator about whether the company has its own settings for locking and
unlocking the screen of your smartphone.

Open Screen & Lock

To turn Secure Unlock on: In Secure Unlock, tap Off, tap Simple PIN
or Password, and do one of the following:
Simple PIN: Enter a PIN of any length. This is a PIN that you make up.
Enter the PIN again to confirm, and then tap Done.
Password: Enter a password containing any combination of letters
and numbers. Enter the password again to confirm, and then tap
Done.

IMPORTANT Be sure to write down your PIN or password and keep it
somewhere safe. If you forget your PIN or password, you need to remotely reset
your smartphone and may lose data.

In Switch Applications, tap On or Off.

Tap Lock After to choose whether the screen locks after a designated
time, or after the screen turns off.

To turn Secure Unlock off: In Secure Unlock, tap the currently
displayed option (Simple PIN or Password), and then tap Off. Enter
the PIN or password, and then tap Done.

Change your Secure Unlock password
1

210

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Open Screen & Lock

In Secure Unlock, tap Change PIN or Change Password.

Enter the old PIN/password and the new PIN/password.

Tap Done.

Sounds & Ringtones
Use the ringer switch

Get notifications when the screen is locked or off
1

Open Screen & Lock

Under Notifications, tap On or Off to set whether notifications are
displayed when the screen is locked.

Under Notifications, in Blink Notifications, tap On or Off. If blink
notifications are turned on, when the screen is off, the light in the
gesture area pulses when a notification arrives and continues to pulse
until you tap the notification or turn on the screen. Blink notifications
are on by default.

Sliding the ringer switch off (red means off) not only turns off the ringer for
incoming phone calls, it also turns off system sounds like the Calendar
notifications and the camera shutter click when you take a picture. The
ringer switch does not affect music and video sound.
By default, when the ringer switch is off, you can still hear the Clock alarm. If
you want to change this setting so that turning off the ringer switch also
turns off the Clock alarm sound, go to Clock > Preferences. Under Ringer
Switch Off, change Play alarm anyway to No. If you set this option to No,
be sure to change it back to Yes the next time you set an alarm—otherwise,
you won’t hear the alarm if the ringer switch is off.

Set ringer switch settings
Use voice dialing when the screen is locked
For information on using voice dialing, see Dial by contact name using voice
dialing.

You can set how your smartphone treats system sounds and rings for
incoming calls when the ringer switch is off and when it is on.
1

Open Sounds & Ringtones

If you turn on the preference to use voice dialing when the screen is locked,
you access voice dialing by turning on the screen if it is off (see Turn the
screen on/off), and then pressing and holding volume. You do not need to
enter your PIN or password to unlock the screen.
If this preference is on and you have a headset attached to your smartphone,
you can access voice dialing when the screen is locked by pressing and
holding the button on the headset—you don’t need to turn the screen on
first.
1

Open Screen & Lock

Under Voice Dialing, tap On or Off next to Enable When Locked.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

211

In Ringer Switch Off > Rings & Alerts, tap the currently displayed
option, and then tap an option to set what happens when the ringer
switch is off and a system sound or the ringer would normally play. Tap
Vibrate to have your smartphone vibrate instead of playing the sound.
Tap Mute to have nothing happen.
Under Ringer Switch On > Rings & Alerts, tap the currently
displayed option, and then tap an option to set what happens when
the ringer switch is on and a system sound or the ringer plays. Tap
Sound & Vibrate to have your smartphone both play a sound and
vibrate. Tap Sound to have your smartphone play a sound only.

NOTE Calendar, Email, and Messaging notification sounds are controlled
separately. If you have notification sounds turned on in any of those apps (see
Customize event notification sounds, Turn new email notifications on/off, and
Customize messaging notifications), the sound plays even if you have System
Sounds turned off. Note that the ringer switch must be on for any notification
sound to play.

Drag the Volume slider to set the system sounds volume.

Add ringtones to your smartphone
Set system sound options
You can turn system sounds, such as transition sounds and notification
alerts, on or off. You can also set the volume for system sounds.
System sounds are turned on by default. Your smartphone plays your system
sound only when the ringer switch is on.
1

Open Sounds & Ringtones

You can add a file in any of the following file types as a ringtone for your
smartphone: MP3, AAC, AAC+, AMR, QCELP, or WAV. How to use the file
as a ringtone depends on the following: the file type, how you obtain the file,
and whether you want to use the file as a ringtone only, or play it in the
Music app.
You can obtain files to use as ringtones in any of the following ways:
• Download a ringtone from one of the many ringtone apps in App Catalog
(see HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager).
• Download an MP3 file that you want to use as a ringtone from the
Amazon MP3 app (if available on your smartphone) (see Amazon MP3).
• Copy a file from your computer (see Copy a ringtone to your
smartphone).
To use an AMR or QCELP file as a ringtone, the file must be stored in the
ringtones folder in your smartphone’s USB drive storage. Here’s how to get
the file into the correct folder:
• Files downloaded from App Catalog: The file is placed in the ringtones
folder automatically.
• Files copied from your computer: You must place the file in the ringtones
folder (see Copy a ringtone to your smartphone).

212

In System Sounds, tap Off to switch system sounds from Off to On
for notifications, transitions, shutter click, and the like. Tap On to
switch system sounds from On to Off.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

To use a file in the ringtones folder as a ringtone, see Select a file from the
ringtones folder as a ringtone.

For MP3, AAC, AAC+, and WAV files, you have two options:

Select a song as a ringtone

• To use the file as a ringtone only: Place the file in the ringtones folder (see
Copy a ringtone to your smartphone). If the file is already on your
smartphone, connect your smartphone to your computer as described in
that procedure, navigate to the file, and move the file to the ringtones
folder. If you download a file from a ringtone app in App Catalog, it is
automatically placed in the ringtones folder. To use a file in the ringtones
folder as a ringtone, see Select a file from the ringtones folder as a
ringtone.
• To both use the file as a ringtone and listen to the file in the Music app:
Copy the file to your smartphone and place the file in any folder in your
smartphone’s USB drive storage except ringtones (see Copy files and
folders using USB Drive mode). If you download an MP3 file from the
Amazon MP3 app, it is automatically stored in a folder where you can
both listen to it in the Music app and use it as a ringtone. To use the file as
a ringtone, follow the steps in Select a song as a ringtone.

If you have a song you listen to in the Music app, you can use that song as
the ringtone for your smartphone.

Select a file from the ringtones folder as a ringtone

The ringtone you select here applies globally to all incoming calls. You can
also set a unique ringtone for a contact (see Add a ringtone to a contact).
1

Open Sounds & Ringtones

Tap the displayed ringtone.

Tap

Tap
to the right of a song title to preview it. Tap the song title to
add it to your list of ringtones.

When the list of ringtones is displayed, tap the song you added to use it
as your ringtone.

To set the ringtone volume, drag the Ringtone Volume slider.

The ringtone you select here applies globally to all incoming calls. You can
also set a ringtone for an individual contact (see Add a ringtone to a
contact).

Copy a ringtone to your smartphone

Open Sounds & Ringtones

In Ringtone, tap the displayed ringtone to open the list of tones. This
list displays all files stored in the ringtones folder in your smartphone’s
USB drive storage.

Identify a file on your computer to use as a ringtone on your
smartphone.

Connect your smartphone to your computer using the USB cable.

On your smartphone, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your
smartphone appears as a removable drive.

Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), double-click the drive representing
your smartphone, and drag and drop files to the ringtones folder on
your smartphone.

(Optional) Tap

to listen to the ringtone.

Tap the name of the ringtone to select it.

To set the ringtone volume, drag the Ringtone Volume slider.
TIP Adjusting the Ringtone Volume slider is the same as using the volume button
on the side of the smartphone.

Chapter 13 : Preferences

213

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen is no longer displayed on your smartphone.

The new file appears in the list of ringtones on your smartphone. You can
select the new ringtone to apply to all incoming calls (see Select a file from
the ringtones folder as a ringtone) or set it as a unique ringtone for a contact
(see Add a ringtone to a contact).

214

Chapter 13 : Preferences

Troubleshooting
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you
might have, this chapter provides answers to some of
the most commonly asked questions. For additional
information and answers to other common questions,
visit palm.com/support. Remember that when you
search your smartphone’s Help system, you get results
not only from the Help system, but from Palm’s
Support Knowledge Base as well.

In this chapter
216
218
222
223
225
226
227
229
230
231
233
234
235
238
238
239
239
242
243
244
244
244

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

215

6Ts: Ways to get your HP Veer 4G working
again
Introduction
Is your smartphone not working the way you expect it to? Has it stopped
responding to taps? Is one of your applications not responding or behaving
strangely?
These problems can be pretty easy to fix.

Throw any other open applications off the top of the screen to close
them.

Here are six different troubleshooting methods—6Ts—that you can try, on
your own, to get your smartphone working again.

Why this might help

Try each method in the order it’s presented to see if it solves your problem.
When the problem is solved, stop.

One or more of your open applications could be reserving so much memory
that there’s not enough memory left to do real work. Closing apps can free
up enough memory so you can continue working.

T1. Throw all open applications off the top of the screen

Did this solve the problem?
• Yes: Stop.
• No: Continue.

NOTE If the screen is off and you can’t turn it on, or if gestures don’t work, skip to
T3. Triple-toggle to restart.

T2. Turn your smartphone completely off and on
1

216

If you’re working in an application that’s displayed full-screen and it
isn’t responding, flick up from the gesture area to send the app to Card
view.

NOTE If the screen is off and you can’t turn it on, or if gestures don’t work, skip to
T3. Triple-toggle to restart.

Throw the app off the top of the screen to close it.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Press and hold power

Tap Power, and then tap Restart.

Why this might help
Restarting your smartphone closes all applications, frees up all memory, and
reinitializes wireless services (phone, Bluetooth® technology, Wi-Fi, and
VPN). A fresh start.
TIP An occasional restart can be good for your smartphone just the way a restart
can be good for your computer. Every once in a while, restart your smartphone.

Did this solve the problem?

NOTE Because open applications are forced to close immediately during a
triple-toggle or 3-key restart, some unsaved data may be lost.

Did this solve the problem?
• Yes: Stop.
• No: Continue.

T4. Top off the battery

• Yes: Stop.
• No: Continue.

Connect the USB cable to the AC charger and to your smartphone.

Or try this method for restarting your smartphone: 3-key restart: Press
and hold Option
+ Sym
+ R, and then release the keys all at once.
Give this method at least 10 seconds for the restart to begin.

Plug the AC charger into a working electric outlet.

Let the battery charge completely.

Why this might help

A triple-toggle or 3-key restart may be effective if the screen is off and you
can’t turn it on, or if gestures don’t work. These restarts also close all
applications, free memory, and reinitialize wireless services (phone,
Bluetooth® technology, Wi-Fi, and VPN).

Fully charging the battery ensures your smartphone is not conserving power
due to a low battery.

T3. Triple-toggle to restart
1

Press and hold power

While still holding down power
times.

, slide the ringer switch three

Wait a few seconds for the restart to begin.

Did this solve the problem?
• Yes: Stop.
• No: Continue.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

217

T5. Take out the battery
IMPORTANT This solution is not available for your Veer. Do not try to remove
the battery. Attempting to remove the battery from your Veer voids the warranty.
Skip to T6. Tether your smartphone to your computer and reinstall webOS.

T6. Tether your smartphone to your computer and reinstall
webOS

Palm profile
Creating your Palm profile: Is your smartphone ready for setup?
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Did you remove the clear plastic screen protector?
Your smartphone won’t respond well to your taps if the protector is covering
the touchscreen.
Look along the top of the screen from left to right:

IMPORTANT Don’t try this method until you’ve already tried the five Ts before
this.

On your computer’s web browser, go to palm.com/palmprofile, sign in,
and write down your smartphone’s serial number.

Do you see:

Go to palm.com/rom and click the link to get webOS Doctor.

Enter your serial number and follow the instructions.

If your smartphone uses a SIM card, make sure that the card is not
damaged and that it is inserted correctly.

Why this might help

No? Then your smartphone isn’t activated. If your smartphone uses a
SIM card, make sure that the card is not damaged and that it is
inserted correctly. If you cannot activate your smartphone, contact
AT&T for help.

Installing the latest version of webOS wipes and refreshes all memory. Your
preferences and installed software are not affected.
Want help while you use webOS Doctor? Go to palm.com/support.
Select your smartphone and AT&T, and click Support Services. Select one
of the support options.

The name AT&T?

The H+ or 3G icon?
No? Then move outside or go to a more built-up area until you see the
H+ or 3G icon. If you see a white triangle, you’re roaming, and setup
won’t work. Move to a location where you are within coverage of the
AT&T network. Setup takes longer when your smartphone has a 2G
connection.

218

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

At least three signal-strength bars showing white (not gray)?

If you answered No to those questions, do this:

No? Then move to a location where you get a stronger signal from the
AT&T network. You can’t use a Wi-Fi connection to create your Palm
profile.

• Make the back gesture—a quick swipe from right to left in the gesture
area of your smartphone—until you see the Palm Profile screen again.
Then tap Create New Profile.

A battery icon that is green or at least one-third white?
No? Then charge your smartphone: Plug the USB cable into the AC
charger, plug the charger into an electric outlet, and attach the
magnetic end of the cable to the charger/connector on your
smartphone. Charge the smartphone for at least one hour.

If you answered Yes to all these questions and still can’t set up your profile,
read the next sections.

Creating your Palm profile: Are you trying to use a profile from
another webOS smartphone?
When you set up your smartphone, did you tap Sign In To My Profile on
the Palm Profile screen? Tap the Sign In To My Profile button only if you
can answer Yes to these questions:
• Did you create a valid Palm profile on another webOS smartphone in the
past?
• Do you want to use that same Palm profile again on your new webOS
smartphone?

If you answered Yes to the questions, do this:
• If you forgot the profile password, tap Forgot Password. Enter the
answer to your security question and tap Done. Create a new password
and tap Done.
If that doesn’t work, do this:
• For help on setting up your old profile on your new smartphone, go to
palm.com/support. Select your smartphone and AT&T, and click Support
Services. Select one of the support options.

Creating your Palm profile: Are you having trouble creating a
new profile?
To create a profile, do the following:
1

During setup, tap Create New Profile.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

219

Tap the field labeled First & Last Name and enter your first and last
name. Tap Next.

Create a password for your profile. It must be between 6 and 20
characters long. You must enter it exactly the same way in the
Password and Re-enter Password fields. Note the following when
you enter your password:

• To enter an accented character or a symbol that doesn’t appear on
the keyboard: Press Sym
and scroll through the table to find the
symbol (see Enter characters from the symbols table).

Tap Next.

Enter a valid email address. Do the following:

• To type a number or symbol that appears above a letter on the
keyboard: Press Option
and then the key (see Enter alternate
keyboard characters).

• Enter the full address, for example: yourname@emailaccount.com.
• Enter the address accurately, with an @ sign and a period, and the
appropriate domain type at the end (com, net, and so on).
• Enter the exact password you use to access this email account.

220

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Creating your Palm profile: Unable to complete? Try this

If you verified your profile when you created it, do this:

Restart your smartphone and begin again by doing this:

On your computer, go to palm.com/palmprofile, select your
smartphone and AT&T, and then click Manage Palm Profile.

Click Forgot password?

Enter the email address you used to create your Palm profile and click
Next.

Enter the answer to your security question and click Next.

Enter your new password twice.

(Optional) Click Change Security Question, select a security
question, and enter your answer.

Click Reset Password.

Press and hold the power
Turn Off and Cancel.

button until you see two buttons—

Tap Turn Off. Wait for the smartphone to shut down completely.

If you never verified your profile or didn’t create a security question, the
process is a little different. Do this:
1

On your computer, go to palm.com/support, select your smartphone
and AT&T, and then click Manage Palm Profile.

Click Forgot password?

Enter the email address you used to create your Palm profile and click
Next.

Type the text you see in the white box and click Send Email.

Having trouble logging in to your Palm profile?

Open your email program on your computer, and open the email with
the subject How to reset your security information.

Remember, to log in to your Palm profile, you must enter the same email
address and password you used to create the profile.

Click the link in the email.

Enter your new password twice.

(Optional) Click Change Security Question, select a security
question, and enter your answer.

Press and hold the power

button and begin setup again.

If you are unable to create a profile, contact Palm Support and find out the
status of the Palm Profile server: Go to palm.com/support. Select your
smartphone and AT&T, and click Support Services. Select one of the
support options. There may be a temporary outage affecting your area.

TIP After you create your Palm profile, you get an email at the address you used to
create the profile. Click the link in the email message to verify your profile.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

221

Click Reset Password.

If that doesn’t work, or if you can’t remember your security question and
answer, contact Palm Support for help on gaining access to your profile: Go
to palm.com/support. Select your smartphone and AT&T, and click Support
Services. Select one of the support options.

Battery

WARNING Never remove the back cover of your Veer. The battery is built in to
your smartphone and is not removable.

The battery drains quickly

• If using the AC charger, make sure it is securely inserted into a working
outlet. Try a different outlet if one is available.
• If using a computer, try a different USB port on the computer if one is
available.
• Try a different compatible USB cable (with magnetic connector) if one is
available.

If the battery seems to drain quickly from normal use, see Maximizing
battery life for tips on improving battery life.

If you are trying to charge the battery using an HP Touchstone charging
dock, try these steps in sequence:

If you still experience problems and you frequently leave the Wi-Fi feature
on even when you are not using the smartphone, change the sleep setting
for Wi-Fi. See Put Wi-Fi to sleep when the screen is off for instructions.

• Make sure your smartphone is correctly positioned on the charging dock.
If the Veer is correctly positioned, a “Charging Battery” notification
appears, and a lightning bolt appears on the battery icon in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
• Make sure the slanted face of the charging doc and the silver dot on the
USB cable are facing up.
• If the charging dock came with a USB cable, make sure you are using that
cable, or a compatible cable approved by HP, to connect the charging
dock to the AC charger. Note that you cannot use the USB cable for your
Veer with a Touchstone charging dock. If the dock did not come with a
USB cable, you can purchase one separately.
• Make sure that you are using the AC charger that came with your
smartphone, or a compatible charger approved by HP.
• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected to the charging dock and
the AC charger. You may need to rock the connector on the USB cable
gently to fully insert it into the charging dock.

The battery doesn’t charge or doesn’t hold a charge
If you are trying to charge the battery using the USB cable, try these steps in
sequence:
• Make sure you are using the USB cable and AC charger that came with
your Veer, or a compatible cable or charger approved by HP.
• Make sure the magnetic end of the cable is securely attached to the
charger/connector on your smartphone. Make sure the other end is
securely connected to the AC charger or to a USB port on your computer.

222

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

NOTE The charging dock does not work when it is connected to a computer.

• Make sure the AC charger is securely inserted into a working outlet.
• If the outlet is connected to a light switch or power strip, make sure the
power is on.
• Try a different outlet if one is available.
• Try a different compatible USB cable if one is available.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

adjust this auto shut-off interval to be as long as three minutes (see Set the
interval for turning the screen off automatically). At first, the screen dims as
a power-saving measure. Just tap the screen to brighten it. Then, if your
smartphone remains inactive for the full interval you set, the screen turns
itself off. Press power
to turn the screen back on.
Follow these steps in sequence if you can’t turn the screen back on:
1

Make sure you have removed the protective cover that came attached
to your smartphone screen.

Make sure that there are no stickers covering any part of the front of
the smartphone.

To brighten the screen if it has dimmed, tap the screen.

To turn on the screen, do one of the following:

I need to replace the battery
Contact Palm or AT&T to get your smartphone repaired. Within the
warranty period, your battery should not need replacing. With good
treatment, your battery is likely to last for a couple of years. See Maximizing
battery life for helpful tips.

• Press power

. Drag

up to unlock the screen.

• Slide out the keyboard.

Screen and performance

• If the keyboard is out, press any key.
5

Look closely at the screen. If the display appears but is faint, try
adjusting the screen brightness (see Change screen brightness).

The screen appears blank

If you hold the smartphone up to your ear while on a call, the screen goes
dark. This is normal behavior. It prevents your accidentally tapping an item
on the screen and saves battery power. When you take the smartphone
away from your ear, the screen automatically turns back on, ready for use. If
the screen doesn’t turn on fast enough for you, tap the screen to wake it up.

If the problem persists, connect your smartphone to the AC charger
(see Charge the battery). If you see a faint display, try to restart your
smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

If you don’t see a display or the screen doesn’t respond to taps, press
and hold power
and slide the ringer switch three times to
restart your smartphone. Then wait until your smartphone completes
startup.

The same behavior occurs anytime you’re on a call and the smartphone
screen is placed near another surface. The screen turns on automatically (if
the smartphone is still on) when you move the smartphone away from the
other surface.
When the smartphone is on and idle, the screen first dims and then turns off.
This also is normal behavior, caused by the auto shut-off interval. You can

An application is not responding to taps
1

Make sure you have removed the screen protector that came attached
to your smartphone screen.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

223

Check to see if the screen has any cracks. If it does, contact Palm
Support for further assistance: Go to palm.com/support. Select your
smartphone and AT&T, and click Support Services. Select one of the
support options.

Make sure the screen is not locked. Press power
to unlock the screen.

and drag

Tap the center of the gesture area. If the application screen minimizes
to a card, throw the card off the top of the screen to close the app.

If the screen does not respond to taps at all, press and hold
power
and slide the ringer switch three times to restart your
smartphone. Then wait until your smartphone completes startup.

If this does not solve the problem, see 6Ts: Ways to get your HP Veer
4G working again for additional steps to try.

Applications are running slowly
NOTE Be sure that any third-party applications you install are compatible with
HP webOS. Applications written for earlier Palm smartphones using the Palm OS
by ACCESS operating system or Windows Mobile are not compatible with your
Veer. If you can try a free version of the software before purchasing it, you can test
it first to make sure it works properly.

Tap the center of the gesture area to display Card view.

Scroll through the cards and note how many applications are open.

Close any application you are not using by throwing its card off the top
of the screen.

If the problem persists after you close apps you are not using, restart your
smartphone (see Restart your smartphone). If this does not solve the
problem, see 6Ts: Ways to get your HP Veer 4G working again for additional
steps to try.

224

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

My gestures in the gesture area aren’t working
• Some gestures begin in the gesture area and end in the touchscreen, and
vice versa. Crossing the border between the two areas with your finger is
crucial to making the gesture successfully. Likewise, the drag gesture for
opening a menu begins at the top of the smartphone, above the screen,
and crosses down onto the screen.

* Gesture area

• If you cannot make the back gesture, check to see if you have the next/
previous app gestures turned on (see Turn advanced gestures on/off). If so,
you need to make a short swipe left for the back gesture, and a full swipe
right or left for the next or previous open app.
• Likewise, you can’t use the next/previous app gestures unless you turn
them on (see Turn advanced gestures on/off).
• To check if you’re making the gesture correctly, see Use gestures: tap,
swipe, drag, flick, pinch.

There are small icons in the lower-right corner of the screen
Those icons represent notifications that you have not opened or dismissed.
For most types of notifications, if you do not tap a notification after a few
seconds, it becomes an icon in the lower-right portion of the screen. If you
see one or more icons, tap anywhere on the bottom of the screen to display
your notifications.

Phone

The person on the other end of the line hears an echo

Signal strength is weak
Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work,
and play. Then you know when to expect signal-strength issues.
•
•
•
•
•

If you’re standing, move about 10 feet (3 meters) in any direction.
If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.
Outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
In a vehicle, move your smartphone so that it’s level with a window.

• Try decreasing the volume on your smartphone—whether you are using
the speaker or the earpiece—to avoid coupling or feedback on the other
person’s end.
• Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back into
the microphone.
• If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your smartphone lying on a
flat surface, try turning the smartphone face down (screen facing the
surface).

I hear my own voice echo
Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his
or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.

My smartphone doesn’t connect to the mobile network
• Try the suggestions in Signal strength is weak to improve a weak signal.
• Turn off the phone and turn it on again by turning airplane mode on and
off (see Turn your smartphone on/off).
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

I see five bars in the signal-strength icon, but I still can’t connect
to the network
The signal-strength
icon always displays five bars. Your signal strength
is indicated by the number of bars that are shaded white.
If most or all of the bars are white
If most or all of the bars are gray
coverage.

, you are in an area of strong coverage.
, you are in an area of weak or no

My voice is too quiet on the other end
• Be sure to position the microphone, which is on the lower-left side of the
gesture area, close to your mouth. Make sure you are not covering the
microphone with your cheek or chin.
• Check the signal-strength
icon. If the signal is weak, try to find an
area with better coverage (see Signal strength is weak).

I hear static or interference
Check the signal-strength
icon. If the signal is weak, try to find an area
with better coverage (see Signal strength is weak).
If you’re using a hands-free device enabled with Bluetooth® wireless
technology, try the following:
• Move your smartphone closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your smartphone and the hands-free
device increases. The effective range for a hands-free device varies among
manufacturers.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

225

• Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the
smartphone and your hands-free device. For example, move your
smartphone to the same side of your body as your hands-free device.

My smartphone seems to turn off by itself

My smartphone doesn’t vibrate
• Make sure the ringer switch is turned on. If you can see the red next to
the switch, the ringer switch is turned off. Slide the ringer switch on. (The
ringer switch needs to be on to test vibrate mode.)
• Make sure the vibrate settings are turned on:
• Open Sounds & Ringtones
.

Your smartphone has a power-saving feature that’s set to turn off the screen
if it has been idle for one minute. You can change the auto-shut off interval
(see Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically).

• Under Ringer Switch Off, tap Rings & Alerts, and then tap
Vibrate.

If you restart your smartphone, wireless services, such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth, are automatically turned on if they were on before the restart.
However, if the smartphone can’t determine if a wireless service was on
before the restart, that service does not automatically turn on (see Turn your
smartphone on/off).

• Tap, hold, and drag the Ringtone Volume slider in either direction. The
smartphone should vibrate, and the ringtone should play.

If the problem persists and you’re using third-party applications, see HP
webOS App Catalog for additional suggestions.

I am working with a support agent and need to find my IMEI
number

• Under Ringer Switch On, tap Rings & Alerts, and then tap Sound
& Vibrate.

Do one of the following:

My smartphone doesn’t ring
• Make sure the ringer switch is turned on. If you can see the red next to
the switch, the ringer switch is turned off. Slide the ringer switch on.
• Check the ringtone volume. Open Sounds & Ringtones
and drag the
Ringtone Volume slider to the right to increase the ringtone volume.
• If you are using a ringtone you installed, open Sounds & Ringtones
and tap Ringtone. Tap the default ringtone for your smartphone. If
selecting the default ringtone solves the problem, the ringtone you
installed is not working properly. Delete the ringtone you installed from
your smartphone by following the steps in Delete files and folders using
USB Drive mode.

• Slide out the keyboard and look at the back of the smartphone. The IMEI
number is located on the portion of the back that’s behind the screen.
• Open Device Info
, tap More Info, and tap Hardware. The IMEI
number is listed under Network.
• Open Phone
and enter *#06# on the dial pad or the keyboard.
Tap
.

Hands-free devices
I can’t make or receive calls using a Bluetooth® hands-free
device
• If you have earphones connected to your smartphone, disconnect them.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

226

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

• Verify that the hands-free device is compatible with your smartphone. Go
to palm.com/support to see a list of supported devices.
NOTE This list contains only devices that have been tested for compatibility. It is
possible that a device that does not appear on the list may be compatible with
your smartphone.

• Make sure that the Bluetooth feature is turned on (see Turn the Bluetooth
feature on/off).
• Make sure that your smartphone is paired with your hands-free device,
and the hands-free device appears in the Devices list (see Connect with a
paired device).
• Make sure that the volume on the hands-free device and on your
smartphone is set loud enough to hear.
• Make sure your Bluetooth hands-free device is charged and turned on.
• Make sure that your smartphone is within range of the hands-free device.
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental
conditions, which include the absence of obstacles, radio interference
from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
• Make sure that you are away from other devices using the 2.4GHz radio
frequency, such as cordless phones and microwaves. If this is impossible,
move the smartphone closer to the hands-free device.

• Try moving your smartphone closer to the hands-free device. Audio
quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone and the
hands-free device increases. The effective range for a hands-free device
varies among manufacturers.
• Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the
smartphone and your hands-free device. Items such as furniture, people,
or walls that are in the path between the headset and the smartphone will
impair audio quality.

Some features of my hands-free device don’t work with my
smartphone
• Check the compatibility list at palm.com/support to ensure that your
device is compatible with your Veer.
• Even if the hands-free device is compatible with your smartphone, your
smartphone may not support all the features of the device. Check the
documentation that came with your hands-free device or the
manufacturer’s website for feature-compatibility information between
the device and your smartphone.

Synchronization
I lost the connection between my smartphone and my
Bluetooth headset
If your headset isn’t working, delete the existing pairing (see Delete a device)
and create a new one (see Set up and use a Bluetooth® hands-free device).

I hear static or interference when using my hands-free device
• Be sure your hands-free device has a sufficient battery charge.
• Move to a quieter location to reduce environmental noise.
• Try wearing the smartphone and the headset on the same side of the
body.

I don’t want to sync calendar or contact information with my
online account—just email
For most online account providers that sync with more than one app—for
example, Google—if you do not want to sync an application with that
provider’s online account, you can remove that application from the account
using the Accounts application. The online account continues to sync with
any other related applications.
1

Open Accounts

Tap the account name.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

227

To change which applications are associated with the account: For
each app listed, tap On or Off.

You can also remove an application from online account sync from within
the application itself.
1

Open the application.

Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.

Tap the account name.

Tap Remove Account, and then tap Remove [app name] Account.

I want to sync with Outlook or Palm Desktop by ACCESS
software on my computer
Your Veer can synchronize with select online services so that you can store
and sync your info in online accounts (see Manage online accounts). You
can access your data even when you are not able to make a connection to
the web because your data is stored on your smartphone.
If you have data from a Palm smartphone in Outlook or Palm Desktop by
ACCESS, you can do a one-way transfer of the data from the desktop
application to your smartphone (see Export data from a desktop organizer
on your computer). After the transfer of this data to your smartphone, you
can assign this data to sync with an online account. You can also assign it to
the Palm profile account. Data in this account is backed up to your Palm
profile daily, so you can retrieve it if you need to reset your smartphone. But
it is not a true sync because you cannot change your Palm profile data
anywhere except on your smartphone.
If your desktop Outlook synchronizes with an Exchange server using
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, you cannot do a one-way export of that
Outlook data to your smartphone. However, you can synchronize the

228

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Outlook data wirelessly with your smartphone through your Exchange
account.
TIP A number of third-party applications (sold separately) are available that let

you synchronize data on your Veer with a desktop application. Visit palm.com/
sync-solutions to learn more.

I have an Exchange account at work, but my data is not being
downloaded to my smartphone
Check with your system administrator to obtain or verify the name of the
mail server that offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system.
If you cannot obtain the name of this server (some companies do not give it
out because they do not want wireless access to their servers), you cannot
synchronize with your Exchange account.
If your company requires you to change your password for accessing your
Exchange account, you must change the password on your smartphone (see
Change account login settings).

I entered the settings to sync with Exchange, but I can’t
synchronize with my company’s Exchange server
Check with your system administrator to find out if a systemwide locking
policy is in place.

A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem
on the server
There is a temporary problem with the server, or the server may be
temporarily overloaded. Try again later, and if the problem persists, contact
your system administrator.

A notification tells me that there is not enough free memory to
synchronize
1

Tap the center of the gesture area to display Card view.

Scroll through the cards and note how many applications are open.

Close any application you are not using by throwing its card off the top
of the screen.

If the problem persists, see Making room on your smartphone for other
suggestions.

Data connections
I don’t know if I have a data connection
The following icons appear in the title bar to indicate whether data services
are available. If you don’t see one of these icons, you don’t have a data
connection:
Table 1. Data connection icons
Icon

Description
Your smartphone is connected to a GPRS data network.

A notification tells me that the server could not be reached

Your smartphone is connected to an EDGE data network.

Make sure your smartphone is connected either to the AT&T network or to
a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the title bar).

Your smartphone is connected to a 3G data network.

If you have a network connection and receive this notification, it means your
smartphone had to wait too long to connect to the Exchange server. The
connection may have been lost, the server may be temporarily overloaded,
or the server may have encountered an internal error. Check your Exchange
server name and proxy server settings (see Set up email: Microsoft
Exchange and Lotus Notes), and try again later.

Your smartphone is connected to a Wi-Fi network. You can
open a data connection.

A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem
with [item type] [item name]

Your smartphone is connected to a 4G data network.

KEY TERM GPRS (General Packet Radio Service): A mobile Internet
connectivity technology that allows persistent data connections. (Additional
charges may apply.)
KEY TERM EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution): An enhanced
version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to three times faster than
standard GPRS connections, with rates up to 236.8Kbps. (Additional charges may
apply.)

There was an error while synchronizing a single item. This error can usually
be corrected only by deleting the item that caused the error. If you sync
again to see if the error persists, be aware that items causing this type of
error are skipped and do not show up again.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

229

I can’t make a data connection over the AT&T network
For help with data connections over a Wi-Fi network, see I can’t make a
Wi-Fi connection from my home network. or I can’t make a Wi-Fi
connection from a public or corporate network.
• Turn off Wi-Fi (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off). A Wi-Fi connection can prevent a
phone service data connection.
• Make sure you are in an area with good signal strength (see Signal
strength is weak).
• Check to see if you have data services enabled. Open Phone
, open
the application menu, and tap Preferences & Accounts. Under
Network, make sure Data Usage is set to On.
• If you are in roaming coverage, check to see if you have data roaming
enabled. Open Phone
, open the application menu, and tap
Preferences & Accounts. Under Network, tap Data Roaming, and tap
Enabled. Note that additional charges may apply if you enable data
roaming.
• Turn off the phone and turn it on again (see Turn wireless services off
(airplane mode)).
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).
• If you are still having problems, contact AT&T.

Email
I have problems using my account
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after
you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure (see Set up email)
and are experiencing problems using the account, verify that the account
complies with your email provider’s requirements:
• Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
• If you changed your password in an online email account, you must
change the password on your smartphone (see Change account login
settings).

230

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

• Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their
service. Check with AT&T to find out whether any provider-specific
requirements exist.
• Make sure your email provider, ISP, or wireless service provider allows you
to access email on a smartphone via POP or IMAP. (Some providers do
not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade for you to
access email on a smartphone.)
• Email provider settings may change. If your email account was working
but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your email
provider to find out whether any of the account settings have changed.
You may need to manually change some email settings on your
smartphone (see Enter advanced account settings).

I have problems sending and receiving email
• Make sure that your data connection to your mail server or email service
provider has not been interrupted (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).
• Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common, due to
server problems or poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending
or receiving mail for an extended period of time, check with your ISP or
email service provider to verify that the service is working properly, and
check with AT&T for outage information in your area. Tap the mail header
in your account Inbox to see the last time the account was updated.
• For problems sending and receiving email using an Exchange email
account, see the following sections:
• I have an Exchange account at work, but my data is not being
downloaded to my smartphone
• I entered the settings to sync with Exchange, but I can’t synchronize
with my company’s Exchange server
• A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem on
the server
• A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem with
[item type] [item name]

I have problems sending email (IMAP and POP accounts)
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try the
following:
• Turn on authentication (see Set up email when automatic setup fails).
Many service providers require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use
their SMTP servers for outgoing mail.
• Turn off Wi-Fi if you are connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Turn Wi-Fi on/
off). This allows your smartphone to send email over the phone network
instead. Some Wi-Fi networks prevent outgoing mail messages.
• Confirm the port number for the outgoing mail server. Many ISPs require
a specific port number, and that number may differ from the default port
number.
• Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail (see
Set up email when automatic setup fails). Many ISPs, such as cable
companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network
to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always
receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send email, you
must send it through another server. Check with your email service
provider for the correct outgoing mail server name.

You can change the setting to download only one or two days’ worth of
messages. If you select one of these options, any messages older than one
or two days are deleted from your Inbox. You can also change the setting to
download all messages regardless of the date, in which case all messages
continue to appear in your Inbox (see Enter advanced account settings).

I have trouble sending or receiving attachments
• Email attachments smaller than 150KB are downloaded automatically. All
other attachments have to be downloaded manually by tapping the
attachment name in the email. You may need to tap the attachment to
complete receiving it.
• Sometimes an attachment to an email may prevent the email from being
sent. The reason may be related to the account, an account setting, or the
file. To determine whether this is the case, try sending the email without
the attachment, or try sending the email from a different email account. If
a different account works, check the settings of the problem account. If
sending the email without the attachment works, also check the account
settings, and try sending the email with another file, in case the first file
was damaged.

I can send but not receive email (IMAP accounts)

Messaging

Some IMAP email providers don’t support the setting to receive email As
items arrive. Check with your email provider to see if this situation applies
to your account. If your smartphone is set to receive email as it arrives, try
changing the Sync setting for Get Email to 5 or 10 minutes (see Enter
advanced account settings).

I can’t send or receive text or multimedia messages

After I receive messages, older messages disappear from my
Inbox
When email sync takes place, by default, the last three days’ worth of email
messages is downloaded from your mail server to your Inbox. All messages
older than three days are removed from your Inbox; they are not deleted on
the server, however.

• Make sure that the phone is on (see Turn wireless services off (airplane
mode)).
• For multimedia messages, do the following:
• Contact AT&T to verify that your plan includes messaging services,
that these services have been correctly activated on your
smartphone, and that they are available at your location. (AT&T
should be able to tell you if messaging services have been
experiencing transmission delays.)
• Turn off the phone by turning on airplane mode, and then turn off
airplane mode (see Turn wireless services off (airplane mode)).

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

231

• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).
• Make sure you are in an area with good signal strength (see Signal
strength is weak).
• Make sure you have a data connection over the AT&T network. Note
that you cannot send or receive multimedia messages over a Wi-Fi
connection (see I don’t know if I have a data connection).
• Check to see if you have data services enabled. Open Phone
,
open the application menu, and tap Preference & Accounts. Under
Network, make sure Data Usage is set to On.
• If you are in roaming coverage, check to see if you have data
roaming enabled. Open Phone
, open the application menu, and
tap Preferences & Accounts. Under Network, tap Data Roaming
and tap Enabled.
• Make sure the file you are attaching or receiving is of a supported file
type (see Create and send a text or multimedia message or Receive
and view text and multimedia messages).
• Some wireless service providers have limits on the size of
attachments to multimedia messages—check with AT&T to see if
there are any limits. To check the size of a video you want to attach:
Open Videos
and tap Video roll. Videos are listed by date and
time, with the length and size of the video. To check the size of a
photo you want to attach: Put the smartphone in USB Drive mode,
navigate on the computer to the DCIM/100PALM folder, and
check the size of the photo (see Copy files and folders using USB
Drive mode for information on using USB Drive mode).
• If possible, contact the recipient of the message, and make sure the
receiving device can handle the type of message you’re sending.
• If a message arrives but does not display a notification, make sure
message notifications are turned on (see Customize messaging
notifications).

I can’t set up an instant messaging (IM) account
• To set up an IM account on your smartphone, you must already have the
IM account established online. If you don’t, first set up the account online.
• If you are logged into the account from another location, log out from that
location and try setting up the account on your smartphone again.

232

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

• If you are trying to set up a Yahoo! IM account, note that you can have
only one Yahoo! IM account on your smartphone at a time. If you already
have a Yahoo IM! account on your smartphone, you must remove it
before you can set up a different one (see Use the Accounts application to
edit or delete an online account).
• Make sure you have a data connection (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).
• Verify you have an Internet connection by going to a website (see Go to a
website or Search for a website).
• Make sure the account you want to set up is supported. See Set up an
instant messaging (IM) account for information. If the account you want
is not listed, or is not available in HP webOS App Catalog when you tap
Find More, the account is not available at this time. Be sure to check
back—your webOS smartphone periodically adds support for new
account types.

I can’t send or receive instant messages
• Make sure you have a data connection (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).
• Contact AT&T to verify that your plan includes messaging services, that
these services have been correctly activated on your smartphone, and
that they are available at your location. (AT&T should be able to tell you if
messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays.)
• Check to see if you have data services enabled. Open Phone
, open
the application menu, and tap Preference & Accounts. Under Network,
make sure Data Usage is set to On.
• If you are in roaming coverage, check to see if you have data roaming
enabled. Open Phone
, open the application menu, and tap
Preferences & Accounts. Under Network, tap Data Roaming and tap
Enabled.
• Make sure your instant messaging (IM) account is properly set up (see Set
up an instant messaging (IM) account).
• Make sure you are logged into your IM account (see Sign in to an IM
account).
• If a message arrives but does not display a notification, make sure
message notifications are turned on (see Customize messaging
notifications).

• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

Wi-Fi
I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from my home network
For help with data connections over the AT&T network, see I can’t make a
data connection over the AT&T network.
• Turn off Wi-Fi, and then turn it on again (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
• If the smartphone does not automatically connect to a known network,
select your Wi-Fi network from the list. If the smartphone does not detect
your Wi-Fi network, continue to the next step.
• Try connecting to the Wi-Fi network with another computer or device.
• If you cannot connect using the other device, there may be a
problem with your Internet connection or wireless router. Unplug
the modem and the wireless router and reboot the modem. Once
the modem re-establishes an Internet connection, plug in the
wireless router and try connecting again. If you still can't connect
with the other device or computer, contact your Internet Service
Provider.
• If you can connect with the other device, but not with the
smartphone, continue with the next step.
• Does your Wi-Fi network use a compatible router? The smartphone is
compatible only with 802.11b and 802.11g wireless protocols and cannot
connect to an 802.11a or 802.11n network unless it is backwards
compatible with 802.11b/g.
• Does your Wi-Fi network use the WEP security option? If yes, you must
enter the passcode in hex characters on your smartphone instead of in
alphanumeric characters. You can locate the hex passcode by logging into
the Wi-Fi router. The router has several hex passcodes; you must locate
and use the passcode associated with the key index. Because each router
has a unique method to perform this task, consult your router
documentation for detailed instructions.
• Does your Wi-Fi network use MAC address filtering? MAC address
filtering is a common method of securing a Wi-Fi network. The filter list is

similar to a guest list at a party; if you're not on the list, you can't come in.
The filter list (allowing access to your network) lives on your Wi-Fi router.
If your Wi-Fi network uses MAC address filtering, you need to log in to the
Wi-Fi router and add your smartphone’s MAC address to the access
control list. Because each router has a unique method to perform this task,
consult your router documentation for detailed instructions. To find your
smartphone’s MAC address: Open Device Info
and tap More Info.
The MAC address is the Wi-Fi hex number under Phone.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from a public or corporate
network
For help with data connections over the AT&T network, see I can’t make a
data connection over the AT&T network.
• Turn off Wi-Fi, and then turn it on again (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
• If the smartphone does not automatically connect to a known network,
do one of the following:
• Select the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to from the list.
• If you’re trying to connect to a secure network with a hidden name,
ask the system administrator for the info needed to connect to the
network.
• If you’re not trying to connect to a secure network with a hidden
name and there are no Wi-Fi networks detected, there are no Wi-Fi
networks available for the smartphone to connect to. Try moving to
another location and attempting the connection again.
• Try connecting to the Wi-Fi network with another computer or device.
• If you cannot connect using the other device, there may be a
problem with the Wi-Fi network’s Internet connection or wireless
router. Report the problem to the system administrator.
• If you can connect with the other device, but not with the
smartphone, continue with the next step.
• Does the Wi-Fi network use a compatible router? The smartphone is
compatible only with 802.11b and 802.11g wireless protocols and cannot
connect to an 802.11a or 802.11n network unless it is backwards

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

233

compatible with 802.11b/g. Check with the system administrator (who
may be, for example, the librarian or the person behind the counter at the
coffee shop) to verify that the Wi-Fi network supports the 802.11b or
802.11g wireless protocol and that it is working correctly. Also find out if a
password is required in order to access this network.
• Does the Wi-Fi network use the WEP security option? When using the
WEP security option, you must enter the passcode in hex characters on
your smartphone instead of in alphanumeric characters. The hex passcode
is stored in the Wi-Fi router software. Work with the system administrator
to locate the passcode associated with the key index.
• Does the Wi-Fi network use MAC address filtering? MAC address filtering
is a common method of securing a Wi-Fi network. The filter list is similar
to a guest list at a party; if you're not on the list, you can't come in. The
filter list (allowing access to the Wi-Fi network) lives on the Wi-Fi router.
This list is maintained by the system administrator and you must provide
the administrator with your smartphone’s MAC address and request to be
added to the list. To find your smartphone’s MAC address: Open Device
Info
and tap More Info. The MAC address is the Wi-Fi hex number
under Phone.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

I am trying to connect my smartphone to my Wi-Fi network
and need to find the smartphone’s MAC address

• I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from my home network
• I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from a public or corporate network
• Clear the cache in Web Preferences. Open Web
and open the
application menu. Tap Preferences, and then tap Clear Cache. This
ensures that pages are viewed directly from the Internet and not from a
saved copy of the page on the smartphone. Then close Web
and
reopen it.
• To confirm you have an Internet connection, try to view a web page
you’ve loaded before.
• After confirming your Internet connection, try to view the page again. If it
comes up blank, tap
.
• Some websites redirect simple web addresses given to the public to actual
web addresses that are more complex (for example, if you enter the
address www.palm.com/support, it may actually go to the web
address http://www.palm.com/us/support). If the Web app can’t follow the
redirect, enter the web address in a desktop browser and read the actual
web address in the address bar. Then enter the actual address in Web at
the top of the screen.
• If a website appears static or is missing content, look for a Skip button, a
link to a mobile version of the site, or a link to a basic HTML version of the
site that your smartphone can render properly.
• If you’re still having trouble, the page may contain elements that are
not supported by the browser, such as Shockwave, Silverlight, VBScript,
WML script, and other plug-ins.

Open Device Info
, tap More Info, and tap Hardware. Under Phone,
the number listed to the right of Wi-Fi is your smartphone’s MAC address.

An image or map is too small on my screen

Web
I can’t access a web page
• Make sure you have a data connection. See I don’t know if I have a data
connection for details. If you do not have a data connection, see the topic
that matches your situation:
• I can’t make a data connection over the AT&T network

234

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Do either of the following:
• To switch to landscape mode to see more of the image, turn the
smartphone on its side.
• To zoom in on the image, pinch out or double-tap the image.

A secure site refuses to permit a transaction
Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Contact the
site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your
smartphone’s web browser.

having to remember where you stored it. Even though the information is
visible in one view, the sources of that information are kept separate.
In Calendar, to see events from just one calendar, tap the word All in the
upper-right corner of the screen and pick the account you want to see (see
Change the Calendar display).

Calendar and Contacts

In Contacts, the list view shows all contacts from all accounts. You can,
however, see what data comes from which account by opening the contact
and tapping Edit. If you want to unlink contacts, see Unlink a contact.

I haven’t entered any contacts or calendar events on my
smartphone, but when I open those apps, I see entries

You can also keep inbox views separate in Email: Turn off the smart folder
for All Inboxes (see Set email preferences), then make the inboxes of your
individual accounts favorites so that they’re always easy to see in Account
List view (see Add an email folder as a favorite).

The entries you see displayed in Calendar or Contacts have been
downloaded to your smartphone from one of your online accounts such as
Google or Exchange. In the Accounts application, as well as in Email,
Calendar, or Contacts, you can set up a relationship to wirelessly sync data
with one of these accounts. When you do so, you specify the apps that
should download data from that account. So, for example, you could set up
your Google account in Email, and choose whether to also download
contacts and calendar events. If you choose to download Google calendar
info, your smartphone’s calendar automatically displays events entered in
your Google calendar—even though you haven’t opened the app yet.
You can remove an online account from an application so that that app no
longer syncs with that account (see Use the Accounts application to edit or
delete an online account, Delete an online account from Contacts, Delete an
online account from Calendar, or Delete an email account).
AT&T also adds some contacts to your smartphone.

My personal and work contact and calendar information is
getting merged into a single view—I’d rather keep them
separate
The HP Synergy feature on your smartphone displays information from
several sources in a single view, so you can access your info quickly, without

Some of my contact information is missing
NOTE Contacts associated with a Microsoft Exchange server sync as items arrive.
Items for Google and other online accounts are synced from every few hours to up
to once a day. If the contact is available in your online account, it will show up on
your smartphone within a day, as long as you are in a good wireless coverage area.
Contacts created in your Palm profile account are backed up daily.

NOTE The Data Transfer Assistant does not transfer contact notes larger than
1MB.

• Verify that your contact information is correct in your online account.
• If the missing contact is from a Google account, make sure the contact is
in your My Contacts list in Google. If your Google contacts are only
partially synchronizing, check for contact names that start with a special
character (like @,*, or #) instead of a letter. Delete the nonalphabetic
character from the contact’s name. Synchronize again to see if all of your
contacts are listed.
• If the missing contact is from an Exchange account, make sure the email
account is set up as an Exchange account, not a POP or IMAP account.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

235

An Exchange account that is set up as a POP or IMAP account cannot
sync contacts (see Change account login settings).
• If the missing contact is from Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo! note the
following:
• Facebook and LinkedIn contact info comes from the profile of the
Facebook friend or LinkedIn contact. Because Facebook.com and
LinkedIn.com do not allow you to change another user’s profile, any
changes you make on your smartphone do not affect the contact’s
info on the web. When a Facebook friend or LinkedIn contact makes
changes to his or her profile, these changes are transferred to your
smartphone the next time the account syncs.
• Yahoo! accounts support a one-way transfer of Yahoo! contact info
from the web to the smartphone. The info on your smartphone
updates each time the account syncs, but Yahoo! accounts do not
provide two-way synchronization.
• If you make changes or add to a Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo!
contact entry on your smartphone, the smartphone creates a new
contact in the default Contacts account, adds the changes to this
new contact, and then links the new contact to the original
Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo! contact. The changes sync with the
default Contacts account, not with your Facebook, LinkedIn, or
Yahoo! account.
• Changes made on Facebook.com, LinkedIn.com, or Yahoo.com are
reflected on your smartphone every 24 hours, or after you manually
sync.
• If the missing contact is from a LinkedIn account, make sure the contact is
in your direct network. The smartphone does not sync second- and
third-level connections.
• If the missing contact information is from another account that is
compatible with the HP Synergy feature, you need to contact the
developer for help.
• Sync your Contacts accounts (see Manually synchronize Contacts with
your online accounts).
• Set the default Contacts account (see Customize Contacts).
• Search to locate the contact information (see Find a contact)
• Check other contacts that have the same phone number or email address
to make sure the missing contact information has not been improperly
linked to another contact. If you have contacts with matching information,
tap the contact name at the top of the screen to display any linked

236

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

contacts. If you find the missing contact, tap it, and then tap Unlink this
profile. The unlinked contact now appears as a separate entry in
Contacts.

My contact data is in the wrong field
• If your incorrect contact data is being synced from an online account,
update the contact information in your online account. If your incorrect
contact data is being backed up with your Palm profile, update your
contact information on your smartphone.
• Manually synchronize Contacts (see Manually synchronize Contacts with
your online accounts).

I have duplicate contacts
• If the duplicate contacts are from the same source—if, for example, both
contacts are Google contacts or both contacts are Exchange contacts—
link the duplicate contacts (see Link a contact).
• Delete one of the duplicate records from the source, such as Google or
Exchange, or delete the duplicate from the smartphone (see Delete a
contact).
• Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts (see Manually
synchronize Contacts with your online accounts).

I started entering a contact’s name in Card view or the
Launcher, but I’m not seeing the person in the results
• With Just Type, you need to enter at least two letters before contact
matches are returned.
• You may need to scroll down the list to find the match you want.
• If you still don’t see the match you want, try typing a few more characters
of the person’s name.

I can’t synchronize Calendar events
Different accounts sync events for different periods of time into the past and
future. Note the following to be sure the information you want to sync is
available for the account:
•
•
•
•

Google accounts sync events one month back and two months forward.
Yahoo! accounts sync events one month back and three months forward.
Exchange accounts sync events two weeks back and unlimited forward.
If you are trying to synchronize with a desktop application using the USB
cable, note that webOS does not support synchronization of HP webOS
smartphones with desktop software such as Palm Desktop software or
desktop Outlook. Instead, webOS smartphones synchronize wirelessly
with online services such as Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. If
you are trying to synchronize with a third-party desktop application,
contact the application developer for support.
• Make sure you have a data connection (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).
• Set up your online account to sync on your smartphone if you have not
already done so (see How do I get events into Calendar?).
IMPORTANT If you want to add a Google Calendar account on your
smartphone, make sure your Gmail account includes Google Calendar before you
add your Google account on your smartphone. By default, Gmail accounts do not
automatically include Google Calendar. If you don’t already have a Gmail account,
go to mail.google.com and create one. To add Google Calendar to your Gmail
account, go to google.com/calendar and log in using your Gmail account name
and password. When prompted, add Google Calendar to your account.

• Verify the default calendar account. When a new calendar event is created
on the smartphone, it syncs with the default account (see Customize
Calendar).
• Manually sync Calendar (see Manually synchronize Calendar with your
online accounts).
NOTE You should see a notification at the bottom of your screen when the
account starts to sync. You may have to wait up to 30 minutes after a sync
operation starts for your data to appear if the data is located in an online account.

• Delete the account on the smartphone, and then re-create it (see Use the
Accounts application to edit or delete an online account and Use the
Accounts application to set up an online account).

Some of my calendar information is missing
• If the missing calendar information is from an Exchange account, make
sure the email account is set up as an Exchange account, not a POP or
IMAP account. An Exchange account that is set up as a POP or IMAP
account cannot sync calendar information (see Change account login
settings).
• Verify that your calendar information is correct in your online account.
• Verify that the calendar information is correct on the smartphone.
• Note the following and determine if the missing information is actually
available for syncing:
• Google accounts sync events one month back and two months
forward.
• Yahoo! accounts sync events one month back and three months
forward.
• Exchange accounts sync events two weeks back and unlimited
forward.
• Sync your Calendar accounts (see Manually synchronize Calendar with
your online accounts).
• Set the Default Account (see Customize Calendar).

My calendar data is in the wrong field
• If your incorrect calendar data is being synced from an online account,
update the calendar information in your online account. If your incorrect
calendar data is being backed up with your Palm profile, update your
calendar information on your smartphone.
• Manually synchronize Calendar (see Manually synchronize Calendar with
your online accounts).
• Open Date & Time
and check whether the online account and the
smartphone are using the same time zone setting. If not, change the time
zone either on the smartphone or in the online account so that the time
zones match.
Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

237

I have duplicate calendar events
• If the events are from an online account, delete the account from your
smartphone (see Use the Accounts application to edit or delete an online
account), log in to the account on your computer and delete any duplicate
data, and then add the account to your smartphone again (see Use the
Accounts application to set up an online account).
• If the events are in your Palm profile account, turn off Backup (see Erase
Palm profile information from the server), delete the duplicate calendar
events on your smartphone (see Delete an event), and then turn on
Backup again (see Manually back up information to your Palm profile).

Calendar notifications are not working
• Make sure that the ringer switch is on and that the ringer switch volume is
set to at least 50% (see Set ringer switch settings).
• If the event is in an online account, make sure that the event exists in the
online account on your computer, and that a reminder is set for the event.
Note that it can take up to 30 minutes for an event to synchronize from an
online account to your smartphone.
• Make sure an alarm is set for the event in Calendar on your smartphone
(see Add an alarm to an event).
• Make sure that the Event Reminders preference is set to System Sound
or Ringtone (see Customize event notification sounds).

Camera
I can’t open the camera or take pictures or videos
• Close all apps, including Camera if it is open, and then open Camera.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

238

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Photos, Videos, and Music
I can’t upload my picture
• To upload a picture to a web service such as Facebook or Photobucket,
you must already have an account with the service, you must have the
account set up on your smartphone, and you must have access to the
Internet on your smartphone.
• To upload to Facebook, you must have installed the Facebook app from
App Catalog on your smartphone (see Download a free application).
• For information about setting up online picture accounts on your
smartphone, see Set up an online pictures account on your smartphone.

I can’t send or upload my video
• If you create a long video and then edit it to shorten it, the editing
processing must be complete before you email, upload, or send the video
with a multimedia message. If the process was not complete, the upload
fails or is incomplete.
• To upload videos of any size, you need access to the Internet from the
smartphone. To confirm that you have an Internet connection, open a
website (see Go to a website or Search for a website).
• Video files can be large. For example, a 1-minute video can be more than
10MB. Many email providers have limits on how large a file you can send.
Check with AT&T to see if there is a limit on how large a file you can send.
• To upload to Facebook, you must have installed the Facebook app from
App Catalog on your smartphone, and you must already have an account
set up on the Facebook site. Facebook has a limit of 2 minutes or 100MB
for unverified accounts, and 20 minutes or 1GB for verified accounts (see
Download a free application). You also need to add the Facebook account
from the Contacts app, not the Photos app. If you added the Facebook
account from the Photos app, first delete the Facebook app (see Use the
Accounts application to edit or delete an online account), and then add it
from the Contacts app (see Customize Contacts).
• To upload a video to YouTube, you must already have an account set up
on the YouTube site. YouTube has an upload limit of 10 minutes or 2GB.

Videos have poor quality during playback
• Low memory on your smartphone may cause video files to play with poor
quality. Close any other open cards and play the video again.
• Try viewing the same file on your computer and observe the video quality.
If the video quality is poor when played on the computer, the file may be
corrupted. Download a new copy of the file to the computer and try
again. If the new file still won’t play on the computer, contact the content
provider for information on the quality of the files.

Amazon MP3
I bought a song from Amazon MP3, but the download process
was interrupted
• Open Amazon MP3
and tap Downloads. Your music downloads are
listed on this screen. Tap one to resume downloading.
• Close and reopen the Amazon MP3 application.
• Restart your smartphone (see Restart your smartphone).

I bought a song from Amazon MP3, but it isn’t showing up on
my smartphone
Occasionally, the download process may be interrupted, so a song you
purchased may not be successfully downloaded to your smartphone. To
confirm the purchase and download of a song, log in to your Amazon
account from your computer. If the song shows up there as purchased and
downloaded, contact Amazon support and let them know you never
received your song.
You can also check the USB drive storage on your smartphone to see if the
file is there (see Copy files and folders using USB Drive mode for information
on using USB Drive mode).

HP webOS App Catalog

NOTE HP supports finding, purchasing, downloading, installing, updating, and
deleting App Catalog applications. The app developer cannot assist with any of
these functions.

I can’t find the app I want to download
There are several sources of applications for your Veer:
App Catalog. App Catalog is located in the Launcher on webOS
smartphones. Applications that have been reviewed by HP and meet
specific development standards are included in App Catalog searches. They
appear with a blue background on the App Catalog details page for the
application.
Web distribution. Web distribution apps are located on the Internet and
can be found by visiting precentral.net. Web-distributed apps are delivered
to the smartphone via links and are downloaded and installed using App
Catalog on the smartphone. The app details page for a web app appears
with a gray background. Because web-distributed apps have not been
reviewed by HP, they cannot be found in App Catalog on the smartphone;
they may, however, appear in Software Manager after they are installed.
Beta apps. Beta apps are prerelease versions of applications that are in the
final stages of development. Beta apps are usually delivered to the
smartphone via links and are downloaded and installed using App Catalog
on the smartphone. The app details page for a beta app appears with a
green background and displays a banner that says BETA APP. Beta apps
cannot be found in App Catalog; they may, however, appear in Software
Manager after they are installed.
Homebrew or preware. Homebrew or preware applications are
applications that are developed outside the webOS developer network. HP
cannot assist with finding, purchasing, downloading, installing, updating, or
removing these applications. See I want to install an app on my smartphone

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

239

from a source other than App Catalog for more information about
homebrew apps.
If you can’t find an application using App Catalog, try the following steps.
• Make sure you have a data connection (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).
• If you are making a data connection over the AT&T data network and are
in roaming coverage, check to see if you have data roaming enabled.
Open Phone
, open the application menu, and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Under Network, tap Data Roaming, and tap Enabled. Note
that additional charges may apply if you enable data roaming.
• Close App Catalog, reopen App Catalog, and then try the search again.
• On a computer, go to precentral.net. On precentral.net, do the following:
• Click the apps link at the top of the page and select App Gallery.
• Under App Catalog Apps, enter the name of the application, and
click Search.
• Under Web Dist Apps, enter the app name and click Search.
• Under Beta apps, enter the app name and click Search.
• If you find the app, click the link Download Now - webOS Link
below the application image. When prompted, enter your mobile
phone number. Click Send to my phone. HP sends a text message
to your smartphone with a link to the application in App Catalog.
After the text message arrives, tap the link.
• Go to the app developer’s website and confirm the app name (including
spelling) and that the app is available for webOS.
• If the app is not available for webOS, contact the developer to find
out if a webOS version will be available soon.
• If the app name you used in previous searches was not correct, go to
precentral.net and repeat the steps with the correct name and
spelling. If the app still doesn’t appear, the app is not currently
available for your smartphone through the webOS distribution
channels. There are several reasons why this may occur. For
example, the app may not be compatible with your smartphone
model, the app may not be supported by AT&T, the app may not be
supported in your region, or the app may be a homebrew app.
• Try looking for another app that provides similar features.

240

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

I’m having trouble purchasing an app
• If you see a charge of exactly $1.00, the $1.00 charge has been applied by
the online retailer as a credit validation charge. This is a temporary charge
that should be removed shortly. If the charge is not removed after 24
hours, contact Palm Support: Go to palm.com/support. Select your
smartphone and AT&T, and click Support Services. Select one of the
support options.
• If you have been charged multiple times for the same app, you must
provide proof to HP. If the charge is not removed after 24 hours, contact
Palm Support: Go to palm.com/support. Select your smartphone and
AT&T, and click Support Services. Select one of the support options.
• If App Catalog requests that you enter your billing information after you
already entered it, this means that HP reset your account due to billing
address inconsistencies. Re-enter your billing address in App Catalog (see
Update or delete a billing account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Card Validation” (credit card number and
card type do not match), this means that the credit card number is valid,
but does not match the credit card type. Verify and correct your card
information (see Update or delete a billing account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Card Validation” (country and credit
information are set incorrectly), this means that the credit card number is
not valid for the country in which your smartphone was activated. Verify
and correct your credit card information (see Update or delete a billing
account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Couldn’t Add Credit Card,” this means
that the credit card information could not be added to your account. The
Address Validation Service is temporarily unavailable. Try again later to
add the credit card information (see Update or delete a billing account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Couldn’t update,” try again later to update
your credit card information (see Update or delete a billing account).

I’m having trouble downloading an application through App
Catalog
• If you have another version of the app installed on the smartphone
without using App Catalog, delete it before installing the App Catalog
version. All applications have a unique App ID, even those that did not

originate in App Catalog. Your webOS smartphone can serve only one
App ID instance at any given time.
• If you received an error message that there is not enough room to install
the app, make space for the new application by deleting another
application (see Delete applications).
IMPORTANT Information stored in an application is stored only within the
application, so you cannot access this info after you delete the app. Before you
delete an app, write down any info you want to save. Alternately, you can save a
screen capture of relevant info by pressing and holding Option + Sym + P.
Screens you capture are saved in the screencaptures folder in Photos.

TIP If you delete an app purchased from App Catalog, you don’t have to purchase
the application again. Purchased applications are associated with your Palm profile
account (see Reinstall a deleted application).

• Look for the app in Software Manager (see Manage applications with
Software Manager). You may see one of the following icons to the right of
the app name:
Table 2. App Download Status Icons
Icon

Description
The download or installation of the app failed. Tap the icon
and follow the prompts to fix the issue.
The app is currently downloading.
The app download is currently paused. Tap the icon to
resume the download.
The application is already on your smartphone. The icon
indicates that a new version is available. You can tap the
icon to download and install the new version at any time.
Look on the bottom of the first page in the Launcher to
find your app.

• Make sure you have a data connection (see I don’t know if I have a data
connection).

• If you are making a data connection over the AT&T data network and are
in roaming coverage, check to see if you have data roaming enabled.
Open Phone
, open the application menu, and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Under Network, tap Data Roaming, and tap Enabled. Note
that additional charges may apply if you enable data roaming.
• Connect to a Wi-Fi network, and then try the download again (see Wi-Fi).
• Restart your smartphone, and then try the download again (see Restart
your smartphone).

I’m having trouble installing an app from App Catalog
• If you received one of the following errors, the app is not compatible with
your smartphone:
This application is not available for your model.
This application is not available for your carrier.
This application is not available in your country.
This application cannot run on your current operating system.
Use the System Updates app to install the system update and try
again.
This is not a valid webOS application.
• If you received an error message other than the ones shown above, follow
the prompts to reinstall the app.
• Delete the application (see Delete applications).
TIP If you delete an app purchased from App Catalog, you don’t have to purchase

the application again. Purchased applications are associated with your Palm profile
account (see Reinstall a deleted application).

• Restart your smartphone, and then try the download again (see Restart
your smartphone).

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

241

I want to install an app on my smartphone from a source other
than App Catalog
App Catalog, which includes the on-device catalog and the associated web
and beta distribution channels, is the only officially supported mechanism
for installing applications on your Veer. Third-party sources may make
applications available for installation on your smartphone via alternative
mechanisms. These apps are sometimes referred to as “homebrew” apps.
Homebrew apps have not been tested and certified by HP. HP cannot assist
with the finding, purchasing, downloading, installing, or removing of
applications that are not from App Catalog.
Installing homebrew applications can modify your webOS smartphone in
any number of ways that may cause your smartphone to behave erratically
over time. While your smartphone may work fine with these applications on
the current version of webOS, it is possible that the application could cause
issues with your smartphone in future versions of webOS.
If you installed an application via a mechanism other than App Catalog, you
may find that you cannot download or install software updates, but the
smartphone continues to prompt you to update. If you have installed such
an application, you need to remove the app before attempting to update
your webOS smartphone. Follow the developer’s instructions on how to
uninstall these apps.
If you installed an app that was intended for a wireless service provider
other than AT&T, that app is also not certified by HP for your smartphone
and you need to uninstall the app before updating your smartphone.

NOTE Be sure to make a backup copy of any information stored in the app before
you uninstall it. If the developer does not provide a way to back up the data, you
can write down the information to save it. Alternately, hold down Option + Sym +
P to save screen captures of important data to the screencaptures folder in
Photos.

If you see issues with your smartphone after a webOS update and you have
a homebrew application installed, use webOS Doctor to restore your
smartphone to factory default settings. A partial or full erase does not return
the smartphone to factory settings after some homebrew apps have been

242

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

installed. See T6. Tether your smartphone to your computer and reinstall
webOS.

Transferring information to and from your
computer
I bought a song through Amazon MP3 and want to transfer it
to my computer
You can copy music files on your smartphone to your computer for use with
a desktop music player. For instructions, see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer.

I copied files from my computer, but I can’t see or play them on
my smartphone
When you connect your smartphone to your computer in USB Drive mode,
you can copy any file onto your smartphone. However, each media
application on your smartphone—Photos, Music, and Videos—can display
or play files in certain file formats only. If your media file is in an unsupported
format, you can’t use it on your smartphone.
For a list of supported photo types, see Photos. For a list of supported music
and ringtone file types, see Music. For a list of supported video file types, see
Videos.

When I open the folder representing my smartphone on my
computer, I see subfolders. Do I need to move my files into
these folders?
The default folders are there to help you organize files you copy to and from
your computer. But you can copy files from your computer into any folder
you want—you can create your own folders, or just drag your files to the top

level of the drive. As long as the file is in a supported format, your
smartphone can detect and open it.

NOTE If you move a music file into the ringtones folder, the Music application
cannot find it.

Backing up and restoring data
I need to reset my smartphone but don’t understand the
difference among the erase options
The four erase options are as follows:
Erase Apps & Data: Erases all application data and settings, as well as any
applications you installed from App Catalog.
Erase USB Drive: Erases all files stored in USB drive storage, such as
pictures, videos, and music.
Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you installed, and USB
drive storage files. Select this option if you want a clean erase of your
currently installed apps and files but plan to continue using the smartphone.
Secure Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you installed,
and USB drive storage files. Select this option if you are planning to give the
smartphone away, and you want your data and files to be unrecoverable
even using a third-party tool.
For more information, see Erase data and reset your smartphone.

How do I get my data back after a full or partial erase?
After you perform one of the erase options, on your smartphone, enter your
existing Palm profile email address and password—don’t create a new one!
When you do this, all data that has been backed up to your profile—
contacts, calendar events, and tasks, as well as apps you bought through
App Catalog—is restored to your smartphone. To restore information about
your online accounts to your smartphone, simply enter the password for
each account when prompted after the erase— synchronization begins
again.
The Erase USB Drive option and the two full erase options delete
everything stored in your smartphone’s USB drive (pictures, videos, music,
documents, PDF files, ringtones, and so on). You need to have copies of
those files available elsewhere if you want to restore them to your
smartphone. For example, you can save copies on your computer and then
transfer them back to your smartphone (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer).

I want to do a full erase, but the screen is cracked or doesn’t
respond to taps
If you can’t do a full erase using the screen, you can use a keyboard shortcut.
Press and hold Option
+ Sym
+ power
for 15 seconds.

My bookmarks were restored, but the thumbnail icon is not
displaying
Web bookmarks are part of the data backed up to your Palm profile. After a
partial or full erase, a bookmark is restored with a generic thumbnail icon.
After you revisit the page for which you created the bookmark, the
thumbnail icon is restored.

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

243

Updates
I dismissed a system update notification, and now I don’t know
how to get the update on my smartphone
If you have a phone network connection or a Wi-Fi connection and the
battery has at least a 30% charge, you can start the update yourself: Open
System Updates
. Your smartphone checks for the availability of the
update, and if one is available, tap Download Now. The download happens
in the background, so you can continue to use your smartphone until the
actual installation takes over.
Your smartphone continues to remind you to install the update after it has
been downloaded. You are also reminded that the smartphone will install
the update automatically the next time you charge your smartphone. An
update installation cannot begin unless you have at least a 30% charge on
your battery. If you tap Install Later, the update will automatically install the
next time all three of the following conditions are true: the smartphone is
charging and idle, and the battery has at least a 30% charge.

My smartphone froze while I was downloading or installing a
system update
If this happens, you can use webOS Doctor to restore your smartphone and
install the system update from your computer using the USB cable. On your
computer, go to palm.com/support to download webOS Doctor.

244

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Transferring information from another HP
webOS phone
I want to get files off my old webOS phone, but the screen is
cracked or doesn’t respond to taps, so I can’t access USB Drive
mode
If you can’t put your smartphone in USB Drive mode using the screen, you
can use a keyboard shortcut. Connect your smartphone to your computer
using the USB cable, and then press and hold Option
+ Sym
+ U.

Making room on your smartphone
If you store a large number of files, or install many applications, the internal
memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here are some ways to clear space
on your smartphone:
• Photos, Videos, Music, Amazon MP3 (if available), Quickoffice, PDF
View: Large files take up a lot of memory. Move files to your computer
(see Copy files between your smartphone and your computer), or delete
them from your smartphone.
• Email: Email attachments can be large and consume lots of memory.
Copy attachments to your computer (see Copy files between your
smartphone and your computer), or delete large files from your
smartphone (see Delete a message). You may also want to empty the
deleted items folder.
• Messaging: If you do a lot of text or multimedia messaging, delete
messages or conversations (see Delete a message or Delete a
conversation). Also, attachments to multimedia messages can be large
and consume lots of memory. Copy attachments to your computer (see
Copy files between your smartphone and your computer), or delete large
files from your smartphone (see Delete a message).

• Web: Delete stored web browsing information by clearing your history,
cookies, and cache (see Customize web browser settings).
• Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications
(see Delete applications).

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

245

246

Chapter 14 : Troubleshooting

Glossary of Terms
airplane mode
A mode in which all the wireless services on your smartphone are turned off.
Wireless services include the phone network connection used for making
and receiving calls, the Wi-Fi feature, VPN, and Bluetooth® wireless
technology. See Turn wireless services off (airplane mode).

message and return to your list of messages. Or when you finish writing a
memo, make the back gesture to close and save the memo and return to the
display of all your memos. See Go up one level in an app (back gesture).
Making the back gesture is also the way you save your work in many apps. If
you don’t see a Done button, make the back gesture to save your work.

application menu
A menu hidden in the upper-left corner of the screen that lists items
available in an application, such as cut, copy, and paste (where available);
preferences; and application help. To open the application menu, drag down
from the upper-left corner of the smartphone (above the screen) onto the
screen, or tap the application name in the upper-left corner of the screen.
See Open the application menu for details. See also connection menu.

card
A minimized view of an open application. You can easily move among and
reorder cards in Card view. To reduce the app you’re working in to a card,
tap the center of the gesture area, or flick up once from the gesture area. Tap
a card to restore the full-screen view of the application and continue
working in it. See also Card view. A group of related cards appears in Card
view as a card stack. See Work with stacked cards for information.

application search
A search feature that is available after you open certain applications. To
search, simply begin typing a search term when the list view is displayed—
for example, a contact name or phone number, the subject text of an email
message, or a few words from a memo. See also Just Type.

Card view
The view on your smartphone that displays all open applications as
minimized cards, allowing you to easily move among and reorder them. The
background of Card view is your wallpaper. Don’t confuse Card view with
the Launcher (see Launcher), which shows you all the apps installed on your
smartphone, not just the open ones. To get to Card view when an app is
displayed full-screen, flick up from the gesture area to the screen, or tap the
center of the gesture area.

application update
An update from the developer of an application you installed through HP
webOS App Catalog on your smartphone. You can check for application
updates manually in Software Manager. Additional fees may apply. See
Manually check for application updates.
back
The gesture you use to move up one level from a detailed view to a more
general view of the application you’re working in. The back gesture is a
quick swipe from right to left in the gesture area. For example, when you
finish reading an email message, make the back gesture to close the

connection menu
A menu hidden in the upper-right corner of the screen that lets you turn on/
off wireless connection features such as Bluetooth® wireless technology and
your wireless service provider’s network. To open the connection menu,
drag down from the upper-right corner of the smartphone (above the
screen) onto the screen, or tap the upper-right corner of the screen. See
Open the connection menu for details. See also application menu and
airplane mode.

Glossary of Terms

247

dashboard
A list of all your notifications. When one or more notification icons appear at
the bottom of the screen, tap the icons to open the dashboard. Tap a
dashboard item to act on it. See also notification.
Data Transfer Assistant
A tool that enables you to do a one-way export of information such as
contacts and calendar events from a desktop organizer to your smartphone.
See Export data from a desktop organizer on your computer.
drag
A slow movement of your finger on the touchscreen used, for example, to
scroll slowly through a list or move an icon in the Launcher. Drag slowly up
from the gesture area to display Quick Launch when it’s hidden. See Use
gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
DRM-free file
A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management. DRM-free files
can be copied as many times as you like and can be played on your
smartphone.
Exhibition
A feature of your smartphone that allows you to access special apps while
using the smartphone with an HP Touchstone charging dock (see
Exhibition).
favorite
A contact that you identify as someone you want to be able to quickly reach
by phone, email, or text/multimedia message. Creating a favorite from a
contact lets you view and touch base with that contact in just a few taps.
You can create and manage favorites in Contacts (see Create a favorite) and
in Phone (see Work with favorites).
flick
A fast skimming of your finger vertically on the touchscreen used, for
example, to scroll quickly up or down. Flick up from the gesture area to get
to Card view when you’re working in an app. See Use gestures: tap, swipe,
drag, flick, pinch.

248

Glossary of Terms

gesture area
The strip beneath the touchscreen that you use to perform the back gesture,
among others. You begin some gestures in the gesture area and complete
them on the touchscreen, for example, the slow drag that displays Quick
Launch when you have an application filling the screen.
HP webOS
The operating system of your HP Veer 4G. Key features of HP webOS
include gestures, cards, merged views, and linked contacts.
Just Type
The feature, formerly known as universal search, that enables you to make
calls, search for applications and contacts on your smartphone, and search
the web simply by typing the number or search term in either Card view or
the Launcher. You can also use Quick Actions to create new items such as
email messages, text messages, or memos by entering all or part of the
item’s text. See Just Type.
Launcher
A group of screens (called pages) that display all your applications. To open
the Launcher, tap
in Quick Launch (see Quick Launch), or from the
active application, flick up twice from the gesture area to the screen. If you
are in Card view, open the Launcher by flicking up once from the gesture
area. In the Launcher, swipe up, down, left, and right to see all your apps.
Tap an app icon to open the application. You can add, delete, or rename
Launcher pages (see Add a Launcher page, Rename a Launcher page, or
Delete a Launcher page).
linked contact
A contact containing information from more than one source. For example,
if you have a work contact in Exchange and a personal contact for the same
person in Google, the Contacts application automatically recognizes the
connection and links the two contacts so you can see all the information for
a person in the same place—but the information is kept separate in the
different accounts where it originated. You can also manually link and unlink
contacts.
merged view
A feature on your smartphone that displays data from several sources in a
single view, but keeps the sources of your data separate.

Let’s say you use Google calendar for your personal events and your
company’s Outlook calendar for business events. Your smartphone’s
Calendar application displays events from both calendars in a single view,
called All.
Likewise, if you set up multiple email accounts, the Email application
displays the messages from all your account inboxes in a single view, called
All inboxes. And in Messaging, all your messages with the same person
show up in a single conversation view, whether they are text, multimedia, or
instant messages. See also linked contact.
notification
A message that appears at the bottom of the screen alerting you of an
incoming or missed call; an incoming voicemail, email, or text messages; an
upcoming event; and more. In most cases, you can tap a notification to act
on it. See also dashboard. Throw a notification off the side of the screen to
dismiss it.
online account
The HP Synergy feature makes it easy to synchronize all data from an online
account. An online account is a web-based or server-based location where
you keep contacts and/or calendar information, such as Google or
Exchange. (Such web-based or server-based accounts are sometimes talked
about as being “in the cloud.”) You can access the info in those accounts in
the Contacts and Calendar applications on your smartphone. You can also
set up your smartphone to download contacts from online accounts such as
Facebook, and to post photos to online accounts such as Facebook or
Photobucket. See Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones.
Option
key
The key you use to enter characters that appear above the letters on the
keyboard keys. Press once to enter a single character. Press twice to lock the
alternate character feature, so you can enter a series of characters. Also,
press and hold Option
and then drag your finger onscreen to move the
cursor in text.
Palm profile
A Palm profile gives you access to services like automatic updates, backup of
your data, and more. You create a Palm profile by entering a working email
address during initial setup of your Veer (see Set up your smartphone). Your
Palm profile also identifies the location on the web where the data you store

in your Palm profile account is backed up. (You cannot see or change this
data on the web, however.) See also Palm profile account.
Palm profile account
An account that is automatically set up for you when you create your Palm
profile. You can assign contacts and calendar events to it. Palm profile items
are included in the daily backup of information to your Palm profile but do
not synchronize with any of your online accounts. See also Palm profile.
pinch
A gesture used to zoom in for a magnified view or zoom out to see a larger
area. To zoom in, you pinch out: Place the thumb and index fingertips close
together on the touchscreen; then slowly spread them apart. To zoom out,
you pinch in: Place the thumb and index fingertips apart on the touchscreen,
and slowly bring them together.
proximity sensor
The proximity sensor makes the screen go dark while you are on a call and
have your smartphone up to your ear. It also makes the screen go dark when
you are on a call and your smartphone is covered by another item. This
prevents accidental taps on the screen while on a call. It also saves battery
power. See also Why the screen goes dark.
Quick Launch
A lineup of up to five icons that give you quick access to your favorite
applications. By default, Quick Launch displays icons for the following apps:
Phone, Email, Contacts, and Calendar. The fifth icon is the Launcher. You
can easily drag icons onto and off of Quick Launch to change the lineup of
apps (see Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch).
Quick Launch always appears at the bottom of Card view. Tap an icon to
open the app. You can also open Quick Launch from any maximized
application window by dragging up from the gesture area to the screen.
Move your finger to the app you want, and then lift your finger. The
application opens.
smart folder
One of two folders—All Inboxes and All Flagged—that can be set to appear
at the top of the Account List view in the Email application See Set email
preferences.

Glossary of Terms

249

swipe
A light, fast horizontal skimming of your finger on the touchscreen used, for
example, to go from page to page in the Launcher or from day to day in
Calendar. The back gesture is an example of a swipe used in the gesture
area. See Use gestures: tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
Sym
key
The key you use to enter symbols and accented characters. Press Sym
to open the full table of symbols. Press Sym
plus a letter key to narrow
the table to symbols associated with that letter—for example, press Sym
+ e to enter é.
Synergy feature
The feature that lets you take advantage of merged views and linked
contacts on your smartphone. See Your HP Veer 4G.
system update
Updates provided to HP webOS and core applications such as Contacts and
Calendar. When a system update is available, a notification appears on your
smartphone. You can also check for system updates manually. See Update
the HP webOS operating system.
tap
A light quick touch on the touchscreen used, for example, to open an app by
tapping its icon. Use your fingertip to tap. Don’t use your fingernail, and
don’t use a pen or pencil—the screen does not respond to touches like that.
Also, don’t bear down. Make the tap firmly, but lightly. See Use gestures: tap,
swipe, drag, flick, pinch.

250

Glossary of Terms

Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones
Table 1. Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones*
Account

Applications that display
data from this account

Relationship between
smartphone and online
account**

Can I edit and add data to
this account on my
smartphone?

Can I edit and add data to
this account on the web?

What happens when I
delete this account from
one app?***

AIM

Messaging

Sync

Yes

The account is removed
from all apps

Exchange

Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,
Email

Sync

Yes

Yes****

Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps

Facebook

Contacts, Calendar,
Photos, Videos

Contacts, Calendar:
Transfer (from web to
smartphone)

Photos and Videos only

Contacts and Calendar
only

Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps

Photos, Videos: Transfer/
upload (from smartphone
to web)
Google

Contacts, Calendar,
Messaging, Email

Sync

Yes

Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps

Contacts

Transfer (from web to
smartphone)

Yes

Only Contacts is affected

Palm profile

Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,
Memos; see Backup for
full list of affected info

See Backup for details

Yes

See Backup for details

Photobucket

Photos

Transfer/upload (from
smartphone to web)

Yes

Only info in Photos is
deleted

Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones

251

Table 1. Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones*
Account

Applications that display
data from this account

Relationship between
smartphone and online
account**

Can I edit and add data to
this account on my
smartphone?

Can I edit and add data to
this account on the web?

What happens when I
delete this account from
one app?***

Yahoo!

Contacts, Calendar,
Messaging, Email

Contacts: Transfer (from
web to smartphone)
Calendar: Sync

Contacts: No
Calendar: Yes

Yes

Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps

YouTube

Videos

Transfer/upload (from
smartphone to web)

Yes

Only info in Videos is
deleted

The frequency with which data is synced or transferred between the smartphone and online accounts depends on the account you are using. For information about
account sync intervals, go to kb.palm.com and search for article number 47817.
*The information contained in this table is subject to change with webOS updates.
**Sync: A two-way exchange and update of your data. What you add or change in one location is automatically added or changed in the other.
Transfer: A one-way update of your data. You can add or change data only in one location; the data is then copied to the other location.
***Only the data on your smartphone is deleted. The data source is not affected. If you delete an account from your smartphone using the Accounts app, all data
from that account is removed from all apps associated with the account.
****You can also edit and add data to an Exchange account from a desktop application, such as Outlook.

252

Online accounts available for HP webOS smartphones

Specifications
Table 1. Specifications
Category

Description

Radio

• Tri-band UMTS (850/1900/2100)
• HSDPA 7.2
• Quad-band GSM/GPRS/EDGE (850/900/1800/1900)

Features

•
•
•
•
•
•

Processor technologies

• Qualcomm MSM 7230 processor

Battery

• Rechargeable lithium-ion (nonremovable)
• 910mA/hr power capacity

Operating system

• HP webOS

Camera

•
•
•
•
•

Size

• 3.3 in. x 2.1 in. x 0.6 in. (84 mm x 54.5 mm x 15.1 mm)

Weight

• 3.6 ounces (103 grams)

Operating temperature range

• 32°F to 113°F (0°C to 45°C)
• 20% to 90% RH

Speakerphone
Dual mic
Microphone mute option
TTY-compatible
Ringer switch
Built-in GPS (A-GPS)

5 megapixel
Auto-exposure
Auto-white balance
Geotagging
Video capture

Specifications

253

Table 1. Specifications

254

Hp Hewlett Packard Veer 4G Atandt User Guide

Hewlett-Packard-Veer-4G-Atandt-User-Guide-786229 hewlett-packard-veer-4g-atandt-user-guide-786229

Veer 4G (AT&T) - User Guide Veer_UG_ATT_en Free User Guide for HP Mobile Phone, Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation